IELTS Writing Preparation Book

[Academic & General Training]

Written & Edited by

- Imran Saifur
- Asir Intisar Samy
- Anupam Chakraborty
- Anindya Chowdhury
- Syed Khairul Hassan

i
 MENTRS’ Education Series

Published by

Education Series
166/1 Mirpur Road, Kalabagan,
Dhaka-1205. Bangladesh.

Phone : 48119310
[Link]

IELTS Series

15th Edition: July 2025

Copyright @ 2013 Education Series. All rights reserved.

(No part of this book can be reproduced in any form without the written
permission of the copyright owner.)

AbjvBb cwi‡ekK:

Gi †h‡Kvb eB N‡i e‡m †c‡Z wfwRU Kiæb [Link]

A_ev †dvb Kiæb 16297 GB bv¤^v‡i|

ii
 Preamble

MENTORS’ eiveiB mwVK wb‡`©kbv I Dchy³ cwi‡e‡ki gva¨‡g wk¶v_x©‡`i‡K IELTS Exam Gi Rb¨ mdjfv‡e
ˆZix K‡i Avm‡Q| wk¶v_x©‡`i Pvwn`v I cÖ‡qvRb we‡ePbv K‡i IELTS Writing eBwU †ei Kivi D‡`¨vM
†bqv n‡q‡Q| eBwU‡Z Wrtiting Gi A‡bK LyuwUbvwU welq Zz‡j aivi †Póv Kiv n‡q‡Q, hv wk¶v_x©‡`i A‡bK DcKv‡i
Avm‡e|

Reading Ges Writing n‡”Q G‡K A‡b¨i cwic~iK, wk¶v_x© hZ †ekx co‡e ZZ fv‡jv wjL‡Z cvi‡e| ZvB wk¶v_x©‡`i
cÖwZ Aby‡iva, hZ cvi‡eb cov I †jLvi Af¨vm Ki‡eb| GUv mvgwMÖKfv‡e Avcbvi IELTS cix¶v QvovI D”P I Ab¨vb¨
cÖwZ‡hvwMZvg~jK cix¶vq Kv‡R jvM‡e| wewfbœ wek¦we`¨vj‡q co–qv wk¶v_x© Ges PvKzixi Av‡e`bKvix‡`i Bs‡iRx wk¶vqI
GB eBwU h‡_ó DcKv‡i Avm‡e| eBwU‡Z 132 Essay Real Writing Task 2 Questions Ges wKQz Solution
†`Iqv Av‡Q hv wk¶v_x©‡`i cÖ¯‘wZ‡Z Kv‡R jvM‡e|

eBwU wk¶v_x©‡`i DcKv‡i jvM‡j Avgv‡`i AK¬všÍ cwikªg mv_©K n‡e| wk¶v_x©‡`i †h †Kvb Suggestion, Advice Avgiv
mvb‡›` MÖnY Ki‡ev| eB Gi †Kvb e¨vcv‡i Av‡jvPbv Kivi cÖ‡qvRb g‡b n‡j Avgv‡`i Awd‡m Avcbv‡`i ¯^vMZ Rvbvw”Q|

mevB‡K MENTORS’ G Avmvi Rb¨ Avgš¿Y iBj|

iii
 MENTRS’ Education Series

Table of Contents

Topic Page
Preamble iii
IELTS Related Information v
Part 1 : Academic Writing Task 1 : Writing Report 11

Part 2 : Sample Answers with Guideline 23

Academic Task 1

Part 3 : Academic Task 1 Exercises 35

Part 4 : Real Exam Questions 57

Part 5: Academic & General Writing Task 2 : Writing Essay 219

Part 6: Academic Writing Task 2 239

Real Questions

iv
 IELTS Related Information

IELTS (International English Language Testing System)

IELTS n‡”Q AvšÍR©vwZKfv‡e ¯^xK…Z GKwU cix¶v e¨e¯’v, hv DbœZ we‡k¦i †`k¸‡jv‡Z (we‡kl K‡i Commonwealth
f~³ †`k¸‡jv‡Z) wek¦we`¨vjq ch©v‡q D”P wk¶vi Rb¨ fwZ©i GKwU c~e© kZ©| D”P wk¶vi Rb¨ cÖ‡qvRbxq Bs‡iRx Ávb
Av‡Q wKbv, Zv hvPvB Kivi D‡Ï‡k¨ 1989 mv‡j UK, Australia- Gi †hŠ_ D‡`¨v‡M IELTS Pvjy nq|
wk¶v_x©i D‡Ï‡k¨i Dci wfwË K‡i IELTS Academic Module ev IELTS General Training Module †e‡Q
wb‡Z nq| USA mn DbœZ we‡k¦ wek¦we`¨vjq (Post Graduation, Under Graduation) ch©v‡q fwZ©i Rb¨
wk¶v_x©‡`i Academic IELTS cix¶v w`‡Z nq| GQvov Ab¨vb¨ †¶‡Î †hgb- ¯^í mg‡qi †Kvm©, Bwg‡MÖkb BZ¨vw`
Purpose Gi Rb¨ General Training Module IELTS test w`‡Z nq| Canada, Australia, NZ-G
Immigration Purpose G IELTS General Training Module e¨eüZ nq|

IELTS n‡”Q LyeB weÁvb m¤§Z GKwU cix¶v| IELTS G fv‡jv Kivi Rb¨ cÖ‡qvRb Practice| IELTS G 6 ch©šÍ
score Kiv Lye †ekx KwVb bq| Gi †ekx score Zzj‡Z PvB‡j wk¶v_x©‡K ‡ewk cwikªg Ki‡Z n‡e| evsjv‡`‡ki A‡bK
cix¶v_x©iv 7.5 †_‡K 8.5 ch©šÍ b¤^i cv‡”Q| GKRb wk¶v_x© hZevi B”Qv IELTS cix¶v w`‡Z cvi‡e|

IELTS cix¶vi welqe¯‘

Academic Ges General Training Module IELTS Dfq ai‡bi cix¶vq PviwU K‡i Module _v‡K-
Reading, Writing, Listening Ges Speaking Module| General Training Ges Academic IELTS G
Listening Ges Speaking Module `yÕwU Awfbœ nq, wKš‘ Reading Ges Writing Module G wKQzUv wfbœZv Av‡Q|

Listening

Academic General
Reading Reading

Academic General
Writing Writing
Speaking

(1) Reading Module wU 60 wgwb‡Ui| cix¶v_x©iv D‡Ï‡k¨i Dci wfwË K‡i Academic Reading Module
A_ev General Training Module cix¶v w`‡q _v‡K| Dfq Module G wZbwU Passage _v‡K Ges cÖwZwU
Module G Reading Comprehension g~j¨vqb Kivi Rb¨ Av‡Q wewfbœ ai‡bi cÖkœ| mnR †_‡K KwVbZi cÖkœ wb‡qB
wefvM¸‡jv mvRv‡bv nq|

v
 MENTRS’ Education Series

(2) Writing Module wUI 60 wgwb‡Ui| G‡¶‡ÎI cix¶v_x©iv D‡Ï‡k¨i Dci wfwË K‡i Academic Module A_ev
General Training Module cix¶v w`‡q _v‡K| `y‡Uv Module- G cix¶v_x©‡`i wfbœ wfbœ Style Gi `ywU Writing
Task Complete Ki‡Z nq| Writing Topic Gi †¶‡Î †Kvb Choice †`qv nq bv|

(3) Listening Test Module wU 30 wgwb‡Ui| GLv‡b 4wU Section _v‡K hv GKevi ïbv‡bv nq| Listening G
cÖkœ/mgm¨v¸‡jv cix¶vq cÖ_g †_‡K †kl w`‡K ax‡i ax‡i mnR †_‡K KwVbZi n‡Z _v‡K| cÖwZwU Section n‡Z cv‡i
K_‡cvK_b ev ¯^M‡Zvw³i| Listening Section mg~n cix¶v_x©‡K GKeviB ïbv‡bv nq Ges cÖkœ¸‡jvi DËi K¨v‡m‡U
PjvKvjxb mg‡q Ki‡Z nq| me‡k‡l cix¶v_x©‡`i Ab¨ GKwU Answer Sheet-G †jLvi mgq †`Iqv nq|
(4) Speaking Module wU n‡jv GKRb specially Trained Examiner Gi mv‡_ GKRb cix¶v_x©i mv¶vrKvi|
GLv‡b Examiner cix¶v_x©‡K wewfbœ cÖkœ Ki‡e Ges cix¶v_x©‡K GKwU Topic w`‡e ejvi Rb¨| GLv‡b wk¶v_x©i †gŠwLK
†hvM¨Zv wePvi K‡i †`L‡e Examiner| Speaking Module Gi mv¶vrKviwUi mgq 10-15 wgwb‡Ui|
IELTS cix¶vi Marking Scale

IELTS Gi cÖwZwU Module G Avjv`vfv‡e Marking Kiv nq 1 †_‡K 9 ch©šÍ †¯‹‡j| GB Band Score ¸‡jv
cy•Lvbycy•Liæ‡c Marking Guideline Abyhvqx Kiv nq| GB Marking Guideline mevi Rb¨ Db¥y³ bv, G‡¶‡Î wb‡Pi
ˆewkó¨¸wj AbyKiY Kiv nq-
1. Non User
2. Intermittent User
3. Extremely Limited User
4. Limited User
5. Modest User
6. Competent User
7. Good User
8. Very Good User
9. Expert User

cÖwZwU Module Gi Marks Avjv`vfv‡e Score Sheet G cÖKvk Kiv nq Ges ‡mB mv‡_ PviwU Module Gi Mo
Band Score I cÖKvk Kiv nq|
Band Score

IELTS cix¶vq †Kvb cvk ev †dj †bB| cix¶v_x©i Band Score †`‡L Zvi Bswjk e¨envi Ges †evSvi ¶gZv †evSv
hvq| †Kvm©¸‡jv‡Z wK ai‡bi English e¨envi nq Zvi Dci wfwË K‡i K‡jR Ges University wba©viY K‡i _v‡K †Kvb
Course Gi Rb¨ KZ Band Score `iKvi|
mvaviYZ University ¸‡jv‡Z fwZ©i Rb¨ IELTS G 6.5-7.5 †c‡Z nq| GLv‡b Section Wise I b~b¨Zg Band
Score _vK‡Z nq (‡hgb Writing Ges Reading G 6.0, Ab¨vb¨ Section ¸‡jv‡Z Gi Kg Band Score †c‡jI
Pj‡e)| Diploma Ges TAFE Gi Rb¨ b~b¨Zg Band Score n‡”Q 5.5. †KD b~b¨Zg Band Score Ki‡Z bv
cvi‡j wk¶v_x©‡K Bs‡iRx †Kvm© (English Course, ELICOS) Ki‡Z n‡e wek¦we`¨vjq¸‡jv‡Z| Gi Rb¨ Avjv`v wd
w`‡Z n‡e University/Institution †K|

vi
IELTS Gi Band Score Requirement wewfbœ wek¦we`¨vjq Ges Subject Gi Dci wbf©i K‡i| bx‡Pi Table G
GKwU aviYv †`Iqv n‡jv-
Course Band Score Required
Diploma 5.0-6.0
Undergraduate 6.0-7.0
Postgraduate 7.0-8.0

Z‡e Engineering I Medical Science G covi Rb¨ IELTS G 7.0 ev Zvi †ekx Band Score _vKv Riæix|
wk¶v_x©iv Kg IELTS Score wb‡qI Desired Course G fwZ© n‡Z cvi‡eb| Z‡e wk¶v_x©‡K Foreign University
†Z wM‡q 4-10 mßv‡ni GKwU English Course Ki‡Z n‡e| GUv e¨q mv‡c¶ e¨vcvi|
IELTS Score Qvov fwZ©

fv‡jv †Kvb wek¦we`¨vj‡q fwZ© n‡Z n‡j wk¶v_x©i IELTS Band Score _vK‡ZB n‡e| mvaviYZt wbgœgv‡bi
wek¦we`¨vjq¸‡jv I wbgœgv‡bi Institution ¸‡jv‡Z IELTS QvovB wk¶v_x©iv fwZ© n‡Z cvi‡eb| wbgœgv‡bi
wek¦we`¨vjq¸‡jv‡Z fwZ©i myweav n‡”Q LiP Kg, Avi Amyweav n‡”Q cvk K‡i PvKzix cvIqvi m¤¢vebv k~b¨| ZvQvov IELTS
Qvov QvÎ wfmvi Rb¨ Av‡e`b Ki‡j wfmv bvKP nevi m¤¢vebv _v‡K|

IELTS Exam Authority

IELTS n‡”Q Cambridge University Ges A‡óªwjqvb Education Provider (IDP)-i GKwU †hŠ_ cix¶v e¨e¯’v,
G cix¶vi mg¯Í wKQz G `ywU cÖwZôvb wbqš¿Y K‡i| mviv c„w_ex‡Z G cix¶v Conduct, Proctor K‡i British Council
wKsev IDP g‡bvbxZ †Kvb cÖwZôvb (†hgb evsjv‡`‡k Victoria University)| Proctoring Ges Conducting hviv
K‡ib Zv‡`i mv‡_ Exam Authority-i Ges Band Score Gi †Kvb m¤úK© †bB| hw` †KD UK †Z Admission
wb‡Z Pvq Zvn‡j British Council G cix¶v †`Iqv fv‡jv|
g‡b ivL‡eb, IELTS cix¶vi Preparation/Coaching Ges IELTS cix¶vi Authority-i †Kvb Direct
Relationship †bB| Avcbvi Preparation fv‡jv _vK‡j Avcwb Aek¨B IELTS-G fv‡jv Score Ki‡Z cvi‡eb|
Ab¨w`‡K University Admission Ges Visa-i g‡a¨I †Kvb Direct Relationship †bB| cÖ‡qvRbxq †hvM¨Zv _vK‡j
University Admission w`‡e Avi h_v_© Ges Authentic Documents _vK‡j Embassy Visa w`‡e|

A‡b‡KiB g‡b cÖkœ nq †Kv_vq cix¶v †`Iqv fv‡jv| British Council ev Victoria University `y‡Uv Cambridge
Ges IDP ¯^xK…Z gv‡bi| myZivs †Kvb wØav ev mskq bv †i‡L wk¶v_x©iv †h †Kvb Centre †e‡Q wb‡Z cv‡ib| Pvwn`v evo‡j
fwel¨‡Z AviI Private cÖwZôvb Cambridge/IDP Aby‡gv`b mv‡c‡¶ G cix¶vi e¨e¯’v Ki‡Z cv‡i|

vii
 MENTRS’ Education Series

IELTS G High Score Gi wbðqZv cÖm‡½ wKQz K_v

G ai‡bi cÖkœ¸‡jv mvaviYZ cwÎKvi PUK`vi weÁvcb †`‡L weåvšÍ wk¶v_x©iv wR‡Ám K‡i _v‡Kb| IELTS Band
Score Gi cix¶vi cÖkœcÎ Cambridge Ges IDP-i Exam Authority K‡i _v‡K| cix¶vi Proctoring K‡i
British Council| cix¶vi DËicÎ Check K‡i Cambridge-IDP Exam Authority| IELTS cix¶vi wbw`©ó
w`‡b Cambridge University ‡_‡K cÖkœ Av‡m| Exam K‡¶B Question Paper †Lvjv nq Ges Zv cix¶v_x©‡`i‡K
‡`Iqv nq| cix¶vi ci Exam Sheet ¸‡jv Seal Mvjv K‡i Zv Avevi Cambridge University ‡Z cvwV‡q †`Iqv
nq wbix¶vi Rb¨| evsjv‡`‡k IELTS G Spoken cix¶v GKw`b Av‡M-c‡i AbywôZ nq| Cambridge wek¦we`¨vjq
Ges IDP-i g‡bvbxZ nv‡Z †Mvbv K‡qKRb Examiner Av‡Qb hviv wba©vwiZ cÖkœc‡Îi wfwˇZ Spoken Test †bb Ges
mZK©Zvi mv‡_ Marking K‡ib| cix¶v_xi e³e¨ I K_‡cvK_b mv‡_ mv‡_B m¤ú~Y©fv‡e Record Kiv nq| GB cix¶vi
Record ¸‡jv wØZxq cix¶K ï‡b cybivq Marking K‡ib| Dfq cix¶‡Ki Mark Gi Mo K‡i cix¶v_x©i Score
wba©viY Kiv nq Ges GB mg¯Í bw_ Ges Spoken Test Gi Record Gi ciB Cambridge G cvVv‡bv nq|
Cambridge KZ©„c¶ Record ¸‡jv †_‡K Random evQvB K‡i Marking Justification K‡i †`‡Lb| Avi G
Kvi‡YB Examiner iv me©`v mRvM _v‡Kb Marking G ¯^”QZv Ges Standard Gi e¨vcv‡i| Examiner-iv ‡Kvb
Coaching Class †bb bv Ges Zviv mvaviYfv‡e Unbiased _v‡Kb| m‡e©vcwi cix¶vq Ask MÖnY K‡i wk¶v_x© wb‡R|
cy‡iv Exam welqwUi mv‡_ †Kvb ‡KvwPs †m›UviB RwoZ bq| †KvwPs †m›Uvi †Kvbfv‡eB †¯‹v‡ii wbðqZv w`‡Z cv‡i bv|
IELTS G fv‡jv Ki‡Z n‡j wk¶v_x©‡K Aek¨B cwikªg Ki‡Z n‡e| wbqwgZ IELTS Related eB¸‡jv co‡Z n‡e|
Listening, Writing, Speaking Practice Ki‡Z n‡e| †KvwPs †m›Uvi¸‡jv mvaviYZ wk¶v_x©‡`i fv‡jv †MvQv‡bv
Guide Line Ges fv‡jv Practice Place †`q| GRb¨ wk¶v_x©iv †KvwPs †m›Uvi¸‡jvi mvnvh¨ wb‡Z cv‡ib| g‡b ivL‡Z
n‡e cwikªg Ki‡Z n‡e wk¶v_x©‡KB Avi cwikªgB G‡b †`‡e Kvw•LZ dj|
The Criteria of Assessing Writing Task
IELTS Exam-Gi Writing Part-wU‡Z Examinee A_©vr cix¶v_x©‡`i me‡P‡q eo †h mgm¨vwUi m¤§ywLb n‡Z nq, Zv
n‡jv Answering Method A_ev DËi †`qvi c×wZ m¤ú‡K© mxwgZ Ávb| GKRb Examiner A_ev cix¶K
Writing-G †h welq¸‡jv j¶¨ K‡i †m¸‡jv n‡jv-
1. Task Achievement (Task-1)/Task Response (Task-2)
2. Coherence and Cohesion
3. Lexical Resources
4. Grammatical Range & Accuracy

GLv‡b D‡jøL¨ †h, Examiner hLb GKwU Writing Script Check Ki‡eb, cÖ_‡gB wZwb †Lqvj Ki‡eb †h
Examinee A_©vr cix¶v_x©i DËi msMwZc~Y© n‡q‡Q wKbv, hv wR‡Ám Kiv n‡q‡Q wVK ZvB DËi w`‡q‡Qb wKbv| wØZxqZ
Point wU n‡jv Coherence and Cohesion- ‡hLv‡b Check Kiv nq †h DËiwU avivevwnK wKbv| DËiwUi
avivevwnKZv LyeB ¸iæZ¡c~Y© †Kbbv DËi hw` Haphazard A_©vr nheij nq Zvn‡j Presentation up-to-the-mark
nq bv| Z…Zxq Ges PZz_© Point n‡”Q Lexical Resources Ges Grammar and Sentence Structure †hLv‡b
Examinee A_©vr cix¶v_x©i fvlvMZ `¶Zv hvPvB Kiv nq| Linguistic capability is very important for
presentation.

viii
Dc‡ii Av‡jvPbv †Lqvj Ki‡j †`L‡eb †h Writing Task ¸‡jv‡Z cÖavbZ Presentation Skill A_©vr Avcbvi
Dc¯’vcbv‡KB ¸iæZ¡ †`qv n‡”Q| wVK G Kvi‡YB Avgiv G eBwU‡Z Lye mnR fvlvq Presentation Skill Gi Dci
we¯ÍvwiZ Av‡jvPbv K‡iwQ| GKB mv‡_ †ek wKQz D`vni‡Yi gva¨‡g cix¶v_x©‡`i IELTS Exam-Gi Rb¨ Prepare
Kivi †Póv K‡iwQ| GB me D`vniY¸‡jvi g‡a¨ A‡bK¸‡jv Recent IELTS Exam-Gi Questions Av‡Q hv
Sample Answer mn wel`fv‡e Av‡jvPbv Kiv n‡q‡Q|

IELTS Registration Point:

MENTRS’ is a ‘IELTS Registration Centre’ for British Council & IDP You can easily come to
Mentors’ and register for the IELTS examination. The fees are the same as in British Council
& IDP and you will have to come up with the required documents to facilitate the registration
process.

MENTRS' IELTS Preparation Program

Reading Module w`‡q MENTRS' Gi IELTS Program ïiæ nq| GB Module G m¤¢ve¨ me ai‡Yi
Questions Gi Dci wfwË K‡i K¬vm¸‡jv Design Kiv n‡q‡Q| Gi c‡iB ïiæ nq Listening Module. wk¶v_©xiv
†hb Lesson Class Gi ci ciB h_vm¤¢e ZvovZvwo Listening Practice ïiæ Ki‡Z cv‡i, GB Rb¨ Avgv‡`i i‡q‡Q
Listening Lab| Writing Module G Task- 1 I Task-2 Gi Dci _v‡K e¨vcK cÖ¯‘wZ| c‡ii Module wU n‡”Q
Advanced Level Gi Combined Reading-Writing Module| wk¶v_©xiv fwZ© nIqvi ciciB Avgv‡`i
Support Centre-G Speaking Practice ïiæ K‡i w`‡Z cv‡i| cÖwZw`b wewfbœ Class Test, Take-Home
Test, Vocabulary Session, Exercise Ges Home Work mgY^‡q avivevwnK GB †Kvm©wU cwiPvjbv Kiv nq|

Avgv‡`i mg¯Í eB, Lecture Sheet I K¬vm g‡bv‡hvM w`‡q AbymiY Ki‡j wk¶v_©x Aek¨B 6.0-7.0 Band Score Ki‡Z
cvi‡e|

Regular : 3-month programme; 3 days/week; 2 hours/class

Executive : 3-month programme; Fri-Sat, (Friday 4 hours & Saturday 2 hours)
Crash : 1-month programme; 4 days/week; 2 hours/class

ix
 MENTRS’ Education Series

Separate Class for GT Candidates

Class Gi cvkvcvwk Program-G _vK‡e

 Academic Gi 20 wU Ges General Training Gi 20 wU Mock Test

 GKwU mve©¶wbK (10 am to 9 pm; 7 days a week) IELTS Support Team hv‡`i Kv‡Q Avcwb †h‡Kvb
mgq Speaking interview w`‡Z cvi‡eb, Writing Script Check Kiv‡Z cvi‡eb Ges Classroom G
†ev‡Sbwb Ggb me Problems wb‡q Discuss Ki‡Z cvi‡eb|
 Mock Test Gi Rb¨ mKvj-`ycyi-mܨvq wewfbœ Schedule †`qv _vK‡e Ges Mock Test Gi Result Test 2
w`b ci †`qv n‡e|
 Test Gi Solution Zvr¶wbK fv‡e cvIqv hv‡e Support Team Gi KvQ †_‡K| Writing Ges Speaking Gi
fyj¸‡jv Avcbvi mvg‡b e‡mB Avcbv‡K eywS‡q †`qv n‡e|
 cÖwZw`b 10 am to 9 pm Avgv‡`i AvaywbK Listening Lab Avcwb e¨envi Ki‡Z cvi‡eb| Listening
Practice Kivi Ges Demo Speaking Interview †kvbvi myeY© my‡hvM GwU|
 Avcbvi Kvw•LZ Score bv cvIqv ch©šÍ Avcwb Avgv‡`i Course Ges Facilities Repeat Ki‡Z cvi‡eb Ges Gi
Rb¨ †Kvb AwZwi³ Fee w`‡Z n‡ebv|

Course Materials
1 Writing Book, 1 Reading Book, 1 Listening Book with DVD
1 Speaking Book with DVD & Everyday Lecture Sheets

Mock Exams:
Model Tests will be conducted in a very professional manner in our Exclusive Test Room.

x
 Academic Writing Module Task 1

IELTS

Part 1

Academic Writing Task 1 : Writing Report

Writing Book Page- 11

Academic Writing Module Task 1

ACADEMIC WRITING

Writing Module

Writing Module wU 60 wgwb‡Ui| cix¶v_x©iv D‡Ï‡k¨i Dci wfwË K‡i Academic Module A_ev General
Training Module cix¶v w`‡q _v‡K| `y‡Uv Module-GB cix¶v_x©‡`i `ywU Writing Task Complete Ki‡Z
nq|

IELTS Academic Writing Module

Academic Module IELTS Gi Task-1 G Question Paper G wKQz MÖvwdK¨vj Z_¨ †`qv _v‡K| cix¶v_x©‡K
MÖv‡di Z_¨‡K b~b¨Zg 150 k‡ã weeiY gyjK †jLv wjL‡Z nq| GB Task wU 20 wgwb‡Ui g‡a¨ †kl Kiv DwPZ|

Question Paper G Task-2 Essay AvKv‡i Av‡m| cix¶v_x©‡K 40 wgwb‡Ui g‡a¨ b~¨bZg 250 k‡ãi g‡a¨
Task wU wjL‡Z nq| Band Score G Task-2 i ¸iæZ¡ Task-1 Gi †P‡q †ekx|

IELTS General Training Writing Module

Academic Module Gi Writing Task Gi mv‡_ General Module Gi Writing Task Gi wKQz Basic
Difference i‡q‡Q| Dfq Module Gi Task-2 †gvUvgywU GKB iKg n‡jI Task-1 m¤ú~Y© Avjv`v|

General Training Module Gi Task-1 G GKwU Letter (wPwV) wjL‡Z nq|

General Training Module Task- G 1wU Essay wjL‡Z nq|

Writing Book Page- 12

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

ACADEMIC WRITING MODULE TASK 1

Academic Module IELTS Gi Task-1 G Question Paper G wKQz MÖvwdK¨vj Z_¨ †`qv _v‡K| cix¶v_x©‡K
MÖv‡di Z_¨‡K b~b¨Zg 150 k‡ãi weeiY g~jK †jLv wjL‡Z nq| GB Task wU 20 wgwb‡Ui g‡a¨ †kl Kiv DwPZ|

wKQz e¨wZµg Qvov MÖvd¸‡jv mvaviYZt jvBb MÖvd (Line Graph), evi MÖvd (Bar Graph), cvB PvU© (Pie Chart),
†Uwej (Table) wKsev WvqvMÖvg (Diagram) AvKv‡i _v‡K| Task-1 Gi Writing †h †Kvb wel‡qi Dci n‡Z cv‡i, Z‡e
cix¶v_x©‡K †Kvb Particular wel‡qi Dci Áv‡bi AwaKvix n‡Z n‡e bv|

1. Organization

cÖ‡Z¨KwU †jLvq GKwU f~wgKv (Introduction), Zvic‡i eY©bvg~jK Ask (Body) Ges me©‡kl Dcmsnvi (Conclusion)
_v‡K|

cÖ_gZt †h †Kvb †jLvi cwiwPwZg~jK/ m~Pbv/ f~wgKv _v‡K Ges Task-1 G GKwU ev `ywU ev‡K¨i GKUv m~Pbv †jLv _vK‡e|

wØZxqZt GK ev GKvwaK Paragraph-G g~j eY©bv, e¨vL¨v ev weeiY _vK‡e| cÖ‡Z¨KwU Paragraph Aek¨B mymsnZ
welq wb‡q Av‡jvPbv Ki‡e| ev‡K¨i c‡i ev‡K¨ Z_¨ I Av‡jvPbvi ci¤úiv _vKv DwPZ| †Kvb wfbœ eY©bvi ïiæ‡Z Avevi
bZzb Paragraph ïiæ Kiæb|

Standard Paragraph-G †Kvb GKwU welqe¯‘ mvaviYZt 4-12wU ev‡K¨ eY©bv Kiv nq| Lye eo Paragraph
cix¶‡Ki/ cvV‡Ki Rb¨ K¬vwšÍKi n‡Z cv‡i Ges cix¶K covi AvMÖn nvwi‡q †dj‡Z cv‡ib|

mvaviYZt g~j eY©bvq †h GK ev GKvwaK Paragraph wjL‡eb ZviI Avevi standard MVb ˆkjx Av‡Q| Paragraph-
Gi cÖ_g evK¨ n‡e †mB Paragraph- Gi welqe¯‘i Brief Overview, hv‡Z cÖ_g evK¨wU c‡o cvV‡Ki g‡b avibv nq
†h, GB Paragraph- G Av‡jvPbvi welqe¯‘ wK n‡Z cv‡i| Paragraph- Gi eY©bv †k‡l evK¨wU †hb Av‡jvPbvi mgvwß
†iLv Uv‡b Ges †jLvwU m¤ú~Y© g‡b nq|

Task-1 Gi ‡jLvi †¶‡Î fvj b¤^i †c‡Z ‡M‡j Avcbv‡`i‡K Aek¨B my›`i K‡i ¸wQ‡q wjL‡Z n‡e| Avcbvi evK¨¸‡jv
ïaygvÎ cÖ`Ë Z‡_¨i Dci wfwË K‡i wjL‡Z n‡e| Avcwb ïaygvÎ msL¨v, wPÎ I Dcv‡Ëi Dci wfwË K‡i wewfbœ
Observation w`‡q evK¨ mvRv‡eb| wewfbœ D‡jøL‡hvM¨ cwieZ©b, cwieZ©‡bi avc, Gme D‡jøL Ki‡eb|
Avcbvi †jLvq mvj, msL¨v Ges Zzjbv I Z_¨¸‡jv‡K wewfbœ msL¨v, I AvbycvwZKfv‡e †`Lvi ‡Póv Kiæb| g‡b ivL‡eb
Avcbvi KvR n‡”Q cÖ`Ë Dcv‡Ëi Dci wfwË K‡i A_©c~Y© Z_¨ Dc¯’vcb Kiv| Avcwb †jLvi †¶‡Î †Kvb welq fvj ev g›`-
G ai‡bi gZvgZ w`‡Z cvi‡eb bv| †jLvi †kl I Z…Zxq Ask n‡”Q Conclusion|

Z…ZxqZt Conclusion G Avcwb GK ev `yB ev‡K¨i Avcbvi Body- †Z D‡jøL Kiv wewfbœ ch©‡e¶Y Gi cÖavb Pwi·K
Zz‡j aiæb| †hgb- mvwe©Kfv‡e Da©Mvgx wQj ev wbgœMvgx wQj ev w¯’i wQj|

Writing Book Page- 13

Academic Writing Module Task 1

2. Correctness & Style

ï×Zv I Style Gi Dci wbf©i K‡i †jLvi ¸YMZ gvb| cÖwZwU k‡ãi evbvb wbf©yj nIqv cÖ‡qvRb †h‡nZz GB Test nv‡Z
wjL‡Z n‡e Avcbvi| ev‡K¨i MVb ˆkjx I e¨vKiYMZ fyj Gi w`‡K Aek¨B bRi ivL‡Z n‡e|

m‡e©vcwi †jLvi Style LyeB ¸iæZ¡c~Y©| ev‡K¨i MVb hZUv cviv hvq cwic° nIqv DwPZ| cÖwZwU ev‡K¨ GKB iKg ev
GK‡N‡q ïiæ †hb bv nq| †hgb- There is a ………….. , there is a ……………..| fvj Style G †jLvi gv‡b
n‡”Q Bs‡iRx fvlvi †h wekvj fvÛvi Av‡Q Zvi †_‡K Avcbvi †jLvq KZUv fvlvMZ `Lj dz‡U I‡V| evK¨¸‡jv †hb
structurally GKB iKg bv nq| Active, Passive, Subject, Object my›`i fv‡e e¨envi Kiæb hv‡Z cix¶K Avcbvi
Bs‡iRx Áv‡b gy» nb|

3. Completeness

‡Kvb NUbv ev welqe¯‘ eY©bvq Aek¨B Completeness _vK‡Z n‡e| †Kvb Single Line Graph, Double Line
Graph, Bar Chart (evi PvU©) ev Pie Chart (cvB PvU©) eY©bvq Aek¨B ¸iæZ¡c~Y© me Z_¨ ev ˆewkó¨ eY©bv Kiv DwPZ|
Gme ˆewkó¨ eY©bvi Rb¨ Avgv‡`i Review Exercise ¸‡jv †`Lyb| †Kvb ¸iæZ¡c~Y© ˆewkó¨ †hb ev` c‡o bv hvq|

4. Test Specific Requirements

‡hgb- Task-1 b~b¨Zg 150 Ges Task- 2 b~b¨Zg 250 k‡ãi n‡Z n‡e|
Task-1 Gi GB †jLv‡Z ev eY©bvq Avcbvi fvj g›` gZvg‡Zi †Kvb ¯^vaxbZv _vK‡e bv| G †jLv Avcwb PP©v Ki‡jB Lye
`ªæZ fvj ¸YMZ gvb AR©b Ki‡Z cvi‡eb|

Writing Book Page- 14

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

In Task 1 of the Writing exam, candidates are judged on-

Criteria How responses are assessed

Task Achievement how appropriately, accurately and relevantly the candidate

has fulfilled task requirements

Coherence and → the overall clarity and fluency of the message

Cohesion → how well the candidate has organized and linked
information and ideas
→ logical sequencing and appropriate use of linking
devices between and within sentences

Lexical Resource → range of vocabulary candidate has used

→ how accurate and appropriate the vocabulary is in
relation to the specific task

Grammatical range and the range and accurate use of grammar as seen in the
Accuracy candidate’s writing at the sentence level

A detailed version of this mark scheme, the public version of it, is provided in the next
pages.

Writing Book Page- 15

Academic Writing Module Task 1

WRITING TASK 1 (Academic and General Training) BAND DESCRIPTORS (public version)

Band Task Achievement Coherence and Lexical Resource Grammatical

Cohesion Range and
Accuracy
9 • fully satisfies all the • uses cohesion in such • uses a wide range of • uses a wide range
requirements of the task a way that it attracts no vocabulary with very of structures with full
attention natural and flexibility and
• clearly presents a fully sophisticated control accuracy; rare minor
developed response • skilfully manages of lexical features; errors occur only as
paragraphing rare minor errors ‘slips’
occur only as ‘slips’

8 • covers all requirements • sequences information • uses a wide range of • uses a wide range
of the task sufficiently and ideas logically vocabulary fluently of structures
and flexibly to convey
• presents, highlights and • manages all aspects of precise meanings • the majority of
illustrates key features/ cohesion well sentences are error-
bullet • skilfully uses free
points clearly and • uses paragraphing uncommon lexical
appropriately sufficiently and items but there may • makes only very
appropriately be occasional errors or
occasional inappropriacies
inaccuracies in word
choice and collocation

• produces rare errors

in spelling and/or
word formation
7 • covers the requirements • logically organises • uses a sufficient • uses a variety of
of the task information and ideas; range of vocabulary to complex structures
there is clear allow some flexibility
• (A) presents a clear progression throughout and precision • produces frequent
overview of main trends, error-free sentences
differences or stages • uses a range of • uses less common
• (GT) presents a clear cohesive devices lexical items with • has good control of
purpose, with the tone appropriately although some awareness of grammar and
consistent and there may be some style and collocation punctuation but may
appropriate under-/over-use make a few errors
• may produce
• clearly presents and occasional errors in
highlights key word choice, spelling
features/bullet points but and/or word formation
could be more fully
extended
6 • addresses the • arranges information • uses an adequate • uses a mix of
requirements of the task and ideas coherently range of vocabulary simple and complex
and there is a clear for the task sentence forms
• (A) presents an
overall progression • makes some errors
overview with information • attempts to use less
appropriately common vocabulary in grammar and
• uses cohesive devices punctuation but they
Selected but with some
effectively, but cohesion rarely reduce
inaccuracy
within and/or between communication
• (GT) presents a
sentences may be faulty
purpose that is generally • makes some errors
or mechanical
clear; there may be in spelling and/or
inconsistencies in tone word formation, but

Writing Book Page- 16

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

• presents and • may not always use they do not impede

adequately highlights key referencing clearly or communication
features/ bullet points but appropriately
details may be irrelevant,
inappropriate or
inaccurate

5 • generally addresses the • presents information • uses a limited range • uses only a limited
task; the format may be with some organisation of vocabulary, but this range of structures
inappropriate in places but there may be a lack is minimally adequate
of overall progression for the task • attempts complex
• (A) recounts detail
sentences but these
mechanically with no
• makes inadequate, • may make tend to be less
clear overview; there may
inaccurate or over-use of noticeable errors in accurate than simple
be no data to support the
cohesive devices spelling and/or word sentences
description
formation that may
• (GT) may present a • may be repetitive cause some difficulty • may make frequent
purpose for the letter that because of lack of for the reader grammatical errors
is unclear at times; the referencing and and punctuation
tone may be variable and substitution may be faulty; errors
sometimes inappropriate can cause some
difficulty for the
• presents, but
reader
inadequately covers, key
features/ bullet
points; there may be a
tendency to focus on
details

4 • attempts to address the • presents information • uses only basic uses only a very
task but does not cover and ideas but these are vocabulary which may limited range of
all key not arranged coherently be used repetitively or structures with only
features/bullet points; the and there is no clear which may be rare use of
format may be progression in the inappropriate for the subordinate clauses
inappropriate response task
. • some structures are
• (GT) fails to clearly • uses some basic • has limited control of accurate but errors
explain the purpose of cohesive devices but word formation and/or predominate, and
the letter; the these may be spelling; punctuation is often
tone may be inaccurate or repetitive faulty
inappropriate • errors may cause
strain for the reader
• may confuse key
features/bullet points with
detail; parts may be
unclear, irrelevant,
repetitive or inaccurate

3 • fails to address the task, • does not organise • uses only a very • attempts sentence
which may have been ideas logically limited range of words forms but errors in
completely and expressions with grammar and
misunderstood • may use a very limited very limited control of punctuation
range of cohesive word formation and/or predominate and
• presents limited ideas devices, and those used spelling distort the meaning
which may be largely may not indicate a
irrelevant/repetitive logical relationship • errors may severely
between distort the message
ideas

Writing Book Page- 17

Academic Writing Module Task 1

DESCRIBING TRENDS

Task-1 Gi Graph, Chart, Table, Diagram BZ¨vw` e¨vL¨v Kivi Av‡M Trend (aviv) Av‡jvPbv Kiv AZ¨šÍ
cÖ‡qvRbxq| Task-1 G Single Line MÖvd ev Double Line MÖvd _vK‡Z cv‡i| Trend n‡”Q aviv ev Pattern| hw`
†`Lv hvq †Kvb msL¨v ev MÖvd evo‡Q ev Dc‡ii w`‡K DV‡Q Zvn‡j Zv DaŸ©gyLx Trend| Task-1 G MÖvd eY©bv Kivi mgq
Trend Gi Av‡jvPbv Ki‡ZB n‡e|

cÖ‡Z¨KwU Trend †KB Verb ev Noun Øviv cÖKvk Kiv hvq| Avgiv Trend Gi Change †K Verb w`‡q cÖKvk Ki‡Z
cvwi| †hgb- Unemployment Levels fell | Avevi Avgiv Trend †K Noun w`‡qI cÖKvk Ki‡Z cvwi| †hgb-
There was a fall in unemployment levels.

Trend eY©bvi mgq a dramatic fall or a steady increase G ai‡bi we‡klY e¨envi Kiv fvj|

Writing Book Page- 18

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

bx‡Pi Table 1 Gi Verb/ Noun ¸‡jv Trends ev Changes eY©bvq e¨eüZ nq| †jLvi aiY ey‡S Avcwb Verb ev
Noun e¨envi Ki‡eb-
Table 1 : Nouns and Verbs used in Trend Description

Direction Verbs Nouns

Rose (to) A rise
Increased (to) An increase
Went up (to) Growth
Climbed (to) An upward trend
Boomed A boom (a dramatic rise)

Fell (to) A decrease

Declined (to) A decline
Decreased (to) A fall
Dipped (to) A drop
Dropped (to) A slump (a dramatic fall)
Went down (to) A reduction
Slumped (to)
Reduced (to)
Leveled out (at) A leveling out
Did not change No change
Remained stable (at)
Remained steady (at)
Stayed constant (at)
Maintained the same level
Fluctuated (around) A fluctuation
Peaked (at) Reached a peak (of)
Plateaued (at) Reached at plateau (at)
Stood at (we use this phrase
to focus on a particular point,
before we mention the
movement, for example:
In the first year,
unemployment stood at ...

Trend Gi Movement †K Adjective/Adverb w`‡q cÖKvk Ki‡Z nq cÖvqkB| †hgb-

There has been a slight increase in the value of the dollar (degree of change).
Unemployment fell rapidly last year (the speed of change).

Avgiv Noun †K modify Kwi Adjective w`‡q (a slight increase) Ges Verb †K Modify Kwi Adverb w`‡q
(to increase slightly).

Writing Book Page- 19

Academic Writing Module Task 1

wb‡Pi †Uwej `ywU j¶¨ Kiæb| cÖ_gwUi kã¸wj Trend Gi Degree eySv‡Z e¨eüZ nq Ges wØZxqwUi kã¸wj Speed
Gi cwieZ©b eySv‡Z e¨eüZ nq|

Table 2 : Degree of Trend

Adjectives Adverbs
huge hugely
enormous enormously
steep steeply
substantial substantiality
considerable considerably
significant significantly
marked markedly
moderate moderately
slight slightly
minima minimally
dramatic dramatically
sharp sharply

Table 3 : Degree of Speed

Adjectives Adverbs
rapid rapidly
quick quickly
swift swiftly
sudden suddenly
steady steadily
gradual gradually
slow slowly

Note: Tendency A‡bKUv Trend Gi gZB| hw` KZ¸‡jv msL¨v avivevwnKfv‡e evo‡Z _v‡K Z‡e Avgiv ewj;
tendency to rise.

Writing Book Page- 20

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

A. DESCRIBE AN UPWARD TREND

a. Rise:
In the month of November, price index quickly rose from 40 to as high as 90 points.
Around age 28, a fast bowler gradually rises to the highest point of his ability.
b. Increase:
The life expectancy at birth slowly increased from 37 years to as high as 76 years in some part
of China.
The number of students going to India for higher studies registered a steady increase over
1980s and 90s.

c. Went Up / Climbed Up
During Ramadan, the price of daily necessities steadily went up.

d. Boomed (verb)/a boom (noun)/a dramatic rise:

Mango producers of Rajshahi experienced a dramatic rise (or a boom) in their business. The
enrollment of Asian student boomed in Australian universities after September 11.
e. Drastic:
drastic change in government policy, a drastic shortage in food supply
As the new government came into power, there was a drastic cut on agricultural subsidy.
f. Dramatic: dramatic change
As the 2-stroke scooters were removed from Dhaka city, there was a dramatic fall in the number
of patients with asthma and respiratory difficulties. (wbtk¦vmRwbZ mgm¨v).
g. Dramatic fall:
After SARS virus attack in Hong Kong and other South East Asian countries, most Asian
countries experienced a dramatic fall in tourism business.
B. DESCRIBE A DOWNWARD TREND

a. Fall (to)/Decline (to): to mean a gradual decrease as a general trend

President George Bush's popularity declined over the last two years of his regime.
‘The birth rate declined (gradually) over last three decades in most of the developed countries.’
The birth rate is on the decline in Bangladesh (on going †evSv‡Z) .
After September 11, most US businesses have fell into a decline.

b. Declivity (noun) – Acclivity

The gradual declivity in public sector banks reflects on their poor customer service.
The gradual acclivity in foreign and private banks reflects on their good customer service.

c. Decreased (to): to mean a quick noticeable drop

The student enrollment to public universities has decreased by 3% over 1990s.
Is the death rate from Diarrhea on the decrease in Bangladesh?
The interest in football has decreased while in cricket it has increased.

Writing Book Page- 21

Academic Writing Module Task 1

d. Go down/Gone down/Went down (to): to mean a subtle (small) drop, often gradual in nature
Compared to 1980s, the agricultural export from Bangladesh has gone down by 3% in 1990s.
As the supply of fish increased, the price quickly went down.
e. Dipped (to): to mean a quick noticeable drop

The price of sugar remained steady for whole year except a dip in July.
The declining straight line gradually dipped into the bottom.

f. Dropped (to): to mean a noticeable drop in a small span of time.

Agricultural export from Bangladesh has dropped by 3% in the last quarter of the fiscal year.

g. Slumped (to) (fall suddenly and greatly)

Compared to 1980s, the agricultural export from Bangladesh has slumped by 49% in 1990s and
this should worry policy makers.
As there is a sudden huge supply of fish, the fish market experienced a big price slump.
As the Iraq war started, there was a sudden slump in the major stock markets.

h. Reduced (to)
Compared to 1980s, the agricultural export from Bangladesh has reduced by 13% in 1990s.
Due to destruction of natural habitat, the number of Royal Bengal Tiger in Sundarban area has
been reduced down to only 500 compared to 5500 in 1950s.

i. Did not change

Despite repeated efforts from the government, women's literacy rate did not change much in
the last decade.

j. Remained stable (at)

Despite the Gulf War, the oil price in the international market remained stable.

k. Remained steady (at)

During the last 5 years the unemployment rate remained steady.
Apart from a brief slump, the company earnings per share remained steady at 13% for the last
three years.

l. Stayed constant (at)

After a quick rise, the inflation rate went down to 4% and stayed almost constant for three years.
Compared to last year, the cost of living index remained almost constant in New Delhi.

Writing Book Page- 22

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

IELTS

Part 2

Sample Answers with Guideline

Academic Task 1

Writing Book Page- 23

Academic Writing Module Task 1

TYPE1 : SINGLE LINE GRAPH

GLv‡b cix¶v_x©‡K single line Gi GKwU MÖv‡di gva¨‡g Z_¨ †`Iqv n‡e| cix¶v_x©‡K b~b¨Zg 150 k‡ãi g‡a¨ MÖvdwU
eY©bv Ki‡Z n‡e| cix¶v_x© GB eY©bvq Zvi wbR¯^ †Kvb gZvgZ w`‡Z cvi‡eb bv|

wb‡Pi MÖvdwU j¶¨ Kiæbt

Cases

600
500

400

300

200

100

0
1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995

incidence of X Virus disease

▪ 1960 mv‡j X virus cases wQj 50wU|

(In 1960 the number of X-Virus cases stood at 50)

▪ 1960 mvj †_‡K 1970 mvj Kv‡j GB msL¨v ax‡i ax‡i †e‡o 200 †Z `vovq|
(Between 1960 to 1970, the number of cases gradually went up to 200)

▪ 1970 mvj †_‡K 1975 mvj ch©šÍ Zv `ªæZ e„w× †c‡q 500 cases G †cŠuQvq Ges cieZx© 5 eQi Zv w¯’i _v‡K|
(From 1970 the number of cases quickly climbed to 500 cases in 1975 and it remained
stable for the next 5 years)

▪ Gi c‡i 1985 mvj bvMv` ax‡i ax‡i bvg‡Z ïiæ K‡i Ges 1990 mvj bvMv` Zv k~‡b¨i †KvUvq †cŠuQvq Ges
cieZx©‡Z 5 eQi Zv Avi wd‡i Av‡mwb|
(From 1980 to 1985 period, the number of cases took a downward trend and from 1985 to
1990 the number of cases steadily reduced to 0 and it did not recur in next 5 years)

▪ mvwe©Kfv‡e 1960 mvj †_‡K 1975 mvj ch©šÍ †e‡o‡Q, Zvici 5 eQi w¯’i Ae¯’vq wQj| Zvic‡i 1980-90 mv‡ji
g‡a¨ m‡e©v”P Ae¯’v †_‡K Zv k~‡b¨i †KvUvq P‡j Av‡m|
(Overall from 1960 to 1975 the number of cases of X-virus was on the rise and reached a
plateau during 1975-1980. Then from 1980 to 1990 the number of cases declined quickly to
0 and then till 1995 it didn’t come back)

Writing Book Page- 24

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Z_¨¸‡jv mvRv‡j hv cvw”Q-

1960 †_‡K 1970 mvj ch©šÍ †ivMwU †e‡o‡Q| 1980 ch©šÍ GKB wQj Ges Gi c‡i k~‡b¨ P‡j Av‡m| 1960 †_‡K 1969
mvj ch©šÍ †ivMwU 100 †_‡K 200 †Z wM‡j `uvovq Ges 1975 mv‡j 500 †Z wM‡q `uvovq| 1984 mvj ch©šÍ GKB Ae¯’v
_v‡K Ges 1988 mv‡j k~‡b¨i †KvUvq †b‡g Av‡m| 1988 †_‡K 1995 ch©šÍ fyUv‡b †Kvb X-virus diseases wQj bv|
Dcmsnv‡i ‡jLv hvq †h, 1960 mvj ch©šÍ †ivMwU †e‡o‡Q Ges c‡i †ivMwU Avi nqwb|

myZivs Avgiv wjL‡Z cvwi-

The graph shows the number of cases of X Virus disease in Bhutan between the years 1960
and 1995. As an overall trend, it is clear that the number of cases of the disease increased fairly
rapidly until mid seventies, remained constant (w¯’i) for around a decade at 500 cases per year
before dropping to zero in the late 80s. In 1960, the number of cases stood at approximately
100. That number rose steadily to 200 by 1969 and then more sharply to 500 in 1977. At this
point the number of cases remained stable until 1984 before plummeting (`ªæZ †b‡g Avmv) to zero
by 1988. From 1988 to 1995 Bhutan was free of the disease. In conclusion, the graph shows
that the disease was increasingly prevalent until the 1980s when it was eradicated (wbg~©j) from
Bhutan.

Writing Book Page- 25

Academic Writing Module Task 1

TYPE 2 : DOUBLE LINE GRAPH

cix¶v_x©‡K GKwU Double Line Graph †`Iqv n‡Z cv‡i| cix¶v_x©‡K b~b¨Zg 150 k‡ãi g‡a¨ MÖvdwU‡K eY©bv Ki‡Z
n‡e| cix¶v_x© GB eY©bvq Zvi wbR¯^ †Kvb gZvgZ w`‡Z cvi‡eb bv|

wb‡Pi MÖvdwU j¶¨ Kiæb-

Men & Women Smokers in Bhutan (per 1000)

700
600
500
400 Men
300 Women
200
100
0
1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000

SOME OBSERVATIONS-

▪ cyiæl aygcvqxi msL¨v gwnjv aygcvqxi msL¨vi †P‡q me mgqB †ewk wQj|
(The number of male smokers was always greater than the females)
▪ 1960 mvj Gi ci †_‡K cyiæl aygcvqxi msL¨v ax‡i ax‡i wbgœMvgx wQj|
(1960 onward male smoking cases dropped steadily)

▪ 1960-1975 mv‡j gwnjv aygvcvqxi msL¨v †ek `ªæZ †e‡o‡Q, wKš‘ 1975 cieZx© Kv‡j Avevi wbgœgyLx cÖeYZv †`Lv
hvq|
(From 1960 to 1975 the female smoking cases went up, then from 1975 onward it took a
downward trend)

▪ 1960 mv‡j cyiæl I gwnjv aygcvqxi msL¨vi e¨eavb wQj me‡P‡q †ewk (600-100 = 500) hv 1975 mvj bvMv` Lye
`ªæZ K‡g hvq| Zvici cyiæl I gwnjv aygcvqxi msL¨v µ‡g K‡g Av‡m I e¨eavbI Kg‡Z _v‡K hv 1995 mv‡j me‡P‡q
KvQvKvwQ Av‡m|
(The case of male and female smoking gap was very high (500) in 1960 which got very
close in 1975. Both the numbers steadily fell and got even closer during the 1995 and 2000
period)

▪ 1960 mv‡ji g‡a¨ aygcvqx cyiæ‡li msL¨v cÖwZ nvRv‡i 600 †_‡K 250 G K‡g Av‡m| Avi G mg‡q gwnjv aygcvqxi
msL¨v 100 †_‡K 200 †Z †e‡o hvq|
(Most interestingly, between the period 1960 to 2000 the male smoking cases fell from
600 to 250 while female smoking case went slightly up from 100 cases to 200 cases)

Writing Book Page- 26

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Thinking Guideline-

MÖvdwU 1960 ‡_‡K 2000 mv‡ji g‡a¨ f~Uv‡bi cyiæl I gwnjv‡`i aygcvb nvi †`Lv‡”Q| MÖvdwU †_‡K †`Lv hv‡”Q eZ©gv‡b
cyiæl Ges gwnjviv aygcvb Kg Ki‡Q| 1960 mv‡j 1000 Rb cyiæ‡li g‡a¨ 600 RbB aygcvb Ki‡Q| 1980 mv‡j Zv
500 R‡b G‡m `uvovq| Zv Kg‡Z Kg‡Z 2000 mv‡j GUv 200G wM‡q `uvovq| 1975 mv‡j Zv 400G wM‡q `uvovq| Gic‡i
GB nvi GKUz K‡g 320 n‡q 1985 mvj ch©šÍ _v‡K| Ges 2000 mv‡j Zv K‡g 200 †Z †cŠu‡Q| Dcmsnv‡i ejv hvq †h,
mg¯Í eQ‡iB †Q‡j‡`i aygcv‡b weiZ _vKvi cÖeYZv wQj Ges Zv gwnjv‡`i Zzjbvq †ewk| 1975 mvj ch© šÍ gwnjv‡`i
aygcvb Kivi cÖeYZv †e‡o‡Q Ges Zv 1977 mv‡ji ci †_‡K K‡g‡Q|

Sample Answer-

The graph compares the rate of smoking in men and women in Bhutan between the years 1960
and 2000. It can be clearly seen that the rate of smoking for both men and women is currently
declining and that fewer women have smoked throughout the period. In 1960, 600 men in every
1,000 were smoking. This number decreased gradually to 500 by 1980 and continued to
decrease but more steeply to 200 in 2000. In contrast, the rate of smoking in women in 1960
was very low at only 80 in every 1,000. By 1965 this increased to 180, and increased again but
more steeply to 320 in 1977. The rate of female smokers then remained stable at 320 until 1984
at which point the figures began to decline and had dropped to 200 by 2000. In conclusion we
can see that the rate of smoking in men dropped throughout the whole period but was always
at a higher level than the female figures. The rate of smoking in women increased until 1977
but then decreased for the rest of the period.

Writing Book Page- 27

Academic Writing Module Task 1

TYPE 3 : BAR GRAPHS/ COLUMN GRAPHS

cix¶v_x©‡K GK ev GKvwaK evi MÖvd †`Iqv n‡e| MÖv‡di welqe¯‘i Dci wfwË K‡i Task-1 Writing wU wjL‡Z n‡e|
MÖvd/ PvU© hw` Avbyf~wgKfv‡e (Horizontal) _vK‡j Avgiv Zv‡K evi MÖvd (Bar Graphs) ewj; Avi Dj¤^ (Vertical)
_vK‡j Zv‡K Kjvg MÖvd/ PvU© (Column Graphs) e‡j|

Deaths in Bhutan 1990

TB
Malaria
Diarrhoea
East
T Disease
Leposy
AIDS

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

Medical Research Funding in Bhutan

TB

Malaria

Diarrhoea
East
T Disease

Leposy

AIDS

0 50 100 150 200

Writing Book Page- 28

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Thinking Guideline:

MÖvdwU‡Z 1990 mv‡j fyUv‡b 6wU †iv‡M g„Zz¨ Ges Hme †iv‡Mi Rb¨ wimvP© dv‡Ûi web¨vm †`Lv‡bv n‡q‡Q| MÖvd `y‡Uv †_‡K
cwi®‹vi †h, wimvP© dvÛ Gi mv‡_ †iv‡M gviv hvevi welqwU m¤úwK©Z bq| 1990 mv‡j h_vµ‡g 0.2, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 0.4
Ges 1.8 wgwjqb gvbyl GBWm, Kzô, UªwcK¨vj †ivM, WvBwiqv, g¨v‡jwiqv Ges wUwe †iv‡M gviv hvq| wKš‘ dvÛ Gi mv‡_ Gi
‰ecwiZ¨ †`Lv hvq| 1990 mv‡j GBW, Kzô, UªwcK¨vj †ivM, WvBwiqv, g¨v‡jwiqv Ges wUwe †ivM h_vµ‡g 180, 80, 79,
60,, 50 Ges 20 wgwjqb Wjvi cvq| myZivs GUv ¯úóZ †h, †iv‡Mi g„Zz¨i Dci wfwË K‡i wimvP© dvÛ †`Iqv nqwb|

Sample Answer:
The graphs compare the number of deaths caused by six diseases in Bhutan in 1990 with the
amount of research funding allocated (e›Ub Kiv) to each of those diseases. It can be clearly seen
that the amount of research funding in many cases did not correlate with the occurences of the
disease in terms of numbers of deaths. In 1990 there were around 0.2 million deaths from AIDS,
0.1 million deaths from leprosy (Kzô), 0.3 million deaths from tropical (MÖx®§gÛjxq) diseases, 0.5
million deaths from Diarrhoea, 0.4 million deaths from malaria and 1.8 million deaths from TB.
These figures can be contrasted with the amount of funding allocated for each disease. In 1990
AIDS received 180 million dollars in research funding, leprosy 80 million dollars in research
funding, tropical diseases 79 million dollars in research funding, Diarrhoea received 60 million
dollars in research funding, Malaria 50 million dollars and TB received 20 million dollars in
research funding.

In conclusion, it is clear that funding allocation for disease research in Bhutan is not wholly
determined by the number of deaths for which each disease is responsible in a given year.

Writing Book Page- 29

Academic Writing Module Task 1

TYPE 4 : PIE CHARTS

EDUCATION OF WOMEN IN SRILANKA- 1965

12 YEAR
18%

6 YEAR GRAD NO SCHOOLING

44% 3% 6-YEAR
0% 12-YEAR
GRAD
POST GRAD

NO SCHOOLING
35%

EDUCATION OF WOMEN IN SRILANKA- 1965

P-GRAD
GRAD 20%
35%

NO SCHOOLING
6-YEAR
NO SCHOOLING 12-YEAR
0% GRAD
POST GRAD

6YEAR
20%

12 YEAR
25%

Writing Book Page- 30

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Thinking Guideline:

GB cvB PvU© `ywU‡Z 1965 Ges 1995 mv‡j kªxjsKvi gwnjv‡`i wk¶vi Ae¯’v †`Lv‡bv n‡q‡Q| ¯úóZ †`Lv hv‡”Q 1945
mv‡ji Zzjbvq gwnjviv 1995 mv‡j A‡bK †ekx D”PZi wk¶v MÖnY K‡i‡Q| 1965 mv‡j gvÎ 21% gwnjv Zv‡`i †m‡KÛvix
wk¶v mgvß K‡i‡Q Ges gvÎ 3% cÖ_g wWMÖx wb‡q‡Q| †Kvb gwnjvB †cvó MÖvRy‡qkb wWMÖx AR©b K‡iwb| GB Ae¯’vi e¨vcK
cwieZ©b nq 1995 mv‡j| 1995 mv‡j 80% gwnjv †m‡KÛvix GWy‡Kkb †kl K‡i‡Q Ges A‡a©‡Ki †ekx gwnjv (55%)
MÖvRy‡qU n‡q‡Q Ges 20% †cvó MÖvRy‡qU wk¶v wb‡q‡Q| Ab¨w`‡K 1995 mv‡j mKj gwnjviv cÖvBgvix †kl K‡i‡Q hw`I
A‡b‡KB (20%) GLv‡bB Zv‡`i ¯‹zj mgvß K‡i‡Q| GLv‡b 1965 †_‡K A‡bK cv_©K¨, †m mgq †mLv‡b gvÎ 65% gwnjv
cÖvBgvix ¯‹zj mgvß K‡i‡Q Avi 35% †Kvb w`b ¯‹z‡j hvqwb| Dcmsnv‡i ejv hvq 1965 ‡_‡K 1995 GB 30 eQ‡i kªxjsKvi
gwnjviv wk¶vq A‡bK BwZevPK DbœwZ mvab K‡i‡Q|

Sample Answer.

The pie charts compare the level of education achieved by women in Srilanka across two years,
1965, and 1995. It can be clearly seen that women received a much higher level of education
in Srilanka in 1995 than they did in 1965. In 1965 only 15% of women completed their secondary
education and 3% went on to a graduate degree. No women had completed post-graduate
studies. This situation had changed radically by 1995. In 1995, 80% of women in Srilanka had
completed secondary education. 55% of the total women had graduation and 20% had gone on
to postgraduate studies. At the other end of the scale we can see that by 1995 all girls were
completing primary education, although 20% ended their schooling at this point. This is in stark
contrast with 1965 when only 65% of girls completed primary school, 35% had no schooling at
all. In conclusion, we can see that in the 30 years from 1965 to 1995 there have been huge
positive developments to the education levels of women in Srilanka.

Writing Book Page- 31

Academic Writing Module Task 1

TYPE 5 : DATA TABLES

cix¶vq cix¶v_x©‡`i GKwU †Uwej I Zvi mv‡_ wKQz msL¨v †`Iqv n‡Z cv‡i|
bx‡Pi †UwejwU j¶¨ Kiæb-
(Hours of leisure time per year in Bhutan)

Teens 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s 70s +

Watching TV/videos 1,200 700 400 500 600 700 1,100
Socialising with 4 or less people 150 150 300 250 250 200 200
Socialising with 4 or more people 350 350 50 50 25 25 25
Individual exercise 150 100 200 200 50 75 150
Group exercise/sport 450 350 200 150 50 0 0
Cinema 100 75 50 25 25 50 75

Thinking Guideline:
eQ‡ii wewfbœ mg‡q f~Uv‡bi evwm›`v‡`i wewfbœ eq‡mi we‡bv`‡b (leisure) i WvUv †`Lv‡bv n‡q‡Q| f~Uv‡bi gvby‡li eq‡mi
mv‡_ mvgvwRK Rxeb Kg‡Z _v‡K| wUbGRvi Ges 20 †ki g‡a¨i gvby‡liv eQ‡i 500 N›Uv mvgvwRKZvq Ges G mgq 350
N›Uv e¨vq K‡i b~b¨Zg 4 R‡bi GKwU MÖæ‡ci mv‡_, hw` 30, 40, 50 Ges 60 eQi eq‡m GB mvgvwRKZvi nvi cÖvq GKB
(300-350 Gi g‡a¨)| 30 Ges 40 eQ‡i 4 R‡bi mv‡_ †gjv‡gkv 50 N›Uvq †b‡g Av‡m| MÖæc Ges e¨w³i Rb¨ GKB
e¨vcvi| me eq‡mi ‡jv‡KivB Zv‡`i weiwZi GKUv D‡jøL‡hvM¨ Ask wUwf/wfwWI †`‡L KvUvq| Teenager Ges Retired
†jv‡Kiv Kg©¶g‡`i †P‡q G‡Z wظY mgq KvUvq| Teenager-iv wm‡bgv †`Lvq 100 N›Uv e¨q K‡i Ges Ab¨‡`i GB nvi
25-50 N›Uv| myZivs GUv ejv hvq †h, Kvh©¶g gvby‡li †P‡q Teenager Ges Retired †jv‡Kiv we‡bv`‡b †ekx mgq
e¨q K‡i|
Sample Answer:
The table shows how people in different age groups spend their leisure time in Bhutan over the
course of a year. It can be clearly seen that the amount of leisure time available varies
considerably (bMb¨ bq) across the age groups and that people of different age levels have very
different ways of spending their leisure time. According to the figures, as people age in Bhutan,
their social lives reduce. Teenagers and people in their twenties spend on average 500 hours
per year on socialising and 350 hours of that time is with a group of more than 4 people.
Although the total hours of socialising in their 30s, 40s, 50s and 60s is fairly constant (between
300-350), socialising with more than 4 people drops dramatically (bvUKxqfv‡e) to 50 hours in the
30s and 40s age groups and only 25 for the 50 years old. Group and individual exercise follow
a similar pattern. People of all ages spend a good part of their leisure time on entertainment
such as TV/video viewing and cinema. In both cases, teenagers and retired people spend
around twice as much time as those who are at working age. Home entertainment ranges from
just over a thousand hours for teenagers and retired people and an average of 600 hours for
everyone else. Cinema accounts for 100 hours of the teenagers and retired people's leisure
time and 25-50 hours for the rest. In conclusion, we can see there is a significant trend towards
solitary (m½xnxb ev GKK) and smaller group activities as people grow older and that teenagers
and retired people spend a lot more time on entertainment than the working age do.

Writing Book Page- 32

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Academic Writing Module Task 1 G †¯‹vi evov‡bvi Dcvq-

Z_¨ wbe©vPb-

Task 1 G MÖv‡di mg¯Í Z_¨ eY©bv Kiv GKwU ¸iæZ¡c~Y© welq| wKš‘ Gi A_© GB bq †h, cix¶v_x©‡K mewKQzB wjL‡Z
n‡e| †ekxi fvM †¶‡ÎB cÖwZwU wP·ZB A‡bK †ekx Z_¨ †`Iqv _v‡K| GRb¨ cix¶v_x©‡K Z_¨¸‡jv‡K wewfbœ av‡c
fvM K‡i wjL‡Z n‡e|

Report KvVv‡gv-

‡h †Kvb report KvVv‡gv‡ZB GKwU f~wgKv, g~j eY©bv (body) Ges Dcmsnvi _v‡K| f~wgKvq `yÕ jvB‡bi GKwU
standard evK¨ w`‡q MÖvdwUi eY©bv ïiæ Kiv DwPZ| GB cÖv_wgK evK¨wUB cÖ_g paragraph. cÖ_g evK¨wU n‡e,
MÖvdwU wK Rb¨, Gi mgq, Kvj Ges G‡Z wK eY©bv Kiv n‡q‡Q| †hgb-

The pie charts compare the highest level of education achieved by women in Srilanka across
two years, 1945 and 1995 wKsev The table shows how people in different age groups spend
their leisure time in Bhutan over the course of a year.

j¶¨ Ki‡eb single line graph G Avgiv ewj “The graph shows” wKš‘ Avgiv double line graph G ewj
“The graph compares”. Tense Gi e¨envi j¶¨ Kiæb| MÖvd eZ©gvb ev AZx‡Zi †h †Kvb Z_¨‡KB Dc¯’vcb
Ki‡Z cv‡i| cÖv_wgK evK¨wU MÖv‡di Z‡_¨i ûeû Kwc (copy) nIqv Pj‡e bv| Sentence Copy Ki‡j examiner
g~j¨vqb Ki‡e bv|

`yB/ wZb b¤^i evK¨ overall trend †K eY©bv K‡i| †hgb- It can be clearly seen that the rate of smoking
for both men and women is currently declining and that fewer women had smoked
throughout the period. wKsev It can be clearly seen that the amount of research funding in
many cases did not correlate with the occurences of the disease in terms of number of
deaths. j¶¨ Kiæb, D`vniY `ywU‡Z present perfect tense e¨envi Kiv n‡q‡Q|

GLv‡b Avgiv ev‡K¨ AZx‡Z hv n‡q‡Q ev AZxZ †_‡K eZ©gvb ch©šÍ hv n‡”Q wKsev mgq D‡jøL bv _vK‡j eZ©gv‡b wK
n‡”Q wjLe| †hgb Avgiv AZxZ †_‡K eZ©gvb ch©šÍ aygcvb Kivi K_v wj‡LwQ|

Report Gi Body †Z MÖvd ev MÖvd¸wji eY©bv _vK‡e| Avcbv‡K Aek¨B eY©bv ¸‡jv Ges logical order G mvRv‡Z
n‡e| Line MÖvd¸‡jv‡Z Z_¨ mvaviYZ chronological order G _v‡K| GRb¨ Avcwb wjLvi g‡a¨ would also,
most probably, from earliest to latest| Bar graphs, Pie charts BZ¨vw` wfbœ fv‡e Dc¯’vwcZ nq| GRb¨
Avcbv‡K wfbœ wfbœ fv‡e ‡jLv ˆZix Ki‡Z n‡e| Table Gi †¶‡Î Avcbv‡K †h †Kvb GKwU Category †e‡Q †jLv
ïiæ Ki‡Z n‡e| †m Category †Z ¸iæZ¡c~Y© trend wU †e‡Q wb‡eb|

cÖvmw½K GKwU Dcmsnv‡ii gva¨‡g †jLvwU GK ev `yB ev‡K¨i g‡a¨ †kl Ki‡Z n‡e hv‡Z MÖv‡di mvivsk _v‡K|

Writing Book Page- 33

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Writing Book Page- 34

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

IELTS

Part 3

Academic Task 1 Exercises

Writing Book Page- 35

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 1

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

In June 1996, an experimental flu vaccine was trialled on females in a large

country town.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams
below.

You should write at least 150 words

4 females 28% 24%

males
No. of deaths

13%
1 35%

Babies or children Hospitalised or

0 Aged (over 65 years otherwise receiving
M F M F
old) medical treatment
Not given the vaccine
1000 March to May June to August
Figure 3 Flu rates for Males and Females
5000
No. of cases of flu

4000

3000 females
2000

1000 males
0
Mar Apr Mar May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

1996

Writing Book Page- 36

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 1: Model Answer

The diagrams show data of a flu epidemic that hit a large country town in 1996. Figure 1 gives
the number of persons who died; Figure 2 shows the percentage breakdown of females who
received a new flu vaccine; and Figure 3 gives the number of cases of flu before and during the
epidemic.

In Figure 1 it can be seen that the flu was responsible for the deaths of 2 females but no males
in the period from March to May. However, from June to August, there were 4 female deaths
and 1 male death.

According to the pie chart in Figure 2, only those females most at risk were given the new flu
vaccine; 28% did not take part in the trial. Of those females who took part, 35% were aged (over
65 years old); 24% were babies or children; and 13% were either hospitalised or receiving other
medical attention.

From Figure 3 it is clear that the new vaccine had a positive effect on the number of new cases
of flu reported in females. There were just over 1000 cases reported in March, climbing rapidly
to a peak of 3500 in June. Thereafter, the number of cases dropped slowly to about 2800 in
August, before leveling off at 2500 for the rest of the year. For males, the figures were lower but
showed a similar trend throughout the epidemic.

Writing Book Page- 37

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 2

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The graph below presents percentage of commuters using different mode of

transports in London in the years 1960, 1980 and 2000.

Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information shown in the diagram below.

Commuter Transport in London

40
1960
35
1980
Percentage of commuters

30
2000

25

20

15

10

0
train car tube bus
Mode of transport and years

Writing Book Page- 38

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 2: Model Answer

The graph indicates the growing use of cars for commuting to work between 1960 - 2000, and
the corresponding decline in the usage of buses from being the most used mode of transport in
1960 to the least used in 2000.

The graph also shows the changing patterns in commuting by train, car, tube or bus for
commuters in London in the years 1960, 1980 and 2000. The number of people using trains at
first rose from just under 20% in 1960 to about 26% in 1980, but then fell back to about 23% in
2000. Use of the tube has been relatively stable, falling from around 27% of commuters in 1960
to 22% in 1980, but climbing back to reach 25% by 2000.

On the other hand, the use of cars increased steadily from just over 5% in 1960 to 23% in 1980,
reaching almost 40% by 2000, whereas the use of buses has declined since 1960, falling from
just under 35% in 1960 to 27% in 1980 and only 15% in 2000.

Writing Book Page- 39

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 3

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The graph below shows the effects of different brands of fertilizer on bean plant
growth.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below.

You should write at least 150 words.

The Effect of Fertilizers on Bean Plant Growth

30

25
Brands of Fertilizers

20
15 Average Height in cm

10
5
0
Granny’s Job’s Miracle Gro K Mark No Fertilizer
Bloomers House Plant Fertilizer
Spikers

Average Height in cm

Writing Book Page- 40

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 3: Model Answer

The column graph presents the effects of fertilizers on bean plant (wkg RvZxq MvQ) growth. It can
be clearly seen that different brands of fertilizer have significantly (Zvrch©c~Y© fv‡e) different effects
on plant growth.

As documented, (bw_e×) bean plants grow as high as 11 cm without any fertilizer. Among the
fertilizers used, the Granny's Boomers have the most significant effect in growth. Due to use of
three fertilizers i.e. Granny's Bloomers, K Mart Fertilizer and Jobe's House Plant Spikes plants
grew as high as 28 cm, 22cm and 15 cm respectively. As opposed to this positive result, the
effect of Miracle Gro is negative. As an effect of Miracle Gro plants were dwarfed (Le©vK…Z) down
to 6 cm which is almost 5 cm shorter than plants that grow without fertilizer.

In conclusion, this is apparent (`„k¨gvb) that among the 4 fertilizer brands tested, 3
had positive effects while 1 had negative effects. We can safely say that, as an effect of
fertilizers, in three out of four cases plants may grow higher than it would have grown without
fertilizer.

Writing Book Page- 41

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 4

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The graph shows a comparison in the pulse rate changes between two different
individuals of different ages and professions.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below.

You should write at least 150 words.

Exercise and Puls Rate

160
Pulse rate in beats per

140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
Time in Minutes

Mabel- 36 yr old office worker Albert- 26 yr old former college athlete

Writing Book Page- 42

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 4: Model Answer

The line graph compares the pulse (ü`K¤ú) rate changes caused by exercise of two different
individuals of different age and profession.

Initially/at the onset (ïiæ‡Z), 36 years old office worker Mr. Mabel 's pulse rate per minute is
lower than that of 26 years old former college athlete Mr. Albert's (64 compared to 80). After 1
minute of exercise both of their pulse rise to 85 and 75 respectively. Between 1 to 2 minutes,
Mabel's pulse rate escalates (Da©Mgb) steeply (Lvovfv‡e) upward and reaches 150 while Albert's
pulse rate further rises increasingly to 120. Then between two minutes to three minutes Mabel's
pulse again falls very sharply to 100 while Albert's pulse gradually falls and levels around 115.
Then again between 3 to 4 minutes Mabel's pulse rate falls less steeply than Albert's to 80 and
64 respectively. It can be observed from the line graph that Mabel started lower at 64, went up
higher 150 and then finished at as high as 80 which is higher than the starting. Albert starts
higher at 80, reaches at 118, then goes down to 64, lower than its starting. Moreover in Mabel's
case the line sharply rose and then fell quickly between 2 to 4 minutes. While in Albert's case
the line plateaued above 110 for a while.

In conclusion, young athlete's pulse fluctuation (DVvbvgv) is less intense than the mid-thirties office
worker.

Writing Book Page- 43

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 5

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The column graph below shows the consumption of regular ice cream in US
market.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below.

You should write at least 150 words.

Regular Ice Cream, US

960
940
920
900
880 Million
Gallons
860
840
820
800
95 96 97 98 99 2000

Year

Writing Book Page- 44

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 5: Model Answer

The column graph presents regular ice cream consumption (†fvM) in US market.

In 1996 the regular ice cream consumption in the US market was 860 million-gallons. In all the
subsequent years the consumption of regular ice cream increased. In 1996, 1997, 1998 and
1999 the amount of ice cream consumption was measured at 880 million-gallon, 920 gallon,
940 million gallon, and 960 million gallon. In 2000 consumption remained at a level slightly
below from previous year. The year 1997 and 1999 witnessed (mv¶x nIqv) higher growth
compared to years 1996 and 1998. From the figures the growth can be measured at as low as
2% in 1996 and 1998 to as high as 5% in 1999.1997 had roughly 4% growth. There was a slight
negative growth in 2000.

In conclusion we can clearly say that the consumption of regular ice cream in US market is on
a gradual rise except (e¨vZxZ) for the year 2000.

Writing Book Page- 45

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 6

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The graph below shows the comparison between the number of applicants and
the number of students who were granted admission.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams, below.

You should write at least 150 words.

NSU application and admission 1993-2003

5000

4500

4000

3500

3000

application
2500 admission

2000

1500

1000

500

0
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003

Writing Book Page- 46

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 6: Model Answer

The column graph is the comparison of the number of students who applied for admission to
NSU and number of students who were granted admission throughout the years of 1993 to
2003.

In 1993, the number of application was roughly 200 and out of them 125 students were granted
admission. In year 1994, roughly 700 students applied for admission and almost half of them
were granted admission. The next year, roughly 1200 students sought admission while around
one third of the students were given admission. From 1996 to 2002, the number of students
seeking admission to NSU doubled while the number of students allowed for admission
increased only by a small fraction. By the year 2003 the admission competition was highest and
more than 4000 students competed for roughly 800 seats. After almost 10 years of steady
growth in the number of admission seeking (fwZ©”Qz) students, the year 2003 witnessed a negative
growth of the admission seekers.

Finally, it is apparent that the number of applicants grew steadily throughout the time but the
number of admission has been kept under control.

Writing Book Page- 47

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 7

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the relative percentage of different types of cheese
production in USA.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below.

You should write at least 150 words.

Cheese Production
2.8
13.1
30.6
Mozarella
Cheddar Cheese
8.7 Other American
Other Italian

8.8 All other

Swiss

Writing Book Page- 48

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 7: Model Answer

The pie chart presents the relative percentage of different type of cheese (cwbi) production in
USA. It is interesting to see that the two prominent (cÖavb) types of cheese dominates (`Lj K‡i)
two third of the US production.

From the chart, Cheddar Cheese is the single highest produced cheese in USA and its relative
share is 36%. This is closely followed by Mozzarella cheese whose relative share is 30.6%.
These two types of cheese dominate the market. There are many other types of cheese of
different country origin and none of them have significant share in production. Other than
cheddar cheese, other American cheese types occupy 8.8% of total production and other than
Mozzarella cheese, other Italian cheeses occupy 8.7% of total US production. Swiss origin
cheese types account for a meager (small) 2.8% of the total production. Other than these types,
all other types of cheese from other country origin have a 13.1 % share of the total production.

It is clearly seen that American (including Cheddar cheese) and Italian (including Mozzarella
cheese) cheese have a share of around 85% of the production share while cheeses from all
other country origin have around 15 % of US production share.

Writing Book Page- 49

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 8

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The number of tourists visiting Malaysia and Dubai from 1995 to 2003 is presented
below.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below.

You should write at least 150 words.

Tourist Visit in Malaysia and Dubai (in 000)

450

400
Dubai
350

300

250
Malaysia

200

150

100

50

0
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003

Writing Book Page- 50

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 8: Model Answer

The double line graph presents two time series data of tourist visit in Malaysia and Dubai from
1995 to 2003.

In 1995 Dubai had almost double tourists than Malaysia's around 50 thousand tourists and
Dubai continued to attract more and more tourists till 2001. Malaysia performed unimpressive
in 1996 while Dubai attracted more tourists. In 1997 and 1998 both the countries registered
tourist growth. In 1999 Dubai grew strongly while Malaysia had a negative growth in number of
tourist. In 2000, Malaysia had a high growth in tourist while the number of tourists in Dubai grew
slowly and in 2001 Malaysia exceeded (AwZµg Kiv) Dubai in tourist number. In both years 2002
and 2003, number of tourists in Dubai reduced while the number of tourists in Malyasia
increased. In 2003 the number of tourists in Malaysia was significantly greater than Dubai.

It is clear that both the countries have more tourists in 2003 than they had in 1995.

Writing Book Page- 51

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 9 :

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The graph below presents the number of different airline flights coming to Hong
Kong per week in year 1980 and 2000.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below.

You should write at least 150 words.

South East Asian Airlines operation: Number of Flights Coming to Hong Kong per Week

50
45
45 43 44

40
36
35

30

25 1980
23 2000
20
16 10 16
15
12 12
11 11
10 8

5
5
2
0
0
Japan Air Cathay Dragon Air Singapore Thai Malaysia Korean Canada
Lines Pacific Airways Airways Airlines Air

Writing Book Page- 52

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 9 : Model Answer

The column graph compares the number of flights of different airlines coming to Hong Kong per
week in year 1980 and year 2000.

In 1980 Japan Airlines had 12 flights per week while in 2000 number of flights increased to 36.
During the same time, Cathay Pacific's number of flights doubled from 8 to 16. In 1980, Dragon
Air had no operation to HK while in 2000 it had 16 flights per week. Thai Airways (12 flights in
1980 and 46 in 2000), Malaysian Airlines (11 flights in 1980 and 44 in 2000) and Singapore
Airlines (16 flights in 1980 and 43 flights in 2000) grew strong from year 1980 and by 2000 they
are the top three operators in terms of their number of flights. The number of flights to Hongkong
per week of Thai and Malaysian Airlines have grown four times during the span of 20 years
time. While of flights more than doubled for Korean airlines during this time while number of
Garuda flights gone up from 2 to 5.

In conclusion, all the airlines flight has been increased during this 20 years time, and most grew
quite (†ek) strongly.

Writing Book Page- 53

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 10

You are advised to spend a maximum of 20 minutes on this task.

The pie chart below presents percentage of new job opportunities for different
professional groups in Australia in year 2001.

Write a report for a university tutor describing the information shown in the diagrams below. You
should write at least 150 words.

New Job openings in Australia in 2001

Medicine 12%

Social Service 26%

Engineering 8%

Research 3% Medicnine
Engineering
Research
Management
Finance
Social Service

Finance 15%

Management 36%

Writing Book Page- 54

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Exercise 10 : Model Answer

The pie chart presents the profession-wise relative job openings in Australia in 2001.

The broad categories of job opening are Management, Social Service, Finance, Medicine,
Engineering and Research. It is apparent (`„k¨gvb) that management jobs are the highest
percentage of new jobs available in Australia and that is 36%. Next to management jobs are
the social services that accounts for 26% of the total new jobs. These two types of jobs together
make 62% of total new jobs. Third largest type of new job category is finance, which makes up
15% of total new jobs. Then medicine accounts for 12% of total new jobs and Engineering
accounts for 8% of total new jobs. Only three of every 100 new jobs are research jobs. This is
interesting to observe that professional and functional jobs like Medicine, Engineering, Finance
together make little over one out of every three new jobs in Australia.

Writing Book Page- 55

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Writing Book Page- 56

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

IELTS

Real Exam Questions

Writing Book Page- 57

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 1:
18th of February, 2015

You should write about 20 minutes on this task.

The table shows the amount of total waste produced in million tonnes in six different
countries in three years.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

You should write atleast 150 words.

Name of Country 1988 1992 2000

Ireland 10 16 9.9

Poland 10 2.89 18

Japan 15 22 25

Canada 20 19 29

Scotland 3 2 5

The United States 107 150 209

Writing Book Page- 58

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table represents the amount of waste produced by six different countries in 1988, 1992 and
2000. The countries mentioned are USA, Poland, Ireland, Japan, Canada and Scotland.

Ireland’s figure in 2000 stood at 9.9 million tonnes- representing a significant fall from its figures
eight years back, when it accounted for 16 million tonnes. Poland’s figures started at 10 million,
fell for 1992 and then exceeded 15 million tonnes in 2000. Japan’s amount increased steadily
over the period, with the 2000 figures at 25 million. Scotland’s records barely increased from its
initial numbers of 3 million- and stood at a meager 5 million in 2000. Canada produced 29 million
tonnes of waste in 2000 was quite overwhelmingly surpassed by US. USA’s numbers were
significantly higher for the three years mentioned, and bettered Canada’s numbers by 700%.

To infer, USA contributed the most towards waste production, with the Scottish producing the
least.

Writing Book Page- 59

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 2:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The charts show the proportion of holidaymakers of one region staying in different types
of accommodation in three different years.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant,
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 60

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie charts outline statistics regarding where the holidaymakers from a particular region
stay- over a time span of 40 years, starting from 1965. It is quite evident that over the years,
people shifted from their tendency of staying with family and friends in favor of staying in hotels.

The 1965 figures show that while 55% of the people stay with friends and relatives, 16% prefer
to stay in hotels. Camping and caravans stand at almost similar percentages for this particular
year- at 15% and 14% respectively.

In 1985, the percentages of people who stay with known people fall by 20%, whereas 37% stay
in hotels. Caravans remain the least preferred option at 10%.

The 2005 percentages for those staying with friends and relatives fall further to 30%, when 38%
prefer hotel accommodation. However, camping is the least preferred option here, standing at
almost half, compared to caravans (20%).

Overall, it is quite apparent that the percentages of people preferring hotels, camping and
caravans are on the rise.

Writing Book Page- 61

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 3:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the male and female internet users aged 15-24 in Canada in 2000.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 62

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart depicts how male and female internet users in Canada used the internet for the
year 2000. The graph points out that emails provide the most popular use of internet, for the
15-24 years aged users while surfing for other facilities represented the least popular mode of
use.

More females than males used the internet for sending and receiving mails (48% for females
and 41% for males). Social networking sites and activities in these sites had the second highest
internet users, with the males leading their female counterparts by 4%, themselves standing at
28%. Females led the online shopper percentage by 6% with the males standing at 13%. Both
groups used the net for other facilities the least, where the males surpassed the females. Here,
the percentages were almost double for the males, at 18%, with the females settling for 9%.

All in all, males were proven to focus more on networking and mailing whereas females had
shopping as a worthwhile activity.

Writing Book Page- 63

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 4:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The illustration below shows the proportions of people living in different types of houses
in three different areas in 2012.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Type of Terrace Semi – Detached Bungalows

houses Houses detached houses
houses
Area

Green Park 75% 5% 15% 5%

Area

Central 45% 15% 5% 35%

Area

Central 25% 5% 5% 65%

Park
Area

Writing Book Page- 64

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table portrays the population of people living in three different areas and their housing
arrangements in 2012. Terrace houses, as seen from the table, seem to be the most preferred
choice among the four different types of houses talked about.

With regard to Green Park area, bungalows and semi-detached houses seem to be the least
common accommodation forms at 5% each. Terrace houses amass a huge 13 times greater
than that, standing at 75%. The rest (15%) are semi-detached ones.

Central Area also has a bigger proportion of houses with terraces, standing at 45%, almost half
of the total proportion. Bungalows follow at 35% and detached houses are the least popular at
5%.

Central Park Area depict a somewhat different picture. Bungalows account for a major 65%,
followed by terrace houses at 25%. Detached and semi-detached houses fill in the rest 10%
equally.

All in all, terrace houses and bungalows seem to be the houses in demand, as far as
preferences of the population go.

Writing Book Page- 65

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 5:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The average prices per kilo of clothing imported into the European Union from six
different countries in 1993 and 2003 are shown in the bar chart below.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 66

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph delineates average prices per kilo of clothing into the EU for two different years.
There are six countries mentioned in the chart.

In 1993, the highest price was clothing imported from Argentina, at around 30 pounds per kilo.
This was significantly higher- in fact- almost 7 times more than the price for imports from
Bangladesh. Brazil had the second highest prices at round about 25 pounds per kilo, with Japan,
China and India following subsequently.

The figures for 2005 were met with some fascinating developments. The leader for 1995,
Argentina, saw its price fall a bit, with Brazil somehow holding on to the same price 10 years
afterwards. Japan’s prices fell as well. However, India, China and Bangladesh all saw their
export prices rise, with China and Bangladesh’s prices almost doubling their previous numbers
in 1993.

In conclusion, it can be easily said that the exports from Asian countries such as China, India
and Bangladesh somehow increased in value in the ten years mentioned.

Writing Book Page- 67

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 6:

You should write about 20 minutes on this task.

The line graphs below show the demand for steel in million tonnes and the number of
workers employed in the steel industry in the UK in 2010.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 68

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graphs talk about demand for steel (in million tonnes) and the number of workers
working in the steel industry in UK in 2010, with particular mention of four months, namely
January, April, August and December.

In January, the demand for steel stood at 4000 million tonnes- which is double the actual
demand in the country. The figures for April- the actual demand, stayed the same, with
production figures surpassing this number by almost 1500 million tonnes. August saw a fall,
with demand almost half of the actual amount produced while December numbers saw the
graph portray something different altogether. The actual demand was around 1800 million
tones, far exceeding the actual steel production amount at approximately 1000 million tonnes.

As for the workers numbers, it stood at 500000 in January of 2010, increasing somewhat in
February, prior to plummeting till April. Fluctuation followed for the next three months, before
increasing in August (nearly 350000). The numbers fell again in September, before falling rather
drastically in December.

To summarize, it is evident that in the last few months of the year, with worker numbers falling,
the production of steel also fell to their lowest.

Writing Book Page- 69

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 7:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The bar charts below show the average number of annual holidays and the average
number of working hours in five European countries.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 70

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The two bar graphs in unison talk about the average number of holidays and working hours in
France, UK, Finland, Germany and Switzerland.

The graph depicting the average number of working hours clearly state that the Germans work
the highest number of hours (around 1900). This is much higher than their counterparts from
Switzerland (almost 1200 hours). Among the other three countries, England had slightly higher
working hours, followed closely by the Finns and the French.

The Germans enjoyed the least number of holidays annually, as can be easily discerned from
their high work hours. They take approximately 120 days of holiday a year- which is significantly
lower than the people of Switzerland. The French however, enjoyed more holidays than UK and
Finland citizens, although the numbers were quite close for the two countries.

Overall, it may thus be inferred that the Germans work the most number of hours while the
people of Switzerland fell on the other extreme.

Writing Book Page- 71

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 8:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The bar charts below shows the number of hours each teacher spent teaching in different
schools in four different countries in 2001.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

The number of hours spent by each teacher in teaching

Writing Book Page- 72

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph displays the number of hours spent by teachers in different countries’ schools in
2001. For all the countries (Japan, Spain, USA, Iceland) represented in the survey, the number
of teaching hours, quite predictably, were highest in the upper secondary schools.

USA’s hours were the highest in the primary level, standing at almost 800, followed by Spain
(around 650), Japan and Iceland.

Lower secondary schools had a slightly different picture in that USA had almost double the
number of teaching hours compared to Iceland’s (approximately 650 hours). Spain and Japan
had figures averaging around 700 hours.

Japan had the least number of hours at the Upper secondary level, at nearly 700- almost half
of USA’s, which had the highest. Spain and Iceland’s numbers were quite close in between.

In conclusion, it is quite evident that USA had the highest number of hours at a collective figure
of just about 3000, compared to Japan’s figures of about 2000 hours.

Writing Book Page- 73

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 9:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the proportions of people aged under 5 years and 65 years and
above in the world in a period of 100 years. The table shows the proportions of people
aged 65 years and above in two years in five different regions.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Proportions of people aged 65 years and above

Proportions of people aged under 5 years and 65 years and above

Regions of the world 2020 2040
Asia 60.0 5
Southern Europe 15.9 32.7
Northern Europe 26.6 28.0
North America 33.3 24.0
Australia 16.0 1.30

Writing Book Page- 74

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph and the table represent the quantity of world population of two different age
groups from 1940 to 2040 and the distribution of people aged at least 65 across five regions of
the world, accordingly.

As indicated by the line chart, in 1940, there was around 10% elderly people all over the world.
This increased by 2% in the next decade, before it fell and then rose back to 11% in 1960. From
1970 to 2020, there was a gradual decline and it stands at roughly 7% in the latter year. In 2040,
this percentage is expected to fall even further and will be slighly below 6% for that year.

On the other hand, the table provides evidence that in 2020 the elderly citizens cover a large
proportion of the world population and Asia will accommodate most of them, a staggering 60%.
North America and Northern Europe have 33.3% and 26.6% old people accordingly. The
proportion of Australia and Southern Europe differs only by 0.1. In 2040, the number of old
people is estimated to decrease from the regions with Southern and Northern Europe as
exceptions. Asia will hold the lowest number of old citizens at 5% and Southern Europe will
have the highest number of old people, with 32.7%.

To sum up, the charts indicate that the number of elderly people is expected to increase
especially in the European region of the world

Writing Book Page- 75

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 10:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The following graph shows the changes in Outokumpu share price.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 76

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph shows the changes and a decline overall in the share price of Outokumpu in a five-
year period for 5 years.

At the beginning of this period the share price was at EURO 13 per share. There were several
fluctuations until late 2006 when there was a sudden increase from EURO 21 to EURO 31. This
higher price did not last long, however, and it fell before rising strongly again in 2008. From mid-
2008 there was a sharp downward trend through the end of the year when it fell to the lowest
point in this period at just over EURO 7 per share. After that the share price recovered and,
despite some fluctuations, continued to rise until it reached a peak of EURO 17 in early 2010.
Until late 2010 the trend was downward again, ending the year at just over EURO 12.

Outokumpu made significant gains and losses during this period but overall lost around EURO
1 per share.

Writing Book Page- 77

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 11:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The following graph shows the percentage of unemployment rates for the females in UK.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 78

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart shows the unemployment rates among women in the countries that make up the
United Kingdom, both in 2013 and in 2014.

There has generally been a small decrease in female unemployment rates from 2013 to 2014,
except in Scotland. In 2013, 5.6% of women in Northern Ireland were unemployed. The only
country with a smaller percentage of women unemployed was Wales, with a rate of 5.4%. Both
countries saw a decrease in the percentage of unemployed women in 2014. In Northern Ireland,
the percentage fell to 4.6% and in Wales it fell to 5%. England had the greatest percentage of
unemployed women in 2013, with 6.8%. However, this decreased by 0.3% in 2014. Lastly,
Scotland was the only country which had an increasing percentage of unemployed women. In
2013, it had 6.1% of women out of work. This increased to 6.7% in 2014, making it the country
with the highest female unemployment rate of the four countries.

In conclusion, it can be said that the percentage of female unemployment were nearly similar
to each other over the two years.

Writing Book Page- 79

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 12:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The diagrams show a structure that is used to generate electricity from wave power.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 80

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The two diagrams show how electricity can be generated from the rise and fall of water caused
by sea waves.

The process involves a structure which is mounted on the side of a cliff or sea wall. This
structure consists of a large chamber. One end is open to the sea, and the other leads into a
vertical column, which is open to the atmosphere. A turbine is installed inside this column and
this is used to generate the electricity in two [Link] first diagram indicates that when a
wave approaches the device, water is forced into the chamber, applying pressure on the air
within the column. This air escapes to atmosphere through the turbine, thereby producing
[Link] second diagram illustrates the next part of the process when wave retreats. As
the water level falls, the air from outside the column is sucked back in through the turbine. As a
result, electricity continues to be generated. The turbine rotates only in one direction, regardless
of the direction of the air flow.

In conclusion, we can see that this structure is useful as electricity is generated in both phases:
entering and retreating of water.

Writing Book Page- 81

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 13:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The two pie charts below show the online shopping sales for retail sectors in Canada in
2005 and 2010.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 82

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The two pie charts compare the percentages of online sales across different retail sectors in
Canada in the years 2005 and 2010.

For three of the sectors, it is evident that over this time frame there was significant change in
their proportion of online transactions. At 35% we can see that electronics and appliance sector
accounted for the majority of online sales in 2005, but this percentage had dropped to 30% by
2010. During the same five-year period, as an increasing number of people chose to purchase
food and beverage online, we can see that transactions went from just 22% to 32%, making it
the retail sector with the largest overall proportion of the online market. In 2005, the home
furnishing industry boasted an impressive 25% of the total online sales in Canada. However, by
2010, the figure had fallen considerably to 15%. Interestingly, online sales of video games
eventually overtook sales of home furnishings, although video games still represented only 23%
of the market.

Overall, it is discernible that the percentage of spending on online sales declined for electronics
and similar appliances when it rose for video games, over the five year period.

Writing Book Page- 83

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 14:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The bar chart below shows shares of expenditures for five major categories in the United
States, Canada, the United Kingdom, and Japan in the year 2009.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 84

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart delineates how consumers in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom,
and Japan allocated different shares of total spending to categories such as food, housing, and
transportation in 2009.

We can see that the United States had the highest housing expenditure share, 26% of total
expenditures in 2009. The United Kingdom and Japan followed, with 24% and 22%,
respectively. Canada had the lowest housing share at 21% whereas, Canada had the largest
transportation share of all four countries at 20%. The United States and the United Kingdom
had the next-highest transportation shares, 17% and 15%, respectively. Japan had the lowest,
at 10%. Consequently, in Japan, consumers spent 23% of their total expenditures on food in
2009. The United Kingdom had the second-highest share at 20%. Canada, with 15%, and the
United States, with 14% had the lowest food expenditure shares among the countries studied.

To conclude, Japanese spent highest on food whereas USA spent highest on Housing and
Health care and Canada in transportation and clothing.

Writing Book Page- 85

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 15:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The bar chart below shows the estimated sales of jeans for two companies next year in
Turkey. The pie chart shows the projected market share of the two companies in jeans
at the end of next year.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
You should write atleast 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 86

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart shows the estimated sales of jeans in thousands of pairs for two companies in
Turkey next year.

It is anticipated that purchases of jeans at Mango Co. will rise from 150,000 pairs in January to
approximately 500,000 pairs in August, and will remain there until November. For December,
sales are expected to be in the region of 600,000 pairs. Meanwhile, it is estimated that the sales
of jeans for Jack & Jones Co. will begin the year at around 450,000 pairs in January, falling to
about 250,000, before increasing to around 400,000 in June. For the next two months until
August, sales are forecast to remain steady at this level, after which they are expected to rise
steadily to hit a peak of approximately 900,000 pairs in December.

The pie chart shows that, at the end of next year, the anticipated market share for Mango Co.
and Jack & Jones Co. is 20% and 30% respectively.

As can be seen from the chart, the overall sales trends for both companies are forecast to be
upwards.

Writing Book Page- 87

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 16:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The graph below shows the changes in maximum number of Asian elephants between
1994 and 2007.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 88

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph shows the estimated maximum population of elephants in a range of Asian countries
in both 1997 and 2004.

In most of the countries included in the graph, the population fell. This was most noticeable in
Malaysia and Thailand, where the number of elephants was thought to be less than half the
figure in 1997. In the former, the number of elephants dropped as low as 1000. India remained
the country with by far the largest elephant population, but experienced a dramatic fall in
numbers so that in 2004 there may have been as few as 7500. Despite its size, China had a
very small population of at most 500 elephants by 2004. Although the trend was downwards
overall, elephant populations were thought to have remained stable in Laos and Vietnam at
approximately 1200. The only country where elephants showed signs of recovering was
Cambodia, where numbers may have risen by up to 200.

All in all, it can well be deduced that the most number of elephants were in India, over all other
the countries mentioned in the graph.

Writing Book Page- 89

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 17:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the GDP growth per year for three countries between 2007 and
2010.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 90

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The chart shows the annual GDP growth for three countries from 2007 to 2010.

By the year 2007 the figure for Tunisia was by far the highest at close to 6.3% per annum. This
figure is double that of Ecuador and three times that of Japan on a global level. However by
2008 this trend has changed considerably; the Japanese doubled their annual GDP over this
period and there was also an increase in the GDP of Ecuador, while Tunisia fell to 4.5% per
year. In 2009 and 2010, the downward trend for Tunisia continued falling to a low of 3% at the
end of this period. For Ecuador, the GDP fell sharply to just under 1.5% in the year 2009 and
rose only slightly in 2010 to 2.3%. On the other hand, for Japan, the GDP figure rose significantly
throughout this time and by the year 2010 had more than matched the GDP figures for Tunisia
of the year 2007.

Overall, it is well observed that the GDP of Japan is considerably in a better position compared
to the other countries.

Writing Book Page- 91

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 18:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The two graphs show the main sources of energy in the USA in the 1980s and the 1990s.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 92

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The two graphs show that oil was the major energy source in the USA in both 1980 and 1990.

The graph shows that coal, natural gas and hydroelectric power remained in much the same
proportions. On the other hand, there was a dramatic rise in nuclear power, which doubled its
percentage over the ten years. Oil supplied the largest percentage of energy, although the
percentage decreased from 42% in 1980 to 33% in 1990. Coal in 1990 was the second largest
source of energy, increasing its proportion to 27% from 22% in the previous decade. Natural
gas, the second largest source in 1980 at 26%, decreased its share very slightly to provide 25%
of America’s energy ten years later. There was no change in the percentage supplied by
hydroelectric power which remained at 5% of the total energy used. Nuclear power had the
greatest change in 1990 it was 10%, twice that of the 1980s.

Writing Book Page- 93

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 19:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The graph shows estimated oil production capacity for several Gulf countries between
1990 and 2010.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 94

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph shows Oil Production Capacity in millions of barrels per day for selected Gulf
countries. There are several features in this graph.

The most significant feature is that oil production will increase sharply in almost all the countries
shown. Kuwait and Iraq are both expected to double their output between 1990 and 2010, with
Kuwait's production rising from 1.8 million barrels per day (bpd) in 1990 to 3.8 in 2010. Iran will
also increase its output by a slightly smaller amount. After remaining steady at 2.5 million bpd
from 1990 to 2000, the UAE's output is expected to approach 4.0 million bpd in 2010. Only
Qatar's production is predicted to fall, back to 0.8 million bpd after a slight rise in 2000.

However, the greatest increase will be from Saudi Arabia. In 1990, its output capacity at 8.5
million bpd exceeded the combined production of Iran, Iraq and Kuwait. This lead is expected
to continue with a 75% increase in production to 14.5 million bpd 2010.

In summary, while most of the countries are expected to show increases, Saudi Arabia will
maintain and strengthen its position as the major producer.

Writing Book Page- 95

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 20:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The pie charts below show the online sales for retail sectors in New Zealand in 2003 and
2013.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

2003

Clothes
22% Travel
37%
Books
19%
Film/Music
22%

2013

Clothes
16% Travel
29%
Books
22%

Film/Music
33%

Writing Book Page- 96

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie charts illustrate the proportion of four different online retail sales categories in New
Zealand in two different periods, 2003 and 2013. It can be seen that the sales of film or music,
and books in the country increased over the ten-year period, while travel and clothing sectors
were on the contrary position.

In 2003, the online sales of travel industries in New Zealand accounted for 36% of the total
sector, which was 12% higher than the clothing sector. However, over the decade, both figures
had declined sharply to 29% and 16% respectively.

In the film or music category, it is noticed that the online sales figure of the sector had risen
drastically by 12% to reach 33% in 2013. As for the sector of books, it had increased slightly
from 19% in 2003 to 22% in 2013.

In conclusion, it is clear that between 2003 and 2013, the online sales of travel and clothing in
New Zealand had dropped, while the sales of film and music and books had grown.

Writing Book Page- 97

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 21:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the changes in sales of four different types of books from 2002
to 2012.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 98

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph shows the changes in the sales of four different types of publications for a decade
since 2002.

In particular, the sales of the biggest sellers, history books, experienced an overall growth during
the period. The sales were around 4500 copies in 2002, and then reached a peak of 10000 in
2008. Although the figure dropped slightly after then, history books remained the greatest sellers
with around 9000 copies sold in 2012.

The sales of art books and entertainment books showed a similar pattern of a steady growth.
The figure for art books increased slowly from around 1500 copies in 2002 to just under 4000
in 2012 while that for entertainment books went through a moderate rise from approximately
1300 copies in 2002 to 3000 in 2012.

On the other hand, the last category, hobbies book, did not show an upward trend. The sales
of hobbies book showed the lowest sales figures, and the figure generally remained constant at
between 500 and 700 copies.

In general, all the given categorise except hobbies book showed a rising trend in the sales over
the period and the sales of history books were the highest while those of art books were the
lowest.

Writing Book Page- 99

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 22:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the percentage of men in three companies.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 100

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer :

The bar chart shows the percentage of men in senior development position in three companies
from 1980 to 2010.

While more men were in senior positions at Apple than other two companies in 1980 at 15%,
the trend was fairly erratic with a 2% drop to 13% in 1985, followed by a rise of 1% five years
later. In 1995, men held 7% more top development jobs than in 1990. After a slight drop back
to 19% in 2000, by 2010 25% of top posts were filled by men.

By contrast, at IBM men fared much better. In 1980, 2% of senior posts were occupied by men
with no change five years on. By 1990, the figure had increased to 13%, doubling to 26 per cent
in 1995. Five years afterwards, there was a 6% increase in male senior development jobs with
a near twofold jump in 2010 to stand at 63%, the highest for the three companies.

The situation was less remarkable at Microsoft than the other two firms except for the year 2010.
In 1980, the percentage of senior posts held by men was 8% climbing at the rate of 2% in each
subsequent period until 2000, after which it leapt to 45%. From the data, it is clear that men
dominated senior posts at IBM by 2010.

To conclude, it is quite evident that IBM had the better percentage (by far) of men in senior
development position, followed by Microsoft and Apple.

Writing Book Page- 101

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 23:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows how much money is spent in the budget on different sectors, by
the UAE government, in 2000.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 102

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer :

The graph tells us about the budget of the UAE government in 2000. In general, the most
important targets were social security, health, and education.

The biggest slice of the pie chart is taken up by social security including pensions, employment
assistance and other benefits which made up slightly under one-third of total expenditure.
Health and personal social services was the second highest budget cost. Hospital and medical
services accounted for AED 53 billion, or about 15% of the budget. Education cost UAE AED 38
billion which comprises almost 12% of the whole budget. The government spent about seven
percent of revenue on debt, and roughly similar amounts went towards defence (AED 22 billion)
and law and order (AED 17 billion).

Spending on housing, transport and industry totalled AED 37 billion. Finally, other expenditure
accounted for AED 23 billion.

All in all, the bulk of UAE government spending goes on social welfare and health. However,
education, defence, and law and order are also major areas of spending.

Writing Book Page- 103

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 24:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the sales for Istanbul Promo Plus for one particular year.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 104

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer :

The chart shows how Promo Plus in Istanbul fluctuated over a period of 12 months.

It is observed that in the first month of 2007, Promo Plus sales stood at 200 million turkish lira
and rose slightly to reach about 225 million in February. This was followed by another increase,
although much steeper, in March when sales where almost 125 million turkish lira higher than
February.

However, this upward trend was suddenly broken and sales plummeted dramatically over the
next 4 months to reach a little over 100 million turkish lira in July. August sales showed a
significant rise back to January levels as figures nearly doubled, but this was not to last as they
dropped again in September to the same level as they were in July. October came with a small
increase of about 100 million turkish lira in sales, after which sales figures levelled off and
remained relatively static over the last two months of 2007.

Overall, Promo Plus in Istanbul remained relatively unchanged in 2007 as January and
December sales were fairly equal, although sales were at their highest in March while the
weakest sales figures could be observed in July and September.

Writing Book Page- 105

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 25:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the number of passengers using a metro station in Paris for a
day.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 106

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer :

The line-graph indicates the number of people using a metro station in Paris over a given day
of year.

The number of passengers rises sharply in the morning reaching a peak of 400 at 8 am. After
the morning peak there is a steady drop to 300 at 9 am and less than 200 at 10 am. Between
10 am and 11 am there is a slight increase. The number plateaus just below 300 between 12
noon and 2 pm. In the afternoon, there is a decline in the number of citizens using the station
to just 80 at 4 pm. The evening brings a huge increase from 200 at 5 pm to almost 400 at 6 pm.
The number of passengers tapers off slightly after 6 pm, but falls quickly to 120 by 8 pm. After
a small rise at 9 pm, the number tails off to 120 at 10 pm.

All in all, the time series show that the greatest number of passengers gather in the station early
in the morning and also early in the evening.

Writing Book Page- 107

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 26:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the number of houses in Derby and Nottingham.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 108

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart describes the number of houses built in two neighboring cities, Derby and
Nottingham, between 2000 and 2009.

The trend for Derby was decidedly upwards, with Derby experiencing a steady rise from 40 new
houses in the first year, to just under 120 during the 2003. Over the next 4 years of decade,
new houses construction in Derby remained constant at just under 120. This is in sharp contrast
to the last two years when the number of houses that went up in Derby leapt, first to 280 and
then to 350 houses.

Houses building in Nottingham, by comparison, was much more erratic. In the first two years of
the decade, more houses were erected in Nottingham than in Derby. In 2002, however,
construction declined to only 20. Over the next three years, houses numbers rose steadily, only
to drop practically to zero in 2006. There was then a dramatic surge in 2007 with over 200
houses being built. While in 2008 saw house building in Nottingham plummeting to only 10, in
2009 the number of new houses rocketed to 270, a rise of more than 2600 % on the previous
year.

Overall, the number of houses that were erected in Derby exceeded upwards the quantity
constructed in Nottingham.

Writing Book Page- 109

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 27:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows the English language divided and shows the variety of English
throughout the world.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 110

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The diagram shows the varieties of English spoken throughout the world and how they are
related.

There are two main branches of English: British English and American English. The British
English Branch is geographically wide-spread. It extends across several continents from the
West Indies, through the British Isles themselves, Africa, the Indian subcontinent, the Far East
and Australasia. In addition to the four varieties of English spoken in the British Isles (i.e. in
Ireland, Wales, Scotland and England), it includes a large number of other varieties, for instance
Jamaican English, South Africa English, and Australian English.

The American branch is largely restricted to the American continent. It comprises the varieties
of English spoken in the different region of the United States itself, as well as in Canada. Beyond
the continent, the extent of its influence is limited to the Philippines in the Far East and American
Samoa in the Pacific.

In brief, the diagram shows that, like the economic and political influence of the Anglo Saxon
countries, the reach of English has extended to virtually every region of the world.

Writing Book Page- 111

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 28:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The chart below shows kilometer of route and passengers per year in 6 cities.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 112

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar charts illustrate comparable information related to railway systems in six capital cities
in Europe; Paris, Stockholm, Lisbon, Rome, Madrid and Berlin.

As far as the ages are concerned, Paris has the oldest railway system among the six cities. It
was opened in the year 1863, which is incomparable to the other cities. On the other
hand, Berlin has the newest railway system which was opened in Europe 2001.

In terms of the sizes, Paris, for certain, has the longest route, 394km, which is nearly twice the
figure for Stockholm. Madrid, in contrast, has the shortest route in its railway system, only 28km.

When it comes to the numbers of people using the railway system in each, Lisbon shows the
largest number of 1927 million passengers in a year while Madrid serves the smallest number
of railway users, 45 millions.

In general, railway systems in different cities vary in terms of the start dates of each system, the
sizes, and the numbers of passengers using the systems in a year.

Writing Book Page- 113

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 29:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The diagram below shows the effects of cutting of trees.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 114

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The flow chart shows what typically occurs as a consequence of deforestation. When trees are
removed, there are four main immediate effects, which eventually result in flooding, degraded
vegetation and a loss of biodiversity.

One immediate effect is soil which has been compacted by heavy equipment. The result hard,
‘baked’ soil contributes to the run off of rain water and, eventually, flooding.

Another immediate consequence of logging is a reduction in the number of roots holding the
soil together. This leads to soil erosion. As a consequence, the quality and variety of vegetation
is compromised.

The third immediate effect is burning, both deliberate and a consequence of an increased risk
of forest fires. The waste that remains after loggings is destroyed and the microorganisms that
feed on this material are lost. This leads to degraded vegetation.

The final immediate consequence is a reduction in the amount of moisture plants return to the
air. Since there is less moisture in the air, there is less precipitation and an increased incidence
of drought. This too reduces plant growth and ultimately results in degraded vegetation and a
loss of biodiversity.

Overall, there are four immediate effects to deforestation, every single one leading to harmful
effects in general.

Writing Book Page- 115

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 30:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The table below shows types of youtube ads and their average lengths.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Type of Youtube Ad Average length of Youtube Average time viewed

Ad (seconds) (seconds)
Public Service 66.7 28.1

Business and Finance 35.1 24.6

Entertainment and news 30.8 26.5

Travel 28.7 23.0

Technology 39.3 20.9

Retail 26.5 20.1

Consumer electronics 24.9 17.3

Clothing 23.4 16.6

Pharmaceuticals 21.8 16.0

Lifestyle 33.7 14.3

Overall 38.1 20.4

Writing Book Page- 116

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows the average length of YouTube video advertisements by sector and average
length of time viewers spent watching these advertisements.

The average length of the advertisements varied from a low of 21.8 seconds for
pharmaceuticals to a high of 66.7 for public service advertisements. With the exception of
government- and technology- related advertisements, in general, products and services which
required a large financial commitment tended to have longer advertisements. Entertainments,
financial services and travel advertisements, for example, were all twenty eight seconds on
average or longer. Less expensive products, on the other hand, such as consumer electronics,
clothing and medicines, tended to have shorter advertisements.

Adverts for more expensive products or services also tended to be watched for longer than
adverts for less expensive items. Viewers on average watched more than 50 per cent of
advertisements for entertainment, travel, business and finance. In contrast, viewers tended to
watch less of government advertisements and advertisements for cheaper goods such as
consumer electronics, clothing and medicines.

Overall, length of YouTube video advertisements and length of time spent viewing such
advertisements appears to be associated with the perceived cost of the product or service being
advertised.

Writing Book Page- 117

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 31:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The table below shows the percentages of journey by different medium and the bar graph
talk about the reasons for travelling.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Journeys made
by Canada Belgium Germany Netherland
Car 90% 72% 68% 47%

Bicycle 1% 2% 2% 26%
Public
transport 3% 12% 18% 8%
On foot 5% 11% 11% 18%

Other 1% 3% 1% 1%

Most cited reasons people travel to

work by car (Canada)

Writing Book Page- 118

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table compares modes of transport used in four countries: Canada, Belgium, Germany and
the Netherlands and the bar chart shows the results of a survey into reasons people in
the Canada travel to work by car.

As can be seen from the table, cars were the most frequently used from of transport in all four
countries. However, the proportion of journeys made by car ranged from a low of 47 per cent in
the Netherlands to a high of 90 per cent in the Canada. Figures for the other forms of transport
also varied considerably. Not surprisingly, in the Netherlands, a high proportion of trips were
made by bicycle (26%) and on foot (18%). The highest rate of public transport use was
in Germany, where nearly one in five journeys was made by public transport.

The bar chart provides information that may help explain why car use in the Canada. The most
frequently cited reason was lack of any other alternative (38%). Although a sizeable percentage
said it was more convenient (12%), the other factors listed appeared to relate more to need than
preference, e.g. working night shift.

Overall, the figures show considerable variation in modes of transport used, though the car
continues to dominate in most contexts.

Writing Book Page- 119

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 32:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The diagram shows the procedure for university entry for high school graduates.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 120

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The flowchart illustrates the various steps that a high school student must follow to enter
university.

Once the high school has been obtained, students need to complete an application for university
entrance. This can be downloaded from the university website. The completed application
should then be sent to the administration.

Applicants receive a reply two weeks later which is provisional acceptance, a rejection or an
acceptance. If a rejection is received, students can either cancel their application altogether or
complete an application for an alternative course and send to the administration office.

A provisional acceptance means that more documentation is required. Applicants in this

situation should complete the additional documentation and submit them to the office. When an
acceptance is received, the applicant should complete the enrolment form and select which
subjects he or she wishes to undertake and register with the dean. When all this is complete,
the applicant may enter university.

Writing Book Page- 121

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 33:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The table below gives information about rail transport in three countries in 2007.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Number of People using rail Passenger Cargo

transport (not including kilometres per carried (billions of
Country metro) head of population tons)
Malaysia 5.9 770 22.2

Canada 0.3 80 2820

China 27 1980 23.01

Writing Book Page- 122

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows details for tethre countries concerning the percentage of the population who
use the railways, how many kilometres each person travels on average, and the number of tons
of cargo the railways carry.

What is surprising is that very few Americans use rail- less than half of one per cent- and they
do not travel far (just 80 kilometres). However, the Canada carries by far the most cargo, nearly
3 thousand billion tons. This contrasts greatly with China, where 27% of the population use rail,
and they each travel further (1980 kilometres) than any of the other countries. On the other
hand, less than 25 billion tons of freight is carried.

The two countries which are most similar are the Malaysia and UAE. Both have between 5 and
6% of people who use trains, they travel between 770 and 780 kilometres and the amount of
freight is approximately the same (22.2 and 21.9 billion tons respectively).

In general it can be seen that while citizens of the Canada use rail transport the least, they
transport the most amount of cargo by rail.

Writing Book Page- 123

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 34:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The table below gives information about rail transport in three countries in 2007.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Activity% Teens 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s 70+

Get News 76 73 76 75 71 74 70

Online
games 81 54 37 29 25 25 32

Downloads 52 46 27 15 13 8 6
Product
research 0 79 80 83 79 74 70
Buying a
product 43 68 69 68 67 65 41

Searching
for people 5 31 23 23 24 29 27

Writing Book Page- 124

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows the activities that people of different age groups are involved over the internet.
Comparing activities, we can see that getting news is the most popular activity with users of all
ages. At least 70% of people use the internet to get news.

Whilst 80% of teenagers play online games, this table drops to 54% of people in their twenties
and 37% of people in their thirties. Online gaming reaches a low of 25% with people in their
fifties and then increases in popularity with older people.

Downloads activity display a similar trend to internet games, but they are less popular in general
and decline markedly with people over age 40. Only 6% of people over age 70 download.

Online Product research is made by over seventy percent of all people except for teenagers
who do not research product. Product research peak in the forties age group, when almost
three-quarters of people research for product in this way.

Buying a product online is equally popular with all internet users except those at either end of
the age scale: teens and internet users age 70 or older. Searching for people online is done by
between one-quarter and one-third of people depending on age, except for teenagers who make
only five searches out of every 100.

Writing Book Page- 125

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 35:

The table below gives information about a restaurant’s average sales in three different
branches in 2016.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Average Georgia Street Murph Streey Drake Street

Number of 854 750 390

transactions
Transaction value $10.69 $5.61 $9.02

Number of Eat-in 405 358 200

Transactions
Number of Take- 449 392 190
away Transactions
Most popular item Chicken Burger Chicken Wings Chicken Pasta

Writing Book Page- 126

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table illustrates the performance of three different branches of a chain of restaurants in
three different locations in Vancouver for the year 2016.

It is evident that the best performer was the branch in Georgia Street, which with 854
transactions a day on average has at least 100 more transactions than Murph Street and more
than double from Drake Street. Georgia Street was also ahead in terms of transaction value,
with $10.69 per transaction compared to Murph Street’s $5.61 and Drake Street’s $9.02.

On average, eat-in and take-away transactions were almost equal in each restaurant, with take-
away transactions ending slightly ahead in two of them. Drake Street was the only exception,
with eat-in transactions surpassing take-away by 10.

The table also gives us information about the most popular item in each branch, revealing that
the eating habit of customers in each area were rather widely varied: Georgia Street’s best
seller was Chicken Burger, while Murph Street’s customers favour Chicken Wings, and Drake
Street’s customers preferred Chicken Pasta.

Overall, it is clear that the Georgia Street’s branch was the company’s most profitable branch,
with the highest number of transactions and transaction value while Drake Street, on the other
hand, lagged far behind, despite the fact that its transaction value is higher than Murph Street.

Writing Book Page- 127

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 36:

The graph below shows the pollution levels in London between 1600 and 2000.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 128

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph shows pollution levels in London between 1600 and 2000. It measures smoke and
sulphur dioxide in micrograms per cubic metre.

According to the information, the levels of both pollutants formed a similar pattern during this
period, but there were always higher levels of sulphur dioxide than smoke in the atmosphere.

In 1600, pollution levels were low, but over the next hundred years, the levels of sulphur dioxide
rose to 700 micrograms per cubic metre, while the levels of smoke rose gradually to about 200
micrograms per cubic metre. Over the next two hundred years, the levels of sulphur dioxide
continued to increase, although there was some fluctuation in this trend. They reached a peak
in 1850. Smoke levels increased a little more sharply during this time and peaked in 1900 at
about 500 micrograms. During the 20th century, the levels of both pollutants fell dramatically,
though there was a great deal of fluctuation within this fall.

Clearly air pollution was a bigger problem in London in the early 20th century than it is now.

Writing Book Page- 129

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 37:

The graph below shows population figures for India and China since the year 2000 and
predicted population growth up until 2050.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 130

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph shows how the populations of India and China have changed since 2000 and how
they will change in the future.

In 2000, there were more people living in China than in India. The number of Chinese was 1.25
bill ion, while India's population was about 1 billion. Between 2000 and the present, there has
been a 0.2 billion rise in the number of Indian citizens. Over the same period, China's population
has increased by 0.1 billion to reach over 1.35 billion.

According to the graph, the population in India will increase more quickly than in China, and
experts say that by 2030, both countries will have the same population of 1.45 billion. After this,
China's population is likely to fall slightly to 1.4 billion in 2050, while India's population will
probably increase and reach 1.6 billion.

Thus, over the 50-year period, India is going to experience steady growth in its population and
it will overtake China while China's population will peak in 2030 and then begin to fall.

Writing Book Page- 131

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 38:

The pie charts show the average household expenditure in Japan and Malaysia in 2010.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 132

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie charts show the proportion of money spent on various household expenses in Malaysia
and Japan in 2010.

It is seen from the graphs that in Malaysia, the greatest proportion of expenditure (34%) was on
housing, while in Japan housing accounted for just 21% of the total. In contrast, in Japan the
greatest single expense was other goods and services at 29%, compared with 26% in Malaysia.
Food came in second place in Japan, at 24%, while in Malaysia the actual proportion
was slightly higher (27%). In Japan, another major expense was transport, at 20%, but this was
much lower In Malaysia (10%). In both countries the smallest percentage of expenditure was
on health care. Spending on other goods and services almost accounted for a similar
percentage for the countries, at 29% for Japan and 26% for Malaysia.

Overall, the data indicates that in both cases food, housing and other goods and services were
the main expenses, but that in Japan, transport and other goods and services took up a higher
proportion of total expenditure than in Malaysia.

Writing Book Page- 133

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 39:

The graph below shows the book numbers read by mean and women at Burnaby Public
Library from 2011 to 2014.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant

Writing Book Page- 134

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The graph gives information about Burnaby Public Library between 2011 and 2014. It shows
how many library books people read over this four-year period.

As can be seen from the graph, there were different trends for men and women. The number of
books read by men increased steadily between 2011 and 2012, from about 3000 to 4000. After
that, the number rose dramatically to 14000 books in 2014. This was the highest figure in the
period.

Women started off reading more books than men, but their numbers followed a different pattern.
Between 2011 and 2012, there was an increase of 3000 from 5000 books to 8000 books, and
then a gradual rise to 10000 books in 2013. However, in 2014, their numbers fell back to 8000
again.

Overall, there was a strong upward trend in the number of books read by men and while women
read more books than men in 2011, their reading fell to below the level of men in 2014.

Writing Book Page- 135

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 40:

The chart below shows the number of travelers using three major airports in Washington
DC between 1995 and 2000.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 136

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart gives information about how many people visited New York City through three
major airports, over a six-year period between 1995 and 2000.

Overall, it can be seen that over the period, there was a fluctuant trend in the number of
passengers who travelled via Ronald Reagan National Airport, while the other two airports saw
an upward trend. Another interesting point is that Washington Dulles airport was the most
popular at the end.

Looking at the detail, the number of travelers at Ronald Reagan National Airport started at 26m
in 1995, and then increased remarkably to reach the highest point of 47m in 1997. In 1999, the
figure dipped to 32m. At the last year, there was a slight growth to 44m. On the other hand,
Washington Dulles began at 35m in 1995, after that it rose remarkably for the next three years,
at 46m. In 2000, Washington Dulles hit the peak point at 68m travelers.

However, a look at Baltimore International airport expresses that it started at the lowest point of
16m passengers in the first year. After this point, the trend increased significantly to 42m in
1998. In the last two years it remained stable at 42m travelers.

Overall, Washington Dulles dealt with the most number of travelers in the later years.

Writing Book Page- 137

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 41:

The two pie charts below show some employment patterns in Great Britain in 1992.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 138

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The charts provide information on the proportion of males and females in employment in 6 broad
categories, divided into manual and non-manual occupations.

In the non-manual occupations, while a greater percentage of working women than men are
found in clerical-type positions, there is a smaller percentage of women than men employed in
managerial and professional positions. The percentage of women employed in other non-
manual occupations is slightly larger than the percentage of men in these occupations.

In manual employment, the biggest difference between the two sexes is in the employment of
craft workers, where males make up 24% of the workforce and females just 3%. Furthermore,
the percentage of women working as general working as general labourers is very small, only
1%. There is not a great deal of difference between the percentage of men doing other forms
of manual work (26%) and women in other manual work (27%).

In summary, the two charts clearly show that women do not have the same access as men to
certain types of employment.

Writing Book Page- 139

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 42:

You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.

The diagram below shows the stages in the production of silk.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 140

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The diagram shows the different stages involved in the production of silk.

At the beginning of the process, a Bombyx mori moth lays around 350 to 450 eggs on a leaf.

About seven to twenty days later, tiny black silkworms hatch from these, and by eating very

large quantities of mulberry leaves, they eventually can grow to approximately three inches in

length. It is about 70 times their original size. Then, after a period of between 25 to 28 days, the

young silkworms can be ready to spin a cocoon around themselves, and this is all held together

by a substance called silk gum. Following this, the cocoons are boiled in some hot water until

the silk gum softens, which makes it easier to unwind individual silk filaments. After the filaments

have been unwound, they then can be spun into a single thread which is very fine and strong.

Finally, at the last stage of the production process, the thread can be woven into a silk fabric.

The diagram shows the seven key stages involved in the production of silk.

Writing Book Page- 141

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 43:

The graph below shows changes in the distribution of average household income
between 1965 and 2015.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 142

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph shows how a typical household distributed their earnings over a 50 year period,

starting from 1965 and ending in 2015.

In 1965, households saved 11% of their income, a figure which remained stable until 1990. This

figure then started to fall, reaching just 4% in 2015. In significant contrast to this, approximately

10% of household earnings was spent on accommodation until 1990, but this then climbed to

17% over the next 25 years. It was the highest single spending of income. Recreation, food and

transport all rose steadily from around 3% to approximately 6%. Expenditure on gas and

electricity etc. showed a similar general trend, but the increase in spending came much later,

starting only in about 2005. Finally, spending on home improvements was negligible until the

1990s, but had reached 3% at the end of the period.

To sum up, spending on accommodation increased significantly over the period while most

households saved less.

Writing Book Page- 143

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 44:

The table below shows the type of accommodation chosen by foreign students studying
English in the city of Hamilton and other related information.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Type of % of $ per Average distance Rating for Overall

Accommodation students week from city center English rating
in kms language
development
Homestay 31 175 15 ***** ****

Staying with 11 65 20 ** **
relatives

Shared student 34 195 5 *** *****

flat

Student hostel 15 160 4 ** *

One-room 8 250 5 * **
apartment

Own home 1 — 20 * ****

Writing Book Page- 144

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows information about six forms of accommodation used by English language

students in Hamilton city.

Over 30% chose homestays or flats, which were more expensive forms of accommodation at

$175 and $195 per week respectively. Flats had the advantage of being closer to the city centre

– 5 kms compared to 15 kms – although students thought that homestays were better for English

language development. Hostels cost slightly less than both of them and were located close to

the city centre, but were less good for English language development. Accommodating with

relatives was much cheaper at just $65 but was an option that was a long way from the centre.

A single room apartment was the most expensive accommodation at $250. It was not seen as

a good way for English language development and it was chosen by only 8% of students.

Overall, living with a homestay family or sharing a student flat were the most popular options,

although each sort of residence had advantages and disadvantages.

Writing Book Page- 145

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 45:

The diagrams below give information about internet use in different regions of the world.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

INTERNET USE BY WORLD REGIONS

Latin America,
North America,
10.40%
12.00%
Africa, 6.20%
Middle East, 3.40%
Oceania, 1.10%

Europe, 22.10%

Asia, 44.80%

Writing Book Page- 146

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The diagrams illustrate how the internet was used in various world regions in 2014. The pie

chart shows how internet usage was divided across populations, and the bar chart indicates the

reasons for which internet was accessed in those countries.

From the pie chart, it was clear that at 44.8%, the vast majority of internet users were located

in the Asian continent. It was also seen that European users represented about half this

percentage at 22.1%, followed by North Americans at 12%. Internet users in Oceania and the

Middle East only accounted for 1.1% and 3.4% respectively.

As regards the bar chart, the main reason for using the internet in 2014 was instant messaging.

It can also be understood that just over 50% of users watched online videos, while the same

number of users, at 40%, listened to music and also spent time in social networking sites.

In summary, it can be deduced that the greatest usage of the internet occurred in Asia, and that

instant messaging was also its primary function.

Writing Book Page- 147

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 46:

The table below gives information about passenger arrivals and departures at the six
main airports serving London for the year 2012.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Airport Number of Change % of total Distance from

passengers from 2011 passengers Central London
(millions)
Heathrow 70 + 0.9% 52% 22 km

Gatwick 34.2 + 1.7% 25% 48 km

Stansted 17.4 - 3.2% 13% 64 km

Luton 9.6 + 1.1% 7% 57 km

London City 3.0 + 0.8% 2% 11 km

Southend 1.2 + 135 % 1% 64 km

TOTAL 135.0 +1.0%

Writing Book Page- 148

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table gives a view of the percentage of passenger arrivals and departures at some of the

main airports in London, for 2012.

From the table it can be seen that in 2012 London had six airports in total which varied greatly

in distance from Central London and levels of passenger activity. The most striking feature of

the data was that Heathrow was by far the most active of the six airports with over half of the

total passengers moving through it, while it was second closest airport to the centre. In terms of

change since 2011, it was Southend that revealed biggest increase in activity though it was still

much the smallest airport with regard to passenger numbers and the furthest, along with

Stansted from the centre of the city.

To look in more detail at the figures, Gatwick was the second most active, with around a quarter

of all passengers, up slightly from 2011, and the second furthest away from London. Stansted

was next, with under a fifth of passengers, and slightly reduced numbers since the previous

year, while London City have just 7% of passengers, showing a gradual rise, but was easily the

most central of the six airports.

To infer, it can be deduced that Heathrow had the most number of passengers followed by

Gatwick and these two airports only improved a bit from 2011.

Writing Book Page- 149

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 47:

The visuals give information about the number of spacecraft launched by various
national governments between 1957 and 2007 and the purpose of each mission.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Canada, 28 Other, 214 Japan, 114

China, 111
Commercial, 539
India, 48
European Union,
285

Soviet Union/
USA, 1760 Russia, 3484

Number of spacecraft launched by national governments

The purposes for which spacecraft were launched

30%
27% 27%

25%

20%

15%
11%
10%
7%
6%
5% 4%

0%
Communications Surveillance Manned space Research Weather Planetary
satellites program observation exploration

Writing Book Page- 150

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie chart and table show which countries organised space missions and the reasons for

them in the period from 1957 to 2007.

Almost fifty percent of all space craft were launched from Russia, 3,484 missions in total, which

was absolutely the highest figure. In contrast, America was responsible for approximately half

of the missions (around 25% or 1760 missions). European nations launched just 4% of the total

while Japan, China, India and Canada each sent less than 2% of space ships into orbit.

However, non-governmental bodies such as corporations and students account for nearly 10%

of all space craft. Over this 50 year period, most space missions were either done for

communications or surveillance - both were 27% of the total. For research purpose, only 11%

missions were sent out. All of the other reasons were 8% or under: some were military space

craft and a relatively small number were for science and exploration.

Overall, it is clear that most space craft were either Russian or American and were for

communication or spying.

Writing Book Page- 151

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 48:

The table shows the source material on which Hollywood movies were based from 1995
to 2013.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Movies Total gross ($ billions) Average Market share

gross ($ (%)
millions)
Original 4972 77.5 15.6 47.2
screenplay

Based on 1087 49.2 116.2 29.9

books/plays

Remake 264 10.9 36.4 5.8

Based on TV 180 8.8 48.7 5.3

Based on fact 188 11.2 41.3 6.8

Based on 43 1.7 40.1 1.1

legend and
fairy tale

Based on 7 1.4 196.0 0.8

theme park
ride

Writing Book Page- 152

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table illustrates a comparison of Hollywood movie earnings and their reference materials,

from 1995 to 2013.

It is seen that almost three quarters of the total number of movies, around 4970 movies had

original screenplays and had the highest total gross ($ 77.5 billion) and market share, at 47.2%.

Movies based on books and plays accounted for only a thousand of the lot, with a total gross

that matched almost half of those with original ideas but grossed higher average figures than

them, alongside holding a high market share of about 30%. Theme park based movies were

the least in number (a meager 7). While these had the highest average gross figures, with $

196 million, their market share was even below 1%. Around 250 of the total number of movies

were remakes, with average gross figures of $ 36.4 million and total gross of nearly $ 11 billion.

In terms of market share, these movies were quite close to movies based on TV and on facts,

where remakes had 5.8% share and the other movies had collectively 12%.

To infer, original stories had the best numbers with higher market share, which was almost half

while movies based on legends, fairy tales and theme parks had the least market share.

Writing Book Page- 153

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 49:

The graph below shows noise pollution complaints and the reasons in a city.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Noise pollution complaints, 2013/14- 2016/17

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0
Barking Dog Animal/ poultry Music/ party Vehicle Noise Building site Public Address
System

2013/14 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17

Writing Book Page- 154

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The column graph displays the number of noise pollution complaints from 2013 to 2016,
distinguished in terms of reasons.

Barking dogs was shown as the most common reasons for noise pollution complaints in 2013,
with around 300 complaints resulting from this. This remained as the main reason for
complaints, over the next two years as well, the numbers declining to almost 260 in 2014 and
to approximately 180 in 2015. For the last mentioned period, the numbers improved again and
ended at 250 cases of complaints.

Music and party was stated as the second common reason, with case number improving
steadily over the mentioned years, alongside noises from business sites while vehicular noise
complaints were quite stable for the four cited years. Noise from public address systems was
the least probable reason for noise pollution claims, even though it exhibited an increasing trend
over the entire period.

To infer, it is clear that barking dogs and party noise are the most common reasons for
complaints.

Writing Book Page- 155

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 50:

The graph below shows crude oil production and price.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

World Crude Oil production and Oil Price

140
Brent oil price in $; production in million barrels

120

100

80
per day

Production
60
Price
40

20

0
Jan-05

Jan-10
Jan-98
Jan-99
Jan-00
Jan-01
Jan-02
Jan-03
Jan-04

Jan-06
Jan-07
Jan-08
Jan-09

Jan-11
Jan-12

Writing Book Page- 156

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph compares the production levels and prices of Brent oil, from 1998 to 2012.

In the first year mentioned in the graph, production was around the 70 million barrels per day
figure and the price, for that year, was almost $18. The production levels were stable for the
next two years, before improving slightly in July 2001. The price though, increased a lot over
the years, and in 2001, stood at almost double than that of January 1998. The price fluctuated
for the next couple of years, before it started to rise significantly from November 2003 to May
2007, and saw an increment of around $20, to the $60 mark. There was a drastic dip in July
2008, after which the price rose noticeably again for the last years, leading to January 2012,
when it ended at roughly $110. Production levels though, remained stable over these years,
always rested between $60 and $80, somewhat closer to the high $70.

Overall, it is clear that production levels were quite constant and the price of oil went up almost
six folds over the years mentioned.

Writing Book Page- 157

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 51:

The charts below show spending on digital advertisement in USA.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 158

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The three pie charts show comparative spending on digital advertisement methods in the USA
over three years, 2016, 2017 and a projected 2020.

In 2016, spending was shown to be highest for searches, at almost half (48%) of the total
spending, $33 billion out of the total $70 billion. Video totaled at almost $10 billion while social
and display methods covered 18% and 12% respectively, out of the total $70 billion.
In the next year, 2017, search methods still occupied almost half of the entire amount and
increased in terms of spending amount. Social methods witnessed the most significant
improvement, to 21% and video as a method improved by 2% as well, while display methods
dipped slightly, to 10%.

The projected improved spending of $120 billion in 2020 will be spent most on search methods,
at 43% and almost $52 billion. Video as a mode of advertisement will improve further, to 24%,
with the spending projected to be approximately $28 billion. Display will have reduced
importance, declining further to only 6% and social means for advertising is also predicted to
improve to 26%, at almost $32 billion.

To infer, it is clear that most of the mediums mentioned are estimated to improve their spending,
with display as digital advertisement source expected to play a reduced part.

Writing Book Page- 159

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 52:

The following graph shows carbon dioxide emissions per year, for four countries.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 160

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line chart maps carbon dioxide emissions per person, in tonnes, for four countries and for
a forty year period starting from 1967.

In 1967, the average person from United Kingdom emitted more carbon dioxide (almost 11
tonnes) than the average human from the other countries, with the average Portuguese emitting
the least (just below 2 tonnes). United Kingdom experienced a dip, albeit slight in nature over
the next 10 years while the average Swedish producing almost a similar amount. The other two
countries, Italy and Portugal, also showed improvements in emission figures, compared to 1967.
Sweden and United Kingdom saw falls for the subsequent years of 1987 and 1997, and Italy,
Portugal experienced contrasting trends for the same period. In 2007, the average United
Kingdom person released almost 8 tonnes of carbon dioxide, Sweden ended with slightly less
than 8 tonnes and Italy, Portugal finished at exactly similar figures, at around the 5.7 tonnes
mark.

To conclude, it is clear that United Kingdom and Sweden had almost alike figures while Italy
and Portugal had identical states.

Writing Book Page- 161

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 53:

The table below shows the percentage of children with different educational problems in
two primary schools.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

2009 2019

Problem Areas School A School B School A School B

Reading ability 22 8 23 9

Handwriting 28 7 28 7

Spelling 30 5 25 10

Listening skills 35 11 20 12

Verbal expression 35 14 21 15
of ideas

Concentration in 40 15 18 15
lessons
Following 42 6 18 12
instructions

Writing Book Page- 162

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows percentage of children with different problems regarding their education, in two
primary schools, in 2009 and a predicted 2019.

In 2019, listening skills and verbal expression of ideas proved to be common issues in School
A, alongside the issues of instruction and concentration in lessons. All these problems were
common to near about 40% of the children in that school. On the other side though, idea
expression and focusing during lessons were the more common issues for students in School
B, with about 15% in both cases. Lower percentages of School B children had issues with
reading ability, spelling and handwriting compared to School A.

In 2019, it is predicted that for School A, the percentages will drop, significantly in some cases,
and even though the idea expression and concentration issues will persist, they will be much
less in terms of percentages. For School B, the problems are predicted to be consistent, with
instruction following being the problem with the most movement.

To conclude, children of School A had more issues with primary school, compared to children
from School B.

Writing Book Page- 163

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 54:

The following graphs show money spent on restaurant meals and home cooking and the
number of meals per year.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 164

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie chart and the line graph reveal the percentage of food budget spent on restaurant
meals, home cooking and the number of meals per year. The data is calibrated in percentage.

From an overall perspective, a dramatic increase is observed in the number of meals families
eat at restaurants. The percentage of the family's food budget spent on restaurant meals
steadily climbed. Just 10 percent of the food budget was spent on restaurant meals in 1970,
and 15 percent in 1980. That percentage more than doubled in 1990, to 35 percent, and rose
again in 2000 to 50 percent.

Stating further, in 1970, families ate the same number of meals at fast food and sit-down
restaurants. In 1980, families ate slightly more frequently at sit-down restaurants. However,
since 1990, fast food restaurants serve more meals to the families than do the sit-down
restaurants. In 2000 the percentage of fast food meals reached the pinnacle at almost 90%
while the percentage for sitdown restaurant meals was approximately half.

Overall, fast food meals and sitdown restaurant meals eventually started at the same
percentage but within 30 years, fast food meals' percentage surpassed its counterpart's to reach
the pinnacle.

Writing Book Page- 165

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 55:

The graphs below show wind electricity generation percentages in different regions of
the world.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Percentage of electricity generated by wind power by various

countries and areas in 2011
USA, 6.80%
Rest of Europe, 7.60%
Rest of World,
18.10%

Spain, 12.20%

India, 19.80%
Germany, 9.30%

China, 26.20%

USA Rest of Europe Spain Germany China India Rest of World

Wind power generation around the world

2020

2011

2005

2000

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200

Gigawatts

Wind power generation around the world

Writing Book Page- 166

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie chart shows the percentage of wind electricity generated by different countries and
areas in 2011 and the bar graph plots the units of wind electricity generated around the world
over 20 years.

The pie chart depicts that China leads the wind electricity generation percentages with 26,
followed by India at 19.8%. Germany and USA produced 9% and almost 7% of wind electricity
in 2011 respectively. Rest of the world produced 18%, which is significantly higher than the rest
of Europe.

With regard to the bar graph, wind power generation around the world is seen to be the lowest
in the first year, 2000, with only around 20 gigawatts. This improves significantly in 2005, to stay
around the 140 gigawatts mark, increasing to almost 280 gigawatts in 2011. It is also predicted
to be approximately 1100 gigawatts in 2020.

Overall, China is at the front of the line in terms of wind electricity generation, and from the bar
graph, it is evident that the wind electricity generation numbers are predicted to increase in
2020.

Writing Book Page- 167

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 56:

The graphs show study hours and number of correct answers resulting from those study
hours.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Hours studied Fewer than 25 hours,

8%

101 to 125 hours,

19%
26 to 50 hours, 15%
126 hours or more,
11%

51 to 100 hours, 47%

Average number of correct responses students scored (out of 100

questions) in relation to the number of hours they studied
90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0
Fewer than 25 hours 26 to 50 hours 51 to 100 hours 101 to 125 hours 126 hours or more

Writing Book Page- 168

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The pie chart and bar chart relate to the scores students achieved in a test for admission to a
university in Asia compared to how many hours they had studied.

Nineteen per cent of students worked for between 101 and 125 hours. They performed best
with an average test score of about 81 correct answers out of 100. Only 11 % worked harder
than this, doing 126 hours of work or more. However, they actually got a lower score of about
79 right answers.

The largest number of students. 4 7% completed between 51 and 100 hours of preparation for
the test. They got about 72 of the answers right. Those who worked for 26 to 50 hours (15% of
students) received 59 of answers correct. People who worked fewer than 25 hours could answer
only 30 questions correctly.

Overall it is clear that students who did more preparation for the exam got a higher score.

Writing Book Page- 169

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 57:

The table below gives information about the languages that high school students speak
at home in one school district in the USA.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Number of students 2014 Number of students 2017

Spanish 15110 28816
Korean 3029 2735
Vietnamese 2557 1467
Chinese 1875 4670
Arabic 430 1302
Russian 414 1656
Hindi 375 430
Tagalog 138 512
Polish 110 82
Nepalese 95 439

Writing Book Page- 170

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows languages spoken at home by high school students in one USA school district.

From the table we can see that in this US school district Spanish is considerably the most
spoken language apart from English in the home, in the both years, 2014 and 2017, with
numbers doubling. The other notable changes are for Chinese and Arabic, with Chinese
numbers tripling and Arabic numbers quadruple. The least common of the given languages is
Nepalese in 2014, but Polish in 2017.

To describe the data in a few more detail, ten languages are shown and numbers vary in 2014
from 95 students (Nepalese) speaking a non-English Ianguage at home to over 15,000
(Spanish). The numbers range from in hundreds to low thousands, but none reach to more than
a fifth of the Spanish total. In 2017 however, Spanish speakers have reached almost 29,000
while Chinese numbers are now a seventh of that (4,670), and the lowest figure is 82, a slight
drop in Polish speakers. However, Nepalese numbers have increased considerably to 439.
Again no other languages come near to Spanish although with the difference being
approximately 23,000.

Overall, Spanish proves to be the most popular language with Polish being the least common.

Writing Book Page- 171

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 58:

The maps show Tilden Airport and surrounding area in 1985 and 2005.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Writing Book Page- 172

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The two maps show developments at and around Tilden Airport in the thirty year period from
1985.

The most important change has been building the new runway at the airport. Additionally, the
international terminal has become three times bigger during this time, while the domestic
terminal has not expanded at all. The car park is only slightly larger because public transport
seems to have become more popular between 1985 and 2005, with the addition of a bus and
light rail station at the airport.

Moreover, the area around the airport itself has also seen significant developments. On the land
that was Johnson's farm in 1985 later stands as a business and innovation park and a housing
estate has been built in the north-east corner. In the same way, on the south side of the road,
the factories have been replaced by a large building for airport support services as well as a
hotel and conference centre.

In summary, there has been significant development at Tilden airport.

Writing Book Page- 173

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 59:

The table below gives information on internet use in six categories by age group.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Activities Teens 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s 70+

Use e-mail 90 91 93 94 95 90 91

Online games 80 55 36 25 20 27 29

Download music 52 46 27 15 13 8 6
and videos

Travel 0 51 74 65 60 58 61
reservations

Online purchase 39 67 69 67 65 64 40

Searching for 3 30 33 26 25 27 31
people

Writing Book Page- 174

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows the internet activities people of different ages were involved in.

Comparing activities, we can see that e-mail is the most popular activity with users of all ages.
At least 90% of people use the internet for e-mails.

Whilst 80% of teenagers play online games, this figure drops to 55% of people in their twenties
and 36% of people in their thirties. Online gaming reaches a low of 20% with people in their
fifties and then increases in popularity with older people. Music and video downloads display a
similar trend to internet games, but they are less popular in general and decline markedly with
people over age 40. Only 6% of people over age 70 download music and videos.

Online travel reservations are made by over half of all people except for teenagers who do not
book any travel over the internet. Travel reservations peak in the thirties age group, when almost
three-quarters of people make reservations in this way.

Online purchases are made by approximately two-thirds of people, except for those at both
ends of the age scale, where internet shopping is less popular. Searching for people online is
done by between one-quarter and one-third of people depending on age, except for teenagers
who make only three searches out of every 100.

Writing Book Page- 175

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 60:

The graph below gives information about monthly electricity, water and gas use at a
leisure Centre in Manchester.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

0
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

Water Electricity Gas

Writing Book Page- 176

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The provided bar graph depicts the usage of three natural resources in a leisure Centre
throughout a year.

Electricity and water both had their fair share of usage all around the year. Although electricity
usage showed the most unstable numbers among the others. In January and February
electricity was used more than any other resources. Both months had used over 5 thousand
units of electricity. From there usage started to went downhill and fell to its lowest on July to
approximately 2.5 thousand unit. However, By December usage of electricity again rose to
almost 4.8 thousand unit.

Water had a pretty stable usage in all the months. It started from 4.1 and rose its peak in August
to roughly 5.2 thousand units. Nonetheless Gas had the lowest usage of all the three resources.
It only surpassed Electricity usage in July and August with around 2.7-thousand-unit usage.

Overall, It Is pretty clear from the first glimpse that Water and Electricity seems to be the most
used resources where water seemed to have a stable and most usage of all throughout the
year.

Writing Book Page- 177

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 61:

The chart below shows the number of passengers arriving at a train station per hour
across a day, and also the average price (in US Dollars) of their tickets.

Write a report summarizing the information. Select and describe the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Time 6 am 8 am 10 am 12pm 2 pm 4 pm 6 pm 8 pm 10
pm
Number of 480 690 340 700 290 230 670 450 300
passengers

Average 23 29 19 31 21 17 11 22 18
price per
ticket ($)

Writing Book Page- 178

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table gives data about passenger volumes reaching a station every 2 hours in a day, and
also the average ticket cost at those times.

Passenger numbers peak 3 times during the day. For example, the number at 6am is 480, rising
to 690 by 8am before falling again. There is then a peak of 700 at midday, followed by an
afternoon decline to a low of 230 at 4pm. A third spike is at 6pm, reaching 670 before tailing off.

The ticket prices partially follow this pattern. The 8am passenger surge is matched by a high
price of $29, followed by a peak of $31 at midday and a decrease to $17 by 4pm. However, the
6pm spike in passenger numbers is accompanied by a low of $11 in prices, with a subsequent
rise to $22 at 8pm and a final levelling off.

In summary, ticket prices increase broadly in line with passenger traffic, except during the
evening hours when they actually fall.

Writing Book Page- 179

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 62:

The table shows data about the average length of time (in minutes) that people of
different ages spend in a consultation with family doctors in a number of countries.

Write a report summarising the information. Select and describe the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Age France Brazil Japan USA India Kenya UK Italy Chile

(years)

0-10 16 12 14 13 12 15 9 17 32

10-20 18 21 12 17 14 14 12 18 32

20-40 25 23 16 19 20 12 13 23 34

40-60 29 26 15 21 21 12 15 24 36

60-70 34 23 13 27 19 11 15 27 38

70+ 38 20 14 31 11 10 21 29 39

Writing Book Page- 180

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table gives information about the typical time that patients spend with doctors in various
countries, split by age group.

It can be seen that the most common trend is for the time to increase consistently with age. For
example, the figure in France more than doubles from 16 to 38 minutes between the youngest
and oldest people. Likewise, the USA figure rises from 13 to 31, the UK from 9 to 21, and Italy
from 17 to 29. These are all substantial increases. Chile has a consistent but much slighter
climb, from 32 to 39 minutes.

Brazil also shows a rise, although after age 60 there is a decline from 26 minutes to an eventual
20. India has a more marked rise and fall, peaking at 21 minutes for people aged 40 to 60,
declining to 11 minutes for 70 plus.

Two countries are exceptions. Japan fluctuates across the age groups, between 12 and 16
minutes. Kenya declines steadily as age increases, from 15 minutes for the youngest to 10
minutes for the oldest people.

Overall, time spent with doctors generally increases with age, except in Japan and Kenya.

Writing Book Page- 181

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 63:

The graph below shows the percentage of university students who did educational
activities by hour of day on weekdays in 2014.

Write a report summarising the information. Select and describe the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

% university students doing educational activities by time of day (weekdays)

35%

30%

25%

20%

15%

10%

5%

0%
12:00 AM 4:00 AM 8:00 AM 12:00 PM 4:00 PM 8:00 PM 11:00 PM

Full-time students Part-time students

Writing Book Page- 182

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph shows the proportion of students on further education programmes that were
occupied with their studies at different times of the day over a 24-hour period.

It is seen that the full-time students spent far more of their time studying than part-time students.
At midnight, 5% of the full-time students were involved with activities compared to a meager 2%
of part-time students. By mid-morning, for example, when the greatest percentage of both
groups are engaged in study activities, almost 35% of full-time students were learning,
compared to just under 20% of part- time students.

However, the gap between the two groups narrowed in the evenings. By around 6pm, the
number of full-time students who were studying had fallen to around 20%, while that of part-
time students remained relatively constant at between 13 and 16% until 9pm, despite a notable
drop shortly before 4pm. Interestingly, at no time during the day were more than 34% of
students, full-time or otherwise, engaged in learning.

Overall, it is clear that during the day time, percentages were significantly higher than at night.

Writing Book Page- 183

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 64:

The table shows the top ten languages used for online content and the top ten native
languages of internet users.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features and making
comparisons where relevant.

Language of Internet content Language of Internet users

English- 53.6% English- 25.9%

Russian- 6.4% Chinese- 20.9%

German- 5.7% Spanish- 7.6%

Japanese- 5% Arabic- 5%
Spanish- 4.9% Portuguese- 3.9%

French- 4.1% Japanese- 3.4%

Portuguese- 2.6% Russian- 3.1%
Italian- 2.1% Malay- 2.9%

Chinese- 1.9% French- 2.9%

Polish- 1.9% German- 2.5%

Writing Book Page- 184

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows the percentage of text on the internet that appears in different languages and
the most common languages of internet users.

In general, it can be said that English dominates web content, accounting for over 53%, but that
the languages of the users are understandably much more varied. In terms of the content, the
internet is very much dominated by languages of European origin, whereas internet users
include a much wider range. Another interesting point is that nearly 80% of the content of the
internet is written in a European language. It is also notable that while just 1.9% of the internet
is in Chinese, over 20% of users speak Chinese. Furthermore, nearly 8% of users speak Arabic
and Malay, yet these languages are not in the ten most common for content.

To conclude, there is clearly a mismatch between the language used on the internet and the
native language of its users.

Writing Book Page- 185

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 65:

The table below gives details of world electricity production by renewable sources in the
four years between 2009 to 2012.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features and making
comparisons where relevant.

World electricity by renewable sources in Trillion-Watt Hours (TWh)

Source 2009 2010 2011 2012

Geothermal 67.4 68.5 69.3 70.4

Wind 276.4 351.2 451.5 534

Solar 21 33.5 53.1 104.5

Hydraulic 3329 3514.3 3530.8 3663.4

Biomass 246.8 288.9 307.6 326.2

Writing Book Page- 186

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The table shows the number of Trillion-Watt Hours (TWh) produced by five different renewable
energy sources in the four years from 2009 to 2012.

The highest number of world electricity production was provided by Hydraulic energy source
that was in average almost 3500 TWh over the given period. In contrast, Solar energy generally
provided the smallest number of TWh. However, the amount of world electricity supplied by
Geothermal energy in 2012 was below the number of electricity production from Solar energy.

In 2009, the number of wind and bio-mass energy produced was a nearly similar, and these
figures accounted for 276.4 and 246.8 TWh, respectively. Nevertheless, Wind energy
production showed gradually increase, and it reached nearly double the amount in 2012.
Moreover, the electricity production from Bio-mass sources had also consistently increase.

Overall, the production from five renewable energy sources has increased over the time period,
but Hydraulic energy produced the more TWh than all the other renewable energy sources.

Writing Book Page- 187

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 66:

The graphs below show state of magazines in Southern Europe and magazine
types between 1995 and 2015.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features and making
comparisons where relevant.

Opening and Closure of Magazines in Southern Europe

450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
1995 2000 2005 2010 2015

Opening Closure

Types of Magazines that opened 1995-2015

5%
9%

35%

Entertainment and TV
Music
Hobbies

21% Business, Finance, Politics

Other

30%

Writing Book Page- 188

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answers:

The column graph and the pie chart depict the number as well as themes of magazines that
launched and ceased publication in the 20 years from 1995 to 2015 in Southern Europe.

Based on the graph, there was a steady growth in the number of new magazines from 1995
until 2005 with about 250 magazines opening in 1995, followed by 400 in 2000 and a little under
400 in 2005. Very few magazine closure place during that period, with the lowest number
noticed in 2005, at well below 50. However, the trend reversed somewhere between 2005 and
2010, as more than 350 magazines closed in 2010 and 2015 whereas the number of new
publications declined to about 185 in 2015.

According to the pie chart, the vast majority of magazines -more than one third- that was started
between 1995 and 2015 fell under the category of Entertainment and TV, with music-related
magazines a close second at 30%. A little over one-fifth of new magazines focused on various
hobbies, while less than one-tenth was about business, finance, and politics.

Overall, entertainment and TV and music magazines comprised two-thirds of the total amount
of the types of magazines, and closure of the magazine started to increase whereas the opening
of magazines dwindled over the years.

Writing Book Page- 189

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 67:

The charts below show the most popular films by genre for men and women and general
ticket sales for different types of film in the USA in 2010.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Most people film genres

45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
Action Comedy Thriller Science Fiction Western Romantic Comedy

men women

Other
5%
10% Box-office takings 2010: USA

Romantic
Comedy
12% Action
49%

Comedy
24%

Writing Book Page- 190

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The given charts delineate data regarding popular film genres among men and women and also
represent the proportion of ticket sales for various film types in the USA in 2010.

In the case of the column graph, 25% of women chose action movies whereas 40% of men
preferred this genre of movies. Romantic comedies were most popular among women with
about 30% preferences while it was chosen by very few percentages of men. Comedy movies
stood in the second position among men and 20% of men and women preferred this. Thriller
and Science fiction movies were comparatively more popular among male film viewers, at 15%
and 10% respectively.

From the pie chart, Action movie genres got the 49% ticket sales among all movie categories
while 24% were taken by the comedy movie types. Romantic comedy and thriller movies’ box
office taking percentages were 12 and 10 percentages respectively while all other movie genres
contributed to the remaining 5% ticket sales in 2010.

All in all, action movies had far more popularity both among men and women and the ratio of
ticket sales for this type of movie was also far higher than any other film category.

Writing Book Page- 191

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 68:

The graph below shows the number of visitors to three museums between 2000 and
2005.
Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Museum Visitor Numbers, 2000 - 2005

18

16

14
annual visitors (millions)

12

10 MET, New York

Edo, Tokyo
8
National, China
6

0
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005

Writing Book Page- 192

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart depicts the annual visits to three Museums, the MET in New York, the Edo
Museum in Tokyo, and the National Museum in China, from 2000 to 2005.

Overall, the Edo Museum had the highest number of visitors throughout the first half of the given
period; however, its figure declined in the latter half of the year, whereas the visits to the National
Museum and the MET were significantly higher during this time.

According to the graph, the visits to Edo numbered just below 14 million during in both 2000
and 2001. The lowest number of visits (around 6 million) were recorded at 2003, and the figure
gradually increased at a steady pace back to 10 million over the next two years.

On the other hand, the National Museum had the lowest number of visits at around 6 million in
2000. This figure experienced a steady rise over the years as it reached to approximately 16
million visits in 2005, marking it as the popular venue in comparison to the other museums.

In contrast, the MET had the second highest figure (12 million) in 2000. Despite a decline over
the next 3 years, it had more visits than the other two museums in 2004, and finally, the number
stood at 14 million at the end of the period.

Writing Book Page- 193

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 69:

The graph shows response regarding top honeymoon places.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Top Honeymoon Destinations

Spain 140

Paris 209

Thailand 1410

The Lake District 124

The Maldives 600

The Greek Islands 432

Bali 1335

Costa Rica 750

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

Writing Book Page- 194

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart illustrates the public opinion regarding the most popular honeymoon destinations.

At a glance, it can be seen that Thailand and Bali are the most frequented upon locations wheras
The Lake District and Spain seem to be the least popular places for honeymoons.

According to the graph, Thailand and Bali stands with the highest numbers with 1410 and 1335
responses respectively. Moreover, a considerable number of people have voted for Costa Rica,
The Maldives, and The Greek Islands, and their figures range between 432 to 750. On the other
hand, Paris received only 209 votes, whose figure was slightly higher than that of Spain, which
seems to be one of the least frequented destinations with only 140 responses. Lastly, The Lake
District, which only had 124 respondents in its favor, is seen as the least common destination
for honeymoons.

To sum up, Asian countries such as Thailand, Bali and The Maldives are among the most
popular destinations for newly weds.

Writing Book Page- 195

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 70:

The graph shows waste disposal techniques in four towns of a country.

Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Waste disposal in four towns

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

0%
A B C D
Landfill Incineration Recycling Composting

Writing Book Page- 196

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar chart depicts four types of waste disposal in four towns.

Landfill was the most popular method of waste disposal in towns A and D. Town A used landfill
for disposing of about three-quarters of its waste with the remaining quarter split between
incineration, recycling and composting. Town D used landfill for disposing of almost half of its
waste with most of the rest being incinerated.

Incineration was the most popular method of waste disposal in towns B and C. Town C disposed
of more than half its waste by incineration with less than a quarter going for recycling and even
less still going for landfill and composting.

Recycling was the second least popular method of waste disposal. No town disposed of more
than 25% of its waste by recycling and in the case of town A, it was less than 10%.

Composting was the least common method of waste disposal. No town disposed of more than
10% of its waste by compositing and town D hardly did any composting.

Writing Book Page- 197

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 71:

The line graph below shows the number of migrants living in an English-speaking country by
language background.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 198

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph shows the number of foreign residents in an English-speaking country during the
century from 1910 to 2010.

Turning to the period of growth first, the proportion of the population that was foreign-born rose
threefold from the middle of the 20th century, from close to 5% to just above 15%. All of this
increase was accounted for by people from countries who don't speak English as their first
language. While the level of migration from English-speaking countries remained constant from
1950 at around 8%, that of immigration from non-English speaking nations rose from only 1%
to around 16%.

The earlier decline in migration numbers that ended in around 1948 was evident in all categories
of migrants shown, but was particularly notable among English speaking migrants, whose
numbers halved from 14% to 7%. The migrants from English speaking countries remained
mostly consistent from just before 1950 to 2010, at around the 9% mark.

Overall, there was a decline in migrant numbers up to the middle of the last century, followed
by a significantly greater rise in the latter period.

Writing Book Page- 199

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 72:

The chart shows both the number of girls and boys who received information about new music
and video games from friends, and the number who gave the information to friends.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 200

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph shows the number of young people of both genders who, on the one hand, got
information about either a new game or a new piece of music from friends and, on the other,
the number who shared information about new music or games.

We can see that information about new music is more likely to be passed on by girls than by
boys. From the statistics, it is clear that 114 girls claimed to speak about music to friends
compared to only 86 boys. However, the data shows the opposite trend for computer games,
about which 112 boys shared information compared to just 88 girls.

For music, the girls (112) lead the boys (88) in terms of hearing about new music, while the
numbers are the opposite in terms of games, where the boys lead the girls by a figure of 24.

In summary, interestingly then, it seems that boys and girls are equally as likely to share or get
information through word of mouth, even if the type of information they pass on varies.

Writing Book Page- 201

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 73:

The line graph shows the growth in the population of UK from 1971 to 2006 and projections until
2031. The pie chart shows the population of different nationalities in the UK in the year 2006.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 202

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph indicates trends in actual overall population from 1971 to 2006, as well as
projections going up to the year 2031. The pie chart presents the division of population among
various constituents as in the year 2006.

It is seen from the line graph that the overall population of the UK, after stagnating at around 56
million between the years 1971 and 1981, grew to 60.2 million in 2006, and is projected to grow
to over 66 million by 2031, a growth of 10 million over the 60 year period.

The pie chart divides the overall population of UK in the year 2006 into four distinct nationalities.
Of these, the most predominant nation state by far is England, with a population of 50.4 million
out of a total of 60.2 million, or 83.8%. The other three nationalities – Scotland, Wales and
Northern Ireland - combined are a mere 16.2% of the total. The smallest among these is
Northern Ireland with a population of 1.7 million or 2.8% only.

Overall, it is seen that population is expected to rise dramatically from the first year to last
projected year of 2031.

Writing Book Page- 203

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 74:

The graph below plots rail industry revenues and subsidies from 1989-90 to 2009-10.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and make comparisons
where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 204

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph and line graph in combination presents a 20-year survey of rail industry's
revenues and subsidies from the year 1989-90 to 2009-10. There are distinct bars representing
net government support and total revenues by year, in billion pounds at constant 2009-10
prices. The line graph plots wide fluctuation in government support as percentage of total
revenue measured along the right vertical.

It can be seen that total revenues register a very slow but gradual increase over the 20 year
period. That means the rail industry has registered constant increase in revenue generated,
growing from around 4.5 billion pounds in 1989-90 to around 8 billion pound, 20 years later.

Although there are fluctuations in net government support throughout the 20 year period, the
support has generally been on the up. It increased from around 1.5 billion pounds in 1989-90
to over 6 billion pounds in 2006-07 before declining to 4.5 billion in 2009-10.

The government support as percentage of total revenue has also fluctuated from around 25%
in 1989-90 to almost 50% in 2006-07 before declining to 35% in 2009-10, though there was a
steep dip in 1995-96 to just about 10%.

Overall, net government support and total revenue had slight improvements over the years
whereas the government support as total percentage moved erratically.

Writing Book Page- 205

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 75:

The bar graph shows the average hours of daily sunshine throughout the year in two cities of
Australia.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 206

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph compares the average sunshine hours per day through the year, in two Australian
cities, Sydney and Perth. The hours of sunshine are measured along the vertical axis and the
months of the year are measured along the horizontal axis.

On an average, Perth seems to receive many more hours of sunshine than Sydney, going to as
many as 11 hours a day during December and January. Surprisingly, however, Perth also
receives the lowest hours of sunshine, just 5 hours per day, during the months of June, July
and August. That means Perth has both the highest and the lowest sunshine hour months. That
also means there is much more variation in sunshine hours in Perth than in Sydney. While the
sunshine hours in Sydney stay within 6-8 hours, those in Perth vary between 5-11 hours.

The months of April and May have identical number of sunshine hours, 7 hours and 6 hours
respectively, for both the cities. On the other hand, Sydney has the same average 8 hours of
sunshine for all months during the period October to January.

Overall, it can be inferred from the graphs that Sydney has more moderate climate than Perth.

Writing Book Page- 207

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 76:

The graph shows information from a 2010 report about the percentage of population over the
age of 65 in four countries, India, China, Japan and the US since 1980 with projections until
2050.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 208

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The line graph represents the proportion of senior citizens above the age of 65 years in four
countries, India, China, Japan and the United States, based on actual figures from the years
1980 to 2020, and projected figures up to the year 2050.

In 1980, the percentage of citizens above 65 years of age was just about 5% in India and China,
around 8% in the United States and about 12% In Japan. However, it has since been climbing
in all the countries at varying rates. Whereas the rate of growth was rather flat in India, China
and Japan up to the year 2010, the United States experienced exponential growth throughout
the period and this steep growth is projected to continue till 2050.

China picked up momentum post 2010 and is projected to overtake Japan by 2040. The
percentage of senior citizens picked up in India too from 2020. It is projected to grow significantly
in times to come, though India will still have a much younger population than other countries.

Going up to the year 2050, the United States will have over 35% of its population above 65
years of age whereas India will have just about 12%, with other countries falling in between.

Overall, it can be seen that the United States will have the highest proportion of people over 65
years of age, whereas India is expected to have the lowest percentage in 2050.

Writing Book Page- 209

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 77:

The graph below contrasts the global automobile sales from 2007 to 2008.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 210

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph seems to depict the impact of global meltdown 2007-08 on automobile sales.

The graph projects percentage change in sales by the quarter, from 4th quarter 2007 to 3rd
quarter 2008, in respect of four major markets, the United States, Western Europe, Japan and
China. The overall picture is of reduced sales in all the markets except China, where the picture
is quite the opposite.

In the United States, the sales began to fall from 4th quarter 2007. The 2% drop in this quarter,
accelerated to 8% in 1st quarter 2008, 12% in 2nd and a whopping 18% in 3rd. In Western
Europe, the drop started a bit late, during 1st quarter 2008, and accelerated from 3 to 10% by
the 4th quarter. In Japan, the drop was relatively less severe but consistent.

China, however, presented a contrasting picture. Automobile sales in China climbed a whopping
19% during 4th quarter 2007 and 1st quarter 2008 before falling to 9% increase in 2nd quarter
2008 and 3% net decrease in 3rd quarter 2008.

We can infer from this that other countries' loss was possibly China's gain or that the trickledown
effect of global meltdown on China was meagre and somewhat delayed.

Writing Book Page- 211

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 78:

The following pie charts show the major reasons (indicated by the arrows) for death of people
in different age groups in Germany.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 212

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The given pie charts illustrate major reasons behind the death of people among two age groups,
those aged between 45 and 64 years and those aged 65 years and above, in Germany. Six
causes of death are listed.

Unintentional injuries account for the death of a whopping 38 percent people in the younger age
group. Homicide, suicide, cancer and heart disease, together account for 37% of their mortality,
while all other causes lead to the death of 25 percent people. These other causes account for
the death of 32% people in the senior age group.

Only 4 percent of the younger age group die from heart disease, while nearly six times that
number die in the senior age group. But the proportion of younger people getting murdered is
twice that of the older ones. Suicide rates at 11-12 percent are about the same for both age
groups. The chances of people dying from cancer go up with age, from 8 to 14 percent.
Looking at the overall picture, the number of deaths among people aged 65 and over is almost
thrice of those aged between 45 and 64 years. It is natural to expect higher mortality rate in the
senior age group.

Writing Book Page- 213

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 79:

The following bar graph shows birth rates of twins according to race and Hispanic origin of
mother in the United States, in four different years.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.

Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 214

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The given bar graph plots the birth rate of twins per1000 births among various racial groups in
the Unites States, across four different years, each spaced about a decade apart.

The most visible feature has been the consistent upward trend in the birth rate of twins across
the decades. For all races, the rate increased from 18.9 in the year 1980, to 22.6 in 1990, 29.3
in 2000 and 33.2 in 2009. Similar increasing trend is observed among Hispanics and non-
Hispanics, though the growth is much slower among Hispanics.

Now since the rate of growth is much higher among non-Hispanics, the gap between the birth
rate of twins among these two racial groups is sharply increasing. For Hispanics and non-
Hispanic whites the gap was 2.1 per 1000 births in the year 1980, which increased to 14.5 by
the year 2009. The corresponding figures for Hispanics and non-Hispanic blacks were 7.4 and
15.5.
Overall it can be seen that the birth rate of twins among Hispanic mothers is significantly lower
than that among non-Hispanics, both white and black mothers, though among non-Hispanics
also, the birth rate has been generally higher among black mothers than among white.

Writing Book Page- 215

Academic Writing Module Task 1

Topic 80:

The given bar graph shows the market size (in million Yuans) of online gaming in China during
the 11 year period 2003 - 2013. The line graph shows the growth rate in market size during the
same period.

Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and make
comparisons where relevant.
Write at least 150 words.

Writing Book Page- 216

 Academic Writing Module Task 1

Sample Answer:

The bar graph and the line graph look at the growth of Online Game market in China, during
the 11 year period, 2003-2013, from two different standpoints, the absolute growth in million
Yuans and the relative growth in percentage terms.

The bar graph tells us that the absolute market size was very small to start with, but has grown
exponentially over the years. It was just 20 million Yuans in 2003, and grew incrementally in the
initial years, to 33.3 million in 2004, 48 million in 2005 and 76.8 million in 2006, before it gathered
momentum and blew up to 495 million in 2012 and 585 million in 2013, a whopping 2800%
increase in 11 years.

But the line graph virtually reverses the story. The rate of growth in the market size was 66% in
2003-04, and peaked to 77.7% in 2006-07, before it declined steeply over the years, to finish at
just 18.2% in the terminal year.

Finally, it can be seen that while the bar graph increased dramatically over the mentioned years,
the line graph had a contrasting, declining trend for the same years.

Writing Book Page- 217

 Writing Module Task 2

Academic & General Writing Task 2 : Writing Essay

Writing Book Page- 219

Writing Module Task 2

Writing Book Page- 220

 Writing Module Task 2

ACADEMIC WRITING TASK 2

Question Paper G Task-2 Essay AvKv‡i Av‡m| cix¶v_x©‡K 40 wgwb‡Ui g‡a¨ 250 Gi ‡ekx k‡ã GB Task
wU wjL‡Z nq| Band Score G Task-2 i ¸iæZ¡ Task-1 Gi †P‡q †ekx| Task-2 †Z nv‡Zi †jLv ¯úó nIqv
evÂbxq| IELTS cix¶vi Writing Task-2 wU Task-1 Gi †P‡q A‡c¶vK…Z KwVb| Z‡e GB Task Gi Basic
Rules Ges Writing Style ¸‡jv g‡b †i‡L wbqwgZ PP©v Ki‡j fvj Band Score cvIqv †gv‡UB KwVb wKQz bq|

BASIC RULES
i. Essay Format G wjL‡Z n‡e; A_©vr, Introduction, Body Paragraphs Ges Conclusion _vK‡Z n‡e|
ii. Kgc‡¶ 250 Words wjL‡Z n‡e| G‡¶‡Î 250 Words Gi †ewk wjL‡j mgm¨v †bB, wKš‘ Kg wjL‡j DËi
Ach©vß aiv n‡e Ges Mark Kg Avm‡e|
iii. G ai‡bi GKwU †jLvi Rb¨ Suggested Time n‡”Q 40 Minutes; wKš‘ G e¨vcv‡i †Kvb eva¨evaKZv †bB|
cix¶vq Task-1 Ges Task- 2 GK N›Uvi g‡a¨ †kl Ki‡jB n‡jv|

Type of Task 2 questions

Type-1: ‡h †Kvb GKwU wel‡qi Dci mvaviY Av‡jvPbv Ges gZvgZ;
Example: Many people think that a charge for entrance to museums is a tax on learning.
What do you think the consequences of such charging would be? (GLv‡b hv`yN‡i †XvKvi mgq
UvKv wb‡j wK wK NU‡Z cv‡i †m e¨vcv‡i cix¶v_x©i gZvgZ Rvb‡Z PvIqv n‡q‡Q|)

Type-2: †Kvb GKwU wØgyLx wel‡qi Dci ZvwK©K Av‡jvPbv; A_©vr c‡¶ ev wec‡¶ wb‡Ri hyw³ Zz‡j aiv|
Example: The assessment of students has undergone major transformation in the last 20
years. Many educational institutions no longer use formal examinations as a means of
assessment as they believe formal examination results are an unfair indication of a
student’s ability. To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement? (GLv‡b
MZvbyMwZK cix¶vmg~‡ni djvd‡ji Dci wfwË K‡i cix¶v_x©i mvg_©¨ hvPvB Kiv‡K c¶cvZ`yó e‡j AwfwnZ Kiv
n‡q‡Q Ges G e¨vcv‡i hyw³hy³ we‡kølY K‡i c‡¶ ev wec‡¶ Av‡jvPbv Ki‡Z ejv n‡q‡Q|)

Type-3: GKwU cÖ`Ë mgm¨vi m¤¢ve¨ mgvavb¸‡jv Av‡jvPbv Kiv|

Example: Noise pollution is certainly increasing at an alarming rate in many industrialized
countries. What are the ways you think this problem can be solved? (GLv‡b wk‡ívbœZ †`k¸‡jv‡Z
kã`~l‡Yi fqvenZvi K_v D‡jøL K‡i GB mgm¨vwU mgvav‡bi m¤¢ve¨ Dcvq¸‡jv Av‡jvPbv Ki‡Z ejv n‡q‡Q|
Type-4: †Kvb GKwU cÖ`Ë wel‡qi DcKvwiZv Ges AcKvwiZv Av‡jvPbv K‡i wb‡Ri Ae¯’vb Zz‡j aiv|
Example: Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of age discrimination in workplace
and state your own point of view. (GLv‡b Kg©‡¶‡Î eqmRwbZ c¶cvwZ‡Z¡i fvj I Lvivc w`Kmg~n
Av‡jvPbv K‡i wb‡Ri gZvgZ cÖKvk Ki‡Z ejv n‡q‡Q|)

wet `ªt Type II Ges Type IV cÖvq GKB ai‡bi| wKš‘ Type II †Z Agree ev Disagree Av‡M D‡jøL K‡i Av‡jvPbv
Kiv DwPZ Ges Type IV G Advantage I Disadvantage Av‡M Av‡jvPbv K‡i c‡i wbR¯^ gZvgZ w`‡Z n‡e|

Writing Book Page- 221

Writing Module Task 2

Writing Task 2 Band Descriptor

Band Task Achievement Coherence and Lexical Resource Grammatical

Cohesion Range and
Accuracy
9 • fully addresses all • uses cohesion in such • uses a wide range of • uses a wide range of
parts of the task a way that it attracts no vocabulary with very structures with full
attention natural and flexibility and
• presents a fully sophisticated control of accuracy; rare minor
developed position in • skilfully manages lexical features; rare errors occur only as
answer to the question paragraphing minor errors ‘slips’
with relevant, fully occur only as ‘slips’
extended and well
supported ideas

8 • sufficiently addresses • sequences information • uses a wide range of • uses a wide range of
all parts of the task and ideas logically vocabulary fluently and structures
flexibly to convey
• presents a well- • manages all aspects of precise meanings • the majority of
developed response to cohesion well sentences are error-
the question with • skilfully uses free
relevant, extended and • uses paragraphing uncommon lexical
supported ideas sufficiently and items but there may be • makes only very
appropriately occasional occasional errors or
inaccuracies in word inappropriacies
choice and collocation

• produces rare errors

in spelling and/or word
formation

7 • addresses all parts of • logically organises • uses a sufficient • uses a variety of

the task information and ideas; range of vocabulary to complex structures
there is clear allow some flexibility
• presents a clear progression throughout and precision • produces frequent
position throughout the error-free sentences
• uses a range of
response • uses less common
cohesive devices
lexical items with some • has good control of
appropriately although
• presents, extends and awareness of style and grammar and
there may be some
supports main ideas, collocation punctuation but may
under-/over-use
but there may be a make a few errors
• may produce
tendency to over- • presents a clear
occasional errors in
generalise and/or central topic within each
word choice, spelling
supporting ideas may paragraph
and/or word formation
lack focus

6 • addresses all parts of • arranges information • uses an adequate • uses a mix of simple
the task although some and ideas coherently range of vocabulary for and complex sentence
parts may be more fully and there is a clear the task forms
covered than others overall progression
• attempts to use less • makes some errors
• presents a relevant
• uses cohesive devices common vocabulary in grammar and
position although the
effectively, but cohesion but with some punctuation but they
conclusions may
within and/or between inaccuracy rarely reduce
become unclear or
sentences may be faulty communication
repetitive • makes some errors in
or mechanical

Writing Book Page- 222

 Writing Module Task 2

• presents relevant • may not always use spelling and/or word

main ideas but some referencing clearly or formation, but
may be appropriately they do not impede
inadequately • uses paragraphing, but communication
developed/unclear not always logically

5 • addresses the task • presents information • uses a limited range • uses only a limited
only partially; the format with some organisation of vocabulary, but this range of structures
may be inappropriate in but there may be a lack is minimally adequate
places of overall progression for the task • attempts complex
sentences but these
• expresses a position
• makes inadequate, • may make noticeable tend to be less
but the development is
inaccurate or over-use errors in spelling and/or accurate than simple
not always clear and
of cohesive devices word formation that sentences
there may be no
may cause some
conclusions drawn • may be repetitive
difficulty for the reader • may make frequent
because of lack of
• presents some main grammatical errors
referencing and
ideas but these are and punctuation may
substitution
limited and not be faulty; errors can
sufficiently developed; • may not write in cause some difficulty
there may be irrelevant paragraphs, or for the
detail paragraphing may be reader
inadequate

4 • responds to the task • presents information • uses only basic • uses only a very
only in a minimal way and ideas but these are vocabulary which may limited range of
or the answer is not arranged coherently be used repetitively or structures with only
tangential; the format and there is no clear which may be rare use of
may be progression in the inappropriate for the subordinate clauses
inappropriate response task
• some structures are
• presents a position • uses some basic • has limited control of accurate but errors
but this is unclear cohesive devices but word formation and/or predominate, and
these may be spelling; errors punctuation is often
• presents some main inaccurate or repetitive may cause strain for faulty
ideas but these are the reader
difficult to identify and • may not write in
may be repetitive, paragraphs or their use
irrelevant or not well may be confusing
supported

3 • does not adequately • does not organise • uses only a very • attempts sentence
address any part of the ideas logically limited range of words forms but errors in
task and expressions with grammar and
• may use a very limited very limited control of punctuation
• does not express a range of cohesive word formation and/or redominate and distort
clear position devices, and those used spelling the meaning
may not indicate a
• presents few ideas, logical relationship • errors may severely
which are largely between distort the message
undeveloped or ideas
irrelevant

Writing Book Page- 223

Writing Module Task 2

Essay Writing Structure:

‡h ‡Kvb Essay †K wZbwU g~j As‡k wef³ Ki‡Z nq:

1) Introduction
2) Body paragraph(s)
3) Conclusion.

Body Paragraph GK ev GKvwaK n‡Z cv‡i cÖ‡kœi Pvwn`v Abyhvqx| Z‡e IELTS Writing Task-2 Gi Rb¨
Kgc‡¶ 2wU Body Paragraphs †jLv DwPZ|

A Good Essay should have:

GKwU Essay †K Formal Ges Special Way ‡Z Dc¯’vcb Kivi Rb¨ wKQz wRwbm †g‡b wjL‡Z nq| GKwU fvj
Essay †Z wbgœwjwLZ 5 wU Quality _vKv DwPZ|

1. a FOCUS/ THESIS STATEMENT: An essay has a clear main point or topic sentence.

2. adequate DEVELOPMENT: Each sentence supports the main point with specific
details.

3. UNITY: An essay sticks to its main point.

4. COHERENCE: An essay is organized logically and flows smoothly.

5. CORRECTNESS: An essay has complete sentences that are relatively error-free.

Dc‡ii wbqg¸‡jv we‡kølY K‡i †`Lv hvq-

cÖ_gZ t Essay †Z GKwU Thesis Statement _vK‡Z n‡e| g‡b ivL‡Z n‡e, Essay Gi First Paragraph A_©vr
Introduction G Thesis Statement wU _vK‡e| wØZxqZt GK ev GKvwaK Body Paragraph-G wewfbœ Z_¨ hyw³,
D`vniY I WvUv Øviv Thesis Statement Gi AbyK~‡j (ev cÖwZK~‡j) e³e¨ `uvo Kiv‡Z n‡e| Z…ZxqZt g‡b ivL‡Z n‡e
Essay wU‡Z AcÖvmsw½K †Kvb Z_¨ ev D`vniY †`qv hv‡e bv| PZz_©Zt Essay wU †jLvi mgq e³e¨ I hyw³i
avivevwnKZv i¶v Kiv A_©vr †Kvb Point Gi ci †Kvb Point Avmv DwPZ Zv †Lqvj ivL‡Z n‡e| Finally, Grammar
Ges Spelling Gi ï×Zvi w`‡K `„wó ivLv DwPZ|

Writing Book Page- 224

 Writing Module Task 2

A. Writing Introduction: Paragraph 1

Introduction :
 General Statement
 Thesis Statement

Task-2 Answer Gi Introduction LyeB ¸iæZ¡c~Y© GKwU Ask| Introduction Gi cÖ_g GKwU ev `yBwU Sentence
n‡e General Statement| cix¶v_x©i wbR¯^ fvlvq welqwU‡K Zz‡j ai‡Z n‡e †hb cvVK‡K welqe¯‘i mv‡_ cwiPq
Kwi‡q †`Iqv hvq| Introduction Gi †kl evK¨wU n‡e Thesis Statement.
wb‡Pi Topic wU ch©v‡jvPbv Kiæb-

"During last 20 years, the assessment of students has undergone major

transformation. Many educational institutions has shifted their focus from traditional
examination towards a variety of innovative asssessment techniques, as they believe
traditional examination results are not often true to student's ability. " (Type II writing).
Introduction for this writing can be like the following:

Formal examinations have been less frequently (A‡c¶AK…Z Kg) used in many countries in the
past two decades (`kK). The education systems in some societies, however, are still
dominated (cÖvavb¨) by formal examinations. Traditional examinations can, however, produce an
unfair assessment (g~j¨vqb) of a student's abilities. Though examination
results have been used as a indicator of a student's ability, in many occasions they do not
actually reflect a student's ability accurately.
cÖ_g Underlined Sentence wU General Statement| GLv‡b ejv n‡q‡Q ÒMZvbyMwZK cix¶vmg~n MZ `yB `kK
a‡i wewfbœ †`‡k AbywôZ n‡q Avm‡Q|Ó GwU cy‡iv wel‡qi Dci GKwU mvaviY Av‡jvKcvZ| †jLK GLv‡b †Kvb wbR¯^
Ae¯’vb †bbwb, cvVK‡K welqe¯‘i mv‡_ cwiPq Kwi‡q w`‡q‡Qb gvÎ|
‡kl Sentence A_©vr wØZxq Underlined Sentence wU Thesis Statement| GLv‡b ejv n‡q‡Q ÒAvwg wek¦vm
Kwi, hw`I AZx‡Z MZvbyMwZK cix¶vi djvdj wk¶v_x©i mvg_©¨‡K mwVKfv‡e Zz‡j a‡i _vK‡Z cv‡i, †ek wKQz †¶‡Î
G¸‡jv wk¶v_x©i mwZ¨Kvi mvg‡_©¨i wb‡`©kK bqÓ| GLv‡b †jL‡Ki wbR¯^ `„wófw½ (Point of View) Zz‡j aiv n‡q‡Q
Ges GB Thesis Statement †_‡K aviYv Kiv hvq Body Paragraphs Gi Av‡jvPbv †Kvb Lv‡Z cÖevwnZ n‡e|
B. Writing Body (Development): Paragraphs 2/3/4
 Topic Sentence
 First Supporting Sentence
 Second Supporting Sentence
GB Paragraph Gi ïiæ‡Z GKwU Topic Sentence wjL‡Z n‡e hv GB Body Paragraph Gi g~j Av‡jvP¨ welq|
Connective Words Gi e¨envi Developmental Paragraph G AZ¨šÍ ¸iæZ¡c~Y© (wk¶v_x©‡`i myweav‡_© GB
Av‡jvPbvi †klvs‡k Common Connective Words Gi GKwU List †`Iqv n‡q‡Q)| Gi c‡i Supporting
Sentence ¸‡jv n‡e Topic Sentence Gi mv‡_ mvgÄm¨c~Y©| †hgbt Example / Event / Experience Ges
Zvi Explanation ¸‡jv †hb GB Paragraph Gi Topic Sentence †K mg_©b K‡i|

Writing Book Page- 225

Writing Module Task 2

Body (Developmental) paragraphs ‡jLvi mgq Question Type ‡Lqvj ivL‡Z n‡e| hw`-

Type-I (†Kvb wel‡qi Dci mvaviY Av‡jvPbv ev gZvgZ) n‡j cÖ_g Body Paragraph-G welqwU m¤ú‡K©
aviYv w`‡q wØZxq Body Paragraph G wbR¯^ gZvgZ Dc¯’vcb Kiv DwPZ|

Type-II (wØgyLx wel‡qi Dci ZvwK©K Av‡jvPbv) n‡j cÖ_g Body Paragraph-G wbR¯^ Ae¯’vb m¤ú‡K© ¯^c‡¶
hyw³ Dc¯’vcb Ki‡Z n‡e| wØZxq Paragraph-G Contrasting View A_©vr wec¶ hyw³ Zz‡j aivi mv‡_ mv‡_
†m¸‡jv‡K LÛb Kiv wKsev †m¸‡jvi `ye©j w`K Zz‡j aiv DwPZ|

Type-III (‡Kvb mgm¨vi mgvavb¸‡jv Zz‡j aiv) n‡j cÖ_‡g Body Paragraph-G mgm¨vwU‡K GKvwaK
`„wó‡Kvb †_‡K ch©v‡jvPbv K‡i wØZxq Paragraph G mgvavb¸‡jv wb‡q Av‡jvPbv Kiv DwPZ|

Type-IV (†Kvb GKwU cÖ`Ë wel‡qi DcKvwiZv / AcKvwiZv Av‡jvPbv Kiv) n‡j, †h‡Kvb GKwU Body
Paragraph-G Advantages Ges Aci Body Paragraph-wU‡Z Disadvantages Av‡jvPbv Ki‡Z n‡e|

Z‡e Conclusion Gi mv‡_ mvgÄm¨ †i‡L my›`ifv‡e †jLv †kl Kivi Rb¨ cix¶v_x© †h c‡¶ (Advantages/
Disadvantages) wb‡Ri Ae¯’vb †b‡e †mB c‡¶i hyw³ Conclusion Gi wVK Av‡Mi Paragraph G †jLv
DwPZ| A_©vr cix¶v_x© Thesis Statement G Advantages mg_©b Ki‡j, cÖ_g Body Paragraph G
Disadvantages Ges wØZxqwU‡Z Advantages Av‡jvPbv Kiv DwPZ|

Examples of 4 types of body paragraphs

TYPE 1: Many people think that imposing a fee on museum-entry is a tax on

learning and education. What do you think the consequences of such
charging would be?
FIRST BODY PARAGRAPH

Museums archive a nation's history, culture, heritage, glory and serve as a enormous source
of knowledge. Firstly museum is a reservoir of a nation's achievements, nation's scientific
discoveries, inventions (‰eÁvwbK Avwe®‹vi) and other technological achievements. Furthermore,
a museum captures achievements (mvdj¨/cÖvwß) and mementoes of glories, heroic deeds, and
hardships alike. National, cultural, historical, anthropological and archeological (cÖZœZvwËK)
resources and findings are recorded and preserved to pass on to coming generations.

Underlined AskwU n‡”Q cÖ_g Body Paragraph Gi Topic Sentence. j¶¨ Ki‡j †`Lv hvq, GB Paragraph
wU‡Z Museum m¤ú‡K© aviYv †`qv n‡q‡Q A_©vr GKwU Museum wK wK Purpose Serve K‡i †m m¤^‡Ü ejv
n‡q‡Q|

Writing Book Page- 226

 Writing Module Task 2

SECOND BODY PARAGRAPH

Imposing charges on museum entry will bring solvency to the museum management but at
the cost of taxing learners. This may, however, depress the number of potential visitors. As a
result, the citizens would be deprived (ewÂZ) of the benefits they could have gathered (msMÖn
Kiv) from visiting a museum. Though the amount could be used for enriching the museum and
managing it better, any profit motive should strictly be discouraged (wbiærmvwnZ) as this is
against the basic tenet (bxwZ) of knowledge sharing and societal development
GB Paragraph wU‡Z hv`yN‡i †XvKvi mgq Charge wb‡j wK wK NU‡Z cv‡i †m m¤^‡Ü Av‡jvPbv Kiv n‡q‡Q| G‡¶‡Î
Underlined Sentence the Topic Sentence.
TYPE II: "During the last 20 years, the assessment of students has undergone major
transformation. Many educational institutions have shifted their focus from
traditional examination towards a variety of innovative assessment
techniques, as they believe traditional examination results are not often true
to student's ability."
To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement?
FIRST BODY PARAGRAPH
Examinations are meant to assess students objectively. But traditional formal examinations
have limitation in assessing pupil's ability, particularly in the cases when examinee can't suit to
the lenghty examinations. There are students who do not perform well under time-pressure
and fall short of time. If a student unfortunately gets ill or somehow injured on exam day, he or
she will be deprived of what he or she could have achieved. Furthermore this can happen to
different students on different days. So a student's ability can be misjudged by examinations.
Thus, formal examination results do not always truely reflect a student's ability.
GB Paragraph wU‡Z Last Sentence wU Topic Sentence (underlined). A_©vr Topic Sentence ïiæ‡ZB
_vK‡Z n‡e Ggb †Kvb K_v †bB| GB Paragraph wU‡Z Formal Examination Gi `ywU Negative Side Zz‡j aiv
n‡q‡Q Ges ejv n‡q‡Q Formal Exams me‡¶‡Î GKwU Qv‡Îi mwVK g~j¨vqb Ki‡Z cv‡ibv|
SECOND BODY PARAGRAPH

On the other hand, unconventional (cÖ_vMZ bq) forms of testing a student's ability can bring out
better results. For example, frequent (Nb Nb) quizzes (Zvr¶wbK ¯^í ˆ`‡N©¨i cix¶v), oral
presentation, course work, assignments can examine a student from different skill
perspectives and can represent a more accurate (wbf©yj) reflection (cÖwZdjb) of a students'
ability. These kinds of tests assess students' initiative (D`¨g) creativity (m„wókxjZv) focus (wbweôZv)
reasoning and organizing abilities that are important parameters (cwigvcK) of performance
(m¶gZv) But, formal or conventional examination often has limitation in assessing these.
Though formal (K‡Vvi wbqgwbôv) examinations are useful in testing student’s ability and
preparation, this form of exams can have a risk of producing a misleading conclusion about a
student's actual strength.

Writing Book Page- 227

Writing Module Task 2

GB Paragraph wU‡Z Contrasting Viewpoint (wecixZ `„wófw½) Av‡jvPbv Kiv n‡q‡Q A_©vr Ab¨ avivi
cix¶v¸‡jvi wK wK DcKvix w`K Av‡Q †m¸‡jv Dc¯’vcb Kiv n‡q‡Q|
Paragraph `y‡Uv co‡jB †evSv hvq †jLK G‡¶‡Î Formal Examination Gi wec‡¶ e‡j‡Qb Ges cÖ‡kœ cÖ`Ë
e³e¨‡K mg_©b K‡i‡Qb|
TYPE III: "In recent years, modern life has become more stressful than it has ever
been. Consequently, many people are suffering from stress-related
problems. What factors are contributing to this increase and what can be
done to overcome the problem?"
FIRST BODY PARAGRAPH

A number of factors are contributing towards the rapid increase of stress-related problems in
modern life. The very training that shapes our attitude towards life and profession has a
implication in modern day stress feeling. Ever changing business environment, high
competitor and rat-race in the job market, challenging job environment i.e. long hours, meeting
deadlines, achieving targets, leave people on their toes. The growing intricacies (RwUjZv) of
modern world is compounded (†hŠwMK) by the change that pervades (weivRgvb) all aspects of our
lives. Among others, rapid technology change has a direct bearing on our skills. Every few
years, the existing skillsets become obsolete and people fear Joblessness. Job and income
related uncertainty is a major pressure on professionals. Ambitious and achievement oriented
people are reported to suffer more from stress related problems than people who are easy
going and happy character. Finally growing population in cities puts more pressure on our
immediate environment and resources. As resources become scarce (`yt®cÖvc¨) they also
become more expensive which adds to the pressure. Last but not the least, competition in
all phases (¯Íi) of life increases the problem many fold.
GB Paragraph wU‡Z cÖ`Ë mgm¨vi KviY¸‡jv wPwýZ Kiv n‡q‡Q| cÖ_‡g Underlined Sentence wU‡Z
Paragraph Gi Topic Sentence Ges Ab¨vb¨ Bold Ask¸‡jv Connective Words.
SECOND BODY PARAGRAPH

Although factors behind stress are on the rise, we must try to contain them. We have to learn
to manage stress and live with it as healthily as possible. Probably most important is
awareness education. Health services can, for example, embark (cÖe„Ë nIqv) on a massive
(e¨vcK) awareness campaign aiming to make individuals and families aware of some of the
contributing factors that increase people's threshold of coping with stress. Importantly, there
should be some definite initiatives to reduce stresses in workplaces. Being organized can help
in meeting deadlines and long hours of work should not become regularity. It is advisable not
to promise something that is difficult to keep. Competitive attitude should be contained so that
it cannot cause damage. Above all, spending quality time with families will help to relax.
Holidays, leisures and amusements should be promoted in lifestyle.
Dc‡ii Paragraph wU‡Z mgm¨vi m¤¢ve¨ mgvavb¸‡jv Av‡jvPbv Kiv n‡q‡Q| GLv‡bI cÖ_g Underlined Sentence
wU Topic Sentence Ges Bold Words ¸‡jv Connective Words.

Writing Book Page- 228

 Writing Module Task 2

TYPE IV:

G ai‡bi Question Gi Body Paragraphs ¸‡jvi Format Exactly Type II Question Gi Body
Paragraphs Gi Format Gi gZ n‡e| Type II Ges Type IV Gi cv_©K¨ n‡jv GB †h, Type IV Gi
Introduction G wb‡Ri Ae¯’vb e¨³ Kiv nqbv; Advantages I Disadvantages Av‡jvPbv K‡i Conclusion G
wb‡Ri Ae¯’vb Zz‡j ai‡Z nq|

C. Writing Conclusions: Last Paragraph

Conclusion (Dcmsnvi) †h †Kvb Writing Gi GKwU AZ¨šÍ ¸yiæZ¡c~Y© Ask| Conclusion Gi gva¨‡g †h
D‡Ïk¨¸‡jv c~iY Kiv nq †m¸‡jv n‡jv-

 GwU †Kvb Essay Gi mgvwß wb‡`©k K‡i|

 cÖ`Ë wel‡qi Dci Final wPšÍvfvebv I wm×všÍ Uv‡b|
 c~‡e© cÖ`Ë Thesis Statement †K †Rvi`vi K‡i Ges Essay †Z †h g~j w`K¸‡jv Zz‡j aiv n‡q‡Q
†m¸‡jv‡K GKwÎZ K‡i|

POINTS TO REMEMBER:

 Do not repeat your introduction, you can rephrase that partially

 Use concluding connective words.
 Note what type of essay you are writing.

cieZx© Example G cÖwZwU Type Gi Essay Av‡Q| †m¸‡jvi Conclusion ¸‡jv fvjfv‡e Aa¨qb Kiæb|

Writing Book Page- 229

Writing Module Task 2

Common Connective Words in Writing

bx‡Pi Connective Word ¸‡jv j¶¨ Kiæb Ges co–b| IELTS Gi Writing Task-2 †Z G ai‡Yi Word e¨envi
Kivi †Póv Kiæb fvj dj cv‡eb| Familarity with these words would be useful in all test modules.
Common connective words indicating:
Addition Sequence Consequence Contrast
in addition first(ly) as a result however
and initially thus on the other hand
similarly second(ly) etc. so despite
likewise to begin with therefore in spite of
as well as, as well then consequently though
besides next it follows that although
furthermore earlier/later thereby but
also after this/that eventually on the contrary
moreover following this/that then otherwise
and then afterwards in that case yet
too likewise admittedly instead of
not only .... but also ultimately rather
even / even if / even reportedly whereas
though allegedly nonetheless
besides this/that even though
compared with
in contrast
alternatively
Certainty Condition Definition
obviously if is
certainly unless refers to
plainly whether means
of course provided that that is
undoubtedly for consists of
so that
whether
depending on
subject to
Example Reason Time Conclusion
for instance since before in conclusion
one example as since in summary
for example so as lastly
just as because (of) until finally
in particular due to meanwhile to sum up
such as owing to at the moment to conclude
namely the reason why when to recapitulate
to illustrate in other words whenever in short
leads to as soon as
cause just as
Difference once
Merely Marked Difference
rarely Significant Difference generally speaking
barely Subtle Difference Ideally speaking
often Strictly Speaking
seldom Broadly speaking

Writing Book Page- 230

 Writing Module Task 2

Examples of 4 Types of Writing Task 2

TYPE I: EXAMPLE

You should spend about 40 minutes on this task.

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

If you want to introduce new food items, drugs, or any such thing, you have to get
them tested before you apply them on humans. And as per the current status of
development in the biological sciences, we don't have any other options other than
testing them on animals.

Give your opinion on this issue.

You should write at least 250 words

Use your own knowledge and experience and support your arguments with examples and
relevant evidence.

Writing Book Page- 231

Writing Module Task 2

Thinking Guideline : †h †Kvb bZzb Lv`¨ e¯‘ ev Jla gvby‡li e¨env‡ii Rb¨ evRv‡i Qvovi Av‡M gvby‡li ¯^v‡¯’¨i
wbivcËv wbwðZ Ki‡Z h‡_ó cix¶v Kiv DwPZ| mvaviYfv‡e Gme cix¶v wbix¶v Kiv nq cÖvYx †`‡ni Dci Ges eZ©gvb
Ae¯’vq GUvB m‡e©vËg Dcvq| hw`I A‡bK ˆeÁvwbK cix¶v wbix¶v AvRKvj Kw¤úDUvi I cÖhyw³MZ wmgy‡jk‡bi gva¨‡g
n‡q _v‡K| wKš‘ gvby‡li kixiZË¡xq RwUj ˆRweK µxqvKjv‡ci ˆeÁvwbK wmgy‡jkb Kivi gZ cÖhyw³ Avgv‡`i Rvbv †bB|
ZvQvov kixiZË¡xq A‡bK RwUj cÖwµqv AvRI Avgv‡`i cy‡ivcywi Rvbv †bB Ges wKQz cÖvYxi kixiZË¡xq cÖwµqvi mv‡_
gvby‡li kixiZË¡xq cÖwµqvi AmvaviY wgj i‡q‡Q| ZvB Gme wKQz cÖvYx j¨ve‡iUix‡Z cix¶vq e¨eüZ n‡”Q Ges A‡bK
wbf©i‡hvM¨ djvdj w`‡”Q hv Avgv‡`i ˆeÁvwbK AMÖMwZ‡Z cÖf~Z mvnvh¨ K‡i‡Q|
TYPE I : MODEL ANSWER
Repeated experimentation and testing is a way of research and development of any scientific
innovation (Avwe®‹vi), be it biological science, natural science or a technological advancement.
Introduction of any new food or drug item to the market particularly needs rigorous (e¨vcK) testing
and careful consideration about human safety. There is no denial that before use every innovation
of biological science needs to be thoroughly tested to ascertain (wbwðZ) that the new item is not
harmful to human body. I agree to this statement, as we simply don't have any better alternative at
this moment, but to test them on animals to study the effects.
The rapid innovations in the natural sciences have resulted in improved and high production food
items and better and effective drugs, both preventive and curative. However, it is quite obvious
(¯úó) that we can't let these be marketed for human use or consumption without having them
tested properly. The chemical and physical properties of drugs, vaccines, or food items might not
suit the human body, and may cause serious side effects. Hence, we can, conclusively suggest
that there is a need for testing new items.

The issue is how and on what the test is to be undertaken, on living animals or something else i.e.
simulation? Our science and technology have developed tremendously (e¨vcKfv‡e) over the recent
years and experimenting and testing in research has become much easier through scientific and
computer-aided simulations. We can now simulate even the atmosphere of the outer space. That
makes research easier because we can now test the effects of things in a simulated environment
to determine their impact (cÖfve) on the human body, environment, or any other thing. However, our
scientists have yet to completely understand the totality of the human body systems and their
interdependence as a whole. Biological scientists are yet to know how some of the most
complicated organs or systems of the human body work. For example, the mechanism of the
nervous system or the central immune system is still a matter of speculation and research.
Developing something that will organically and bio-chemically simulate the human body is far
beyond our reach. So, we can hardly think of anything artificial that would match human body
partly or wholly.
However, some of the living animals have surprising resemblance (mv`„k¨) with the human body in
some respects and organ activities and for centuries biological scientist are using them as test
animals and producing reliable results. Scientists are continuing to test on them as because
nothing as appropriate as these animals has been developed to be the test Guinea pig. Had there
been other inanimate (cÖvYnxb) alternatives, scientists should have thought of them. But there isn't
any such thing that can come even close to them. Therefore, we have no other alternative other
than continuing to test on few laboratory animals for the greater good of the human race.

Writing Book Page- 232

 Writing Module Task 2

Example TYPE II : EXAMPLE

You should spend about 40 minutes on this task.

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Developing countries like Bangladesh should concentrate more on industrial

development, instead of agriculture, to achieve development. Do you agree or
disagree?

You should write at least 250 words

Use your own knowledge and experience and support your arguments with examples and
relevant evidence.

Writing Book Page- 233

Writing Module Task 2

Thinking Guideline: K…wl wbf©i ev wkí wbf©i †nvK, cÖ‡Z¨KwU †`kB DbœZ n‡Z Pvq| Avwg g‡b Kwi wkí wbf©i n‡q
GKwU †`k `ªæZ DbœZ n‡Z cv‡i| Avg`vbx weKí (†hgb fviZ) wKsev idZvbx wbf©i (†hgb nsKs) wkíbxwZ GKwU †`‡ki
m¤ú` MV‡b f~wgKv iv‡L| A‡bK †`kB wkí wbf©i n‡q `ªæZ Dbœqb †c‡q‡Q| DbœZ wkí Drcv`b cieZx© wkí cÖmv‡i cuywR
†hvMvb †`q| wm½vcyi, Rvcvb, †Kvwiqv, ZvBIqvb, nsKs‡Ki g‡Zv Gwkqvi †`k¸‡jv `ªæZ DbœZ n‡q‡Q wk‡ívbœq‡bi
Kvi‡Y| wesk kZvãx‡Z gv‡jwkqv, _vBj¨vÛ, Pvqbv, wdwjcvBb G c_ AbymiY K‡i‡Q| K…wl DbœqbI Rxeb hvÎvi gvb
D‡bœvq‡b mvnvh¨ K‡i| A‡bK K…wl wbf©i †`k idZvbxi gva¨‡g wecyj ˆe‡`wkK gy`ªv AR©b K‡i‡Q| we‡klÁ‡`i g‡Z K…wl
wbf©i †`k¸‡jv K…wlwfwËK wkí Mo‡Z cv‡i| Gme †`k Zv‡`i cY¨ eûgyLxKiY K‡iI ˆe‡`wkK gy`ªv AR©b Ki‡Z cv‡i|
TYPE II : MODEL ANSWER

Every country wants to develop. The vehicle for development can be different, be it
agricultural development or industrial development, goal is to achieve quick development. I
fully agree to this point as I believe that industrial development can bring in faster
development for any country. A well-conceived (mywPwšÍZ) industrialization strategy, be it import
substitution industrialization (as in India) or export oriented industrialization (as in Hong Kong)
can be useful in accumulating wealth.
Many of the developing countries have achieved quick development through industrial
development. Most developed countries are industrially developed countries. Europe and
America's quick development came through industrial development. The surplus from the
agricultural production provided the capital for initiating industrial development and then their
industrial production base has given them capital base for further industrial advancement.

Many Asian countries registered quick development by achieving industrial development.

Starting with Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Hong Kong and Singapore became economically
developed by having quick industrialization. Later in late 20th century some other countries like
Malaysia, Thailand, China, Indonesia, and also Philippines, developed by quick industrial
development.

While agricultural development can also help improving quality of life. Many countries have
strong agricultural base and some of them are not only self sufficient, but also earn foreign
currency through exporting agro-based products.

Some development experts emphasize that those countries with strong agricultural base can
capitalize on developing agro-based industrialization, which is not very capital intensive
(cuywRNb) Moreover agricultural countries are diversifying (eûgyLxKiY) their products. For example,
Thailand is a one of the major producers and exporters of orchids and flowers and earns a
huge amount of foreign currency. Many countries are successfully exporting fresh fruits and
processed foods. Australia, Norway are major exporter of sea fish, many South American
countries are major beef exporters. Thailand and Taiwan are exporting aquarium fishes to
many western markets. Many countries are producing milk, cotton, wool for international
market.
To conclude, we can say, while there are many opportunities in Agriculture, yet
industrialization can achieve faster growth if capital and technology is available.

Writing Book Page- 234

 Writing Module Task 2

Example TYPE III : EXAMPLE

You should spend about 40 minutes on this task.

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Over population in most developing countries in Asia and Africa is a problem. If

these countries don't try to control population immediately, they will face serious
problems. What are your suggestions to control population?

You should write at least 250 words

Use your own knowledge and experience and support your arguments with examples and
relevant evidence.

Thinking Guideline : we‡k¦i A‡bK †`‡kB AvksKvRbKfv‡e RbmsL¨v evo‡Q| we‡kl K‡i Gwkqv Ges Avwd«Kvi
†`k¸‡jv‡Z| gvÎvwZwi³ RbmsL¨v n‡”Q A‡bK RwUj mgm¨vi KviY hv Rxeb hvÎvi gvb Kwg‡q †`q| †eKviZ¡, ch©vß
AeKvVv‡gvi Afve, `vwi`ª, Acywó, wbgœ wk¶vi nvi Ges mvgvwRK Kzms¯‹vi Ges wewawb‡la n‡”Q Mixe mgv‡Ri ˆewkó¨|
A‡c¶vK…Z Mixe‡`k ¸‡jv‡Z mvaviYZ D”P †eKvi‡Z¡i nvi _v‡K, Gme †`‡k RbmsL¨v e„w× gv‡b n‡”Q Ae¯’vi
µgvebwZ| RbmsL¨vi D”P cÖe„w× Mixe †`‡ki mxwgZ m¤ú‡`i Dc‡i Pvc m„wó K‡i Ges cÖKvi‡šÍ Zv‡`i mgm¨v Av‡iv
evovq|

Rb¥ wbqš¿Y Dbœqbkxj †`kmg~‡n GKwU cÖavb Dbœqb‡KŠkj| wk¶v, m‡PZbZvi Afve, mvgvwRK I agx©q wewa wb‡la Gme
†`‡k Rb¥ wbqš¿‡Yi cÖavb evav, Gme Kvi‡Y m‡PZbZv e„w× wKsev m¤cÖmviY me©‡¶‡ÎB mvdj¨ cvqwb| Rb¥ wbqš¿Y
cÖPviYvi mydj LyeB axiMwZ‡Z Av‡m| Rb¥vwa‡K¨i mgm¨v mgvav‡bi K‡qKwU Dcvq Av‡Q| cÖ_gZt mgv‡Ri me©¯Í‡i
mvgvwRK Av‡›`vjb Ges m‡PZbZv e„w× Kiv| †hme †`‡ki agx©q I mvgvwRK †bZviv Rb¥wbqš¿‡bi weiæ‡× Ae¯’vb †bq
†mme †`‡k (†hgb cvwK¯Ívb, AvdMvwb¯Ívb) Rb¥wbqš¿‡Yi wewfbœ c`‡¶c¸‡jv h‡_ó Kvh©Ki nq bv| wØZxqZt Rb¥
wb‡ivaK wewfbœ c×wZ `wi`ª Rbmvavi‡Yi Kv‡Q mnRjf¨ I myjf Kiv| Z…ZxqZt miKvi Rb¥wbqš¿Y †iv‡a cwiev‡ii
AvK…wZ †QvU ivLvi Rb¨ RbMY‡K m‡PZb wKsev wbqš¿Yg~jK e¨e¯’v wb‡Z cv‡i| G‡Z fvj dj cvIqv †h‡Z cv‡i, †hgb-
Pxb PZz_©Zt AbvKvw•LZ Mf©avi‡Yi †¶‡Î Mf©cv‡Zi AvBbMZ evav mwi‡q †bqv|

Dcmsnv‡i ejv hvq †h, RbmsL¨v e„w×i gv‡b n‡”Q Mixe †`k¸‡jvi Rb¨ `vwi`ª we‡gvPb Av‡iv †ekx KwVb n‡e|
m‡PZbZvi cÖmvi Ges Kvh©Ki I mwVK Rb¥wbqš¿Y cš’v Aek¨B `wi`ª †`‡k mydj e‡q Avb‡e|

Writing Book Page- 235

Writing Module Task 2

Task 2 TYPE III : MODEL ANSWER

Population is increasing alarmingly in many countries of the world, particularly in Asia and
Africa. This is especially true for poor underdeveloped countries characterized by lack of
education, poor quality of life and religious and social-taboo against population control among
illiterate population. Giving suggestions to control population requires a discussion about the
causes of this phenomenon first.
Overpopulation causes a complex set of problems that negatively affect quality of life.
Unemployment, lack of adequate infrastructure, poverty, malnutrition, low literacy rate, and
other social taboo are the characteristics of a poor society. Poorer countries usually have high
rate of unemployment and an increase in population will simply make the situation worse.
Many poor countries struggle to grow or buy enough food to feed current population round the
year. Increasing population puts pressure on limited resources of the poor countries, causing
more problems to people.
Population control has been a major development strategy in many overpopulated developing
countries. Lack of education, awareness, and social and religious taboo against birth control
are major hindrances in population control. Education or campaigns to limit the number of
children per family is not always successful, due to social practices and religious taboo.
Population control is a very difficult goal to achieve and result only comes slowly.

There are several solutions to the problem of overpopulation that are employed by many
governments. Firstly, there should be a social movement and awareness campaign across all
cross section of people, particularly among poor ones, about the bad effects of larger families
and over population as a whole. Birth control campaigns have had only limited or no effect in
many poor marginalized societies where social leaders opposed the idea of controlling birth.
Many religious leaders in poor societies maintain that birth control measures go against
religious principal. For this reason these campaigns had only limited appeal in Muslim
societies in Pakistan, Afghanistan and others. Community participation and acceptance is
critical in achieving success.

Secondly, Making contraceptives available to poor people for free or at a highly discounted
price is also an effective measure to control birth. Thirdly, governments must educate people
to limit the size of the family. In China, couples are punished financially if they have more than
one child. This may seem cruel, but the "one-child policy" is beginning to have a positive result
in the world's most populous nation. Eventually, similar policies might also be necessary in
other crowded nations such as India, Bangladesh, for example. Finally, countries may
consider legally allowing women to have abortion-in case of unwanted pregnancy or on health
ground.

In conclusion, if the population explosion continues, it is definitely going to affect quality of life
negatively in already over populated countries. Many more people will die of starvation, life will
become increasingly difficult, and fight against poverty will be a far more difficult one.
Awareness building and taking effective measure to control population will definitely bring
result.

Writing Book Page- 236

 Writing Module Task 2

Example TYPE IV : EXAMPLE

You should spend about 40 minutes on this task.

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Living in an apartment instead of a university dormitory has advantages and

disadvantages.
Discuss advantages and disadvantages of apartment living and defend your
preference.

You should write at least 250 words

Use your own knowledge and experience and support your arguments with examples and
relevant evidence.

Thinking Guideline : hLb †Kvb QvÎ evox †_‡K `~‡i ev †`‡ki evB‡i co‡Z hvq, †m ‡h me mgm¨vi gy‡LvgywL nq
Zvi g‡a¨ Avevmb mgm¨v Ab¨Zg| we‡`‡k wM‡q GKRb QvÎ wek¦we`¨vjq QvÎvev‡m emevm Ki‡Z cv‡i, Avevi K‡qKRb
wg‡j GKwU GcvU©‡g›U fvov K‡iI _vK‡Z cv‡i| Dfq †¶‡ÎB wKQz myweav Ges Amyweav i‡q‡Q| GcvU©‡g‡›U _vK‡j
covïbvi Dc‡hvMx kvšÍ cwi‡ek cvIqv hvq| GcvU©‡g‡›U _vK‡j Qv·`i‡K wb‡R‡`i mg¯Í KvR wb‡R‡`i‡K Ki‡Z nq,
G‡Z GKRb QvÎ †hgb ¯^vej¤^x n‡Z †k‡L †Zgwb Ab¨w`‡K covïbvi mgq K‡g hvq| A‡bK †¶‡Î, wek¦we`¨vj‡qi
KvQvKvwQ †h me GcvU©‡g›U Av‡Q †m¸‡jvi fvov †ewk nIqvq K¨v¤úvm †_‡K GKUz `y‡i GcvU©‡g‡›U _vK‡j QvÎvev‡mi
PvB‡Z Avevmb LiP Kg c‡o| Ab¨w`‡K, wKQzUv `~‡ii GcvU©‡g‡›U _vK‡j hvZvqvZ LiP †hgb ev‡o, †Zgwb Qv·`i
GKvKxZ¡ evoviI m¤¢vebv _v‡K| Gme m‡Ë¡I wmwbqi MÖvRy‡qU QvÎiv GcvU©‡g‡›U _vK‡Z cQ›` K‡ib| hw`I GcvU©‡g‡›U
_vKvi †ek wKQz myweav i‡q‡Q, wKš‘ wek¦we`¨vj‡qi bZzb Qv·`i Rb¨ A‡bK †¶‡ÎB QvÎvev‡m _vKvi mydj †ewk| KviY
wek¦we`¨vj‡q bZzb AvMZ wn‡m‡e Ab¨vb¨ Qv·`i m‡½ wgwjZ nevi my‡hvM Ges K¨v¤úv‡mi KvQvKvwQ _vKvi myweav G‡¶‡Î
i‡q‡Q| GQvovI LvIqv `vIqv ev Ab¨vb¨ Kv‡R mgq e¨q bv nIqvi `iæb covïbvi my‡hvM †ewk cvIqv hvq| ZvQvov
jvB‡eªix, Kw¤úDUvi j¨ve I Ab¨vb¨ myweavw` e¨env‡i wek¦we`¨vj‡qi QvÎvev‡m _vKv GcvU©‡g‡›U _vKvi †P‡q †ewk
myweavRbK nq|

Writing Book Page- 237

Writing Module Task 2

TYPE IV : MODEL ANSWER

When a student decides to enter a university away from home, he or she must also consider
living accommodations (Avevmb). Although most universities offer student dormitories (QvÎvevm),
students often opt to live in apartments. While there are many advantages to apartment living,
there are also many disadvantages. Before a student decides to live in an apartment, all the
aspects of that kind of accommodation should be reviewed.

Living in an apartment has many advantages. First, students can choose to live in a quiet
neighborhood. A quiet neighborhood is conducive (AbyK~‡j) to studying. Away from
the distractions of campus life, students can be more serious about their studies. Second,
apartment life allows students to be more independent. For example, they can cook whatever
they want to it and have their meals whenever they want them. Third, students can often find
apartments that are cheaper than the fee for room and board in a dormitory. Senior graduate
students and researchers often prefer apartments to dormitory.

However, living in an apartment also has disadvantages. Being away from campus life can
make students feel isolated. Another disadvantage is that apartments close to campus are
usually expensive, and those farther away are not within walking distance. Therefore,
transportation must be considered. Finally, students who live in apartments must cook their
own meals; shop for food, perhaps carry their laundry to a Laundromat and clean their entire
apartment not just their room.

Even though there are many advantages in apartment living, I would prefer to live in the
university dormitory for the following reasons. First, as a fresher university life and meeting
people will be easier in a dormitory setting. Second residents don’t have to worry about
purchasing and cooking food or cleaning up afterwards, consequently will have more time for
studies, Finally, I will be within walking distance of my classes and the university library,
computer lab and other facilities. In conclusion, living on campus is more advantageous for
young full time students than living in an apartment.

Writing Book Page- 238

 Writing Module Task 2

Writing Task 2
Recent Real Questions

Writing Book Page- 239

Writing Module Task 2

Writing Book Page- 240

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 01:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people believe that giving support to the local community is more favourable
than giving it to a charitable organisation.
To what extent do you agree?

Sample response:
In contemporary society, the allocation of charitable resources sparks considerable debate.
While some advocate for directing support towards local communities, others champion the
role of larger charitable organizations. This essay will explore both perspectives before
asserting that, despite the merits of local initiatives, supporting established charitable
organizations offers a more far-reaching and impactful approach to addressing societal needs.

Proponents of local community support often highlight its immediate and tangible benefits.
Donating to local initiatives allows individuals to witness the direct impact of their
contributions, fostering a stronger sense of community engagement and accountability. For
instance, funding a neighborhood food bank or a local youth program can directly address
specific, localized issues, creating a visible difference in one's immediate surroundings. This
localized approach can also promote self-reliance within communities, as residents become
empowered to tackle their own challenges with direct support.

Conversely, the argument for supporting larger charitable organizations rests on their capacity
for broader impact and efficiency. These organizations often possess extensive infrastructure,
expertise, and networks, enabling them to address complex issues on a regional, national, or
even international scale. Their ability to pool resources from numerous donors allows for
larger-scale projects, research, and advocacy that individual local efforts might not achieve.
For example, organizations dedicated to disaster relief, disease eradication, or human rights
can mobilize resources and expertise to provide aid where it is most desperately needed,
regardless of geographical proximity to the donor. Furthermore, many established charities
undergo rigorous auditing, ensuring greater transparency and accountability in their
operations compared to smaller, less formalized local groups.

Therefore, despite the understandable appeal of local giving, I firmly believe that supporting
well-established charitable organizations is more favorable due to their wider reach, greater
impact, and enhanced capacity to address complex issues on a significant scale.

Writing Book Page- 241

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 02:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people think private schools provide an unfair advantage to students who can
afford private education since they are of better quality.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

In today's globalised world, education is of paramount importance for one and all as it helps
one attain a better standard of living. Both private and public schools are engaged in the
endeavour of imparting basic education to children. However, some argue that students of
private schools have a definitive advantage over those who receive education in public
institutions. In my opinion, the relevance and quality of education is of greater significance
rather than the type of school a child goes to.

Private schools pay a lot of attention to maintaining school infrastructure, hiring well-educated
staff and providing best educational facilities to justify the high fee structure. Students
belonging to economically well-off families take admissions in these institutions with the sole
aim of attaining the finest possible school education. Despite the best intentions of their
parents, merely studying from a premier institute does not provide any evident gain such as
ensuring better opportunities for higher education or employment.

Conversely, students who study from public or government schools, may not have devoted
teachers or access to modern learning aids, yet they have the ability to excel through the dint
of their hard work and effort. They are equally suitable to explore options based on their
interests and passions and can strive to achieve success in future.

Irrefutably, it can be said that assessing an individual's professional worth based on where
they received their school education seems arbitrary. Therefore, it can be concluded that the
benefits of private education remain confined to simply providing modern comforts and latest
educational technology and it does not have any decisive impact on the future of its students.

Writing Book Page- 242

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 03:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people think that the amount of noise one makes should be strictly controlled.
Others believe one should be free to make as much noise as one wishes.
Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

One of the major issues created by increasing urbanisation and population growth is noise
pollution. While authorities are strict about people creating unnecessary sound, some profess
that this is an unwanted encumbrance to one's freedom of expression. In this essay, I will
explore both sides of the argument and try to reach a conclusion.

Noise has a lot of detrimental effects on human health. Not only can it lead to health issues
such as headaches but it also has emotional and psychological effects on people and can
lead to irritability and anxiety. Moreover, it can also act as a source of distraction for people
working on professional projects or children studying for examinations. Therefore, authorities
try their best to control unwanted noise induced by factories, traffic and public events for
maintaining harmony in the society.

On the contrary, some advocate the noise made for recreational purposes at ceremonies and
functions do not cause any harm. In their view, everyone should be free to decide how they
want to celebrate an occasion or a victory and a hindrance in doing so is an unnecessary
imposition on the people involved in the events in question.

In conclusion, it can be said, that despite varying opinions on the topic, people have to
understand the significance of good civic sense. Our rights do not give us the liberty to disturb
others. This fine line of demarcation between the acceptable and unacceptable must be
recognised and respected by one and all. People should avoid creating excessive noise and
adhere to the set guidelines. In my opinion, control of authorities in reducing and checking
noise pollution is, therefore, fully justified.

Writing Book Page- 243

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 04:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people say that the best way to improve public health is by increasing the
number of sports facilities. Others, however, say that this would have little effect on
public health and that other measures are required.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

Improving public health has been a cause of concern for authorities across the world. While
the proponents of physical exercise advocate the importance of sports facilities, others who
focus on general well-being stress upon other essential components that make a
comprehensive public health program. In this essay, I will discuss both the views and try to
arrive at a conclusion.

Undoubtedly, physical activity and sports are integral to good health. These activities assist
individuals' endeavour to stay fit, lower risk of diseases and improve mental health. Sports
facilities are easy to access for all and are especially beneficial for children and teenagers
who require a lot of physical exercise for their growth and development. Encouraging such
projects by creating and increasing sports facilities is a good move, but is not the only possible
option to improve the public health system.

Authorities today need to focus on improving sanitation, controlling pollution and maintaining
hygiene standards. Moreover, projects and campaigns should be initiated which help in
spreading awareness and in facilitating both mental and physical well-being. Authorities could
also focus on the importance of a balanced diet, a pollution-free environment in addition to the
creation of well-equipped sports complexes and gyms All these measures, backed by overall
infrastructural development, would help to create an all-inclusive public health system.

In conclusion, it can be said that although sports facilities are crucial for people but setting
them up is not the only solution. I strongly reiterate that all required measures should be
adopted for creating a well-developed, healthy and wholesome society.

Writing Book Page- 244

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 05:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people believe that electronic calculators should not be allowed in school until
after the pupils have mastered mental arithmetic. Others believe that calculators save
pupils time, especially with complicated calculations.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The electronic calculator is a very useful tool for carrying out basic calculations and it is hard
to imagine anyone never having used one. While there are arguments supporting the use of
calculators, there are also those people who do not support calculator use. I am of the belief
that they are important for pupils but not before they are capable to handle basic calculations.

Calculators are ideal for adding up large columns of numbers quickly and reduce the chances
of making a mistake. This does not mean that a calculator should be used for making every
calculation. In some maths problems – for example, fractions – it is not possible to find the
solution with a calculator. For this reason, pupils should be able to solve arithmetic problems
either in their head or by writing the calculation down on paper.

If calculators are introduced in school too early, the pupils will not have developed their mental
arithmetic skills. In a situation where a calculator is not available, the pupils will find that they
are unable to solve the problem. Calculators can save time but this is not always more
important than being able to work out the right answer unaided. In the real world it is important
to have a good grasp of numbers, even for simple things like money.

I believe that calculators should be allowed in schools but only after the pupils can remember
their multiplication tables and work out basic arithmetic problems. It is very important that
pupils have competent number skills so that they can work out a wide range of mathematical
problems. Calculators are not the answer to every problem and it is still possible to make a
mistake if you press the wrong button. Mental arithmetic is particularly useful for checking if an
answer makes sense. A calculator is not an alternative to pupils using their brains.

Writing Book Page- 245

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 06:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that unemployed people should be made to work for their
welfare/benefit payments. Others, however, see this as cheap labour.
Discuss the possible advantages and disadvantages of making unemployed people
take any job. Do you believe that making unemployed people work is a good idea?

Sample response:

In many countries of the world, unemployed people receive payment of some sort to help
them during their phase of not working. I do not believe that unemployed people should be
given money for doing nothing. However, I accept that some people are unable to work
through disabilities or ill health, in which case welfare payments are appropriate. Other than
these exceptions, I see no reason why benefit claimants should not be made to work for their
money like everyone else has to.

There are many advantages to working. It can help the long-term unemployed get back into
the routine of work. It is very easy to get out of the habit of getting up early in the morning and
working from ‘9 to 5’. Working will enable them to get back into their old routines. Moreover,
there are self-esteem and confidence issues to consider. Working provides people with a
sense of purpose and self-worth. It is easy to become socially isolated if you are out of work,
whereas working forces you to meet new people. You might find something that you like doing
or even learn new skills. Furthermore, it also looks good on your CV if you have been working
rather than doing nothing. Many people find permanent work after a period of voluntary work
in a charity shop even.

The disadvantages of being made to work centre on the type of work that is available. If you
are a professional person, then manual work may be unsuitable for you. Someone who is
easily highly qualified or has a good certificate, may not like the prospect of doing any work
that might involve manual labor. It is going to be undeserving and tough work regardless of
the workplace. Also, to save money, some employers might use unemployed people to do
work that should be done by an employee. While this is definitely one practice that should not
be allowed to continue, there are those employers who practice this and reap all the benefits.

I think that making unemployed people do some work for their welfare payments is a good
idea. However, the workers should have some choice in the work that they do and it needs to
be organized properly so that the employers cannot exploit them.

Writing Book Page- 246

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 07:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Is fast food to blame for obesity in society or is gaining too much weight the
responsibility of the individual?
What factors contribute to obesity? Why do you think that children are becoming
obese?

Sample response:

Fast food is quite popular among people of all ages. I believe that eating fast food is making
our society overweight. However, people can choose what type of food they eat, so fast food
is not entirely to blame.

Regarding the factors, people will gain weight if they eat too much food or if it has a high fat or
sugar content. It should be possible to control your weight by avoiding convenience foods,
biscuits and snacks, and by making healthy choices at mealtimes. A lack of exercise also
encourages obesity as does a family history of putting on weight. People should take action to
stop themselves from becoming obese; for example, by going on a diet or taking more
exercise. A more active lifestyle will help people to burn off the extra calories.

For children, fast food companies must take some blame for obesity in society because they
often sell high-fat food in oversize portions. They should offer healthier alternatives and label
their food with its calorie content. Ready-made meals are very popular but these are not
always the healthiest choices. People should cook more of their own food so that they know
what has gone into it.

I think that obesity in children is the fault of the parents. Children should not be exposed to
unhealthy high-fat foods too early in life or be allowed to develop a ‘sweet tooth’. A visit to a
fast-food restaurant should be an occasional treat rather than a regular eating habit. It is also
important that schools encourage healthy eating in children by providing tasty, healthy food at
lunchtime. If young people can make the right nutritional choices then obesity will not be a
problem for society.

Writing Book Page- 247

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 08:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Many people say that the only way to guarantee getting a good job is to complete a
course of university education. Others claim that it is better to start work after school
and gain experience in the world of work.
Discuss both notions and give your opinion.

Sample response:

University education has always been the goal for a good number of people. It is probably true
to say that most people believe that a university degree is the only way to get a good job. I
think this is true in certain areas, while in other areas, a degree is not as useful.

To begin with, many people have ambitions to become a qualified professional, and there is
no doubt that becoming a doctor or a lawyer, for example, is only possible with a degree.
Another advantage of graduating from university is that it gives you more choices when it
comes to choosing a job. Most employers will be more impressed by a candidate who has a
degree than they would be by one who only has high school qualifications because it shows a
certain level of intelligence and education, as well as the commitment and self-discipline that
is needed in order to study a degree course for three or four years.

On the other hand, there might be some benefit to starting your career early, especially if your
chosen field is one which does not typically require a university education. This would apply to
somebody who wants to be a car mechanic, or a fashion designer. For instance, who would
not necessarily gain anything from going to university. The hands-on experience you gain in
your job while others are studying for a degree can give you a distinct advantage. I once read
about a man who left school at sixteen and went on to become a wealthy and successful
investment broker. He claimed that he had learned all he needed to know by working in his
chosen field and that he could not have done any better by getting a degree.

So, to conclude, it is possible to get a good job without going to university. Having said that,
some professions, such as the law, require you to have a degree and as stated above a
university degree could potentially open more doors when looking for a job.

Writing Book Page- 248

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 09:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people believe that song lyrics which glorify violence and criminal lifestyles
should be banned.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of such a ban.

Sample response:

During the past few decades, people have argued at length about the usefulness and
appropriateness of songs that condone violence and give celebrity status to criminals and
their lifestyles. Some suggest that a ban on all such songs would be the only suitable
measure; others, however, disagree. But what would be the advantages and disadvantages
should the government decide to pass such a law?

One potential advantage of a ban on such song lyrics is immediately apparent: young people,
whose personalities are particularly malleable, wouldn't be exposed to songs that might
influence them to commit criminal or otherwise violent acts. Additionally, as such songs
usually target minorities such as women and gay people (essentially committing the crime of
hate speech), a ban would be a small step towards protecting those minorities, whose rights
are so often neglected by the state.

There are, however, quite a few disadvantages as well. A blanket ban on songs with such
content would contravene artists' right to freedom of speech, one of the most cherished rights
in the world of entertainment and art. This would be especially troublesome as violent lyrics
are usually found in rap and hip hop, two music styles that are directly linked to already
disenfranchised communities, and a ban like this would most probably put a strain on the
relationship between the government and these groups. Finally, as there is no scientifically
proven link between being exposed to art that propagates crime and violence and actually
committing crimes and violence, a ban might not even achieve its most basic goal of bringing
crime numbers down.

To sum up, a ban on song lyrics that promote violence and criminal acts would protect the
minorities that are often targeted by these songs, for instance women and gay people.
However, it would also inflame feelings of anger in the groups commonly associated with such
music and exacerbate their relationship with the government, as well as constitute an
infringement on artists' right to freedom of speech.

Writing Book Page- 249

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 10:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people believe that children should be made disciplined by making them obey
rules and do what their parents and teachers want them to do. Others, however, believe
that those children who are controlled are not well prepared to tackle the challenges
life brings to them.
Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The question here is whether discipline promotes learning and creates the right ambience for
a child's growth. Some people believe it does. Others believe it does not. Both schools of
thought have arguments of their own. So, there is a little bit of truth on both sides, but only up
to a point.

On the one side of the spectrum are those that believe by obeying rules children become
better citizens and better people. They do not fall into bad company, do not go astray and
become more focused. Take the case of children coming out of broken families. Since they
had nobody at home to check their errant behavior and channel their energies, since they had
nobody to guide them along the right path, at times they graduate from minor misdemeanours
to serious crimes.

On the other hand, others believe children who are controlled become inhibited and rote
learners. They come to depend on elders in the family for every decision governing course of
their lives. They come to develop a sheltered mentality and are scared of making mistakes.
When they grow up, they will not be innovative and creative. They might even be unable to
take decisions on their own. When an unexpected situation arises, they will be at a loss.

I am of the considered opinion that every child should be free to commit mistakes and learn
from them. Only that such freedom too should be in moderation. Elders in the family should
desist from handholding but draw a line, giving the child all the freedom until he crosses the
line. While serious indiscipline leads to bad behaviour and disregard for others, too much of
discipline restricts the freedom and creativity of the child. Let the child feel free in between.

Writing Book Page- 250

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 11:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

We always say that there is a generation gap and there always will be.
What causes generation gap? Is there no way to strike a balance in the relations
between two generations?

Sample response:

Nowadays, a generation gap is not something unheard of or uncommon. People across the
globe constantly struggle to strike a balance between the traditions of the past and the
perspectives of the present. This constant tussle between what is right and wrong often leads
to disagreements and, consequently, strained relationships.

Generation gap is primarily caused due to a difference in opinion between individuals

belonging to different generations, for instance, between parents and children. While, on one
hand, parents feel that their experience in life should serve as a guiding force, children, on the
other, are exposed to different ideas through their interaction with the world and want their
views to be respected. What was once deemed appropriate transforms over time as society
keep developing dynamically. Therefore, the mindset and attitude of the young tend to differ
radically from those of their parents which, inevitably, leads to arguments and
unpleasantness.

Most of the times, it is easy to address an issue pertaining to such conflicting views if both the
parties are willing to listen and understand the each other's perspective. For instance, parents
should be willing to give their children the choice to opt for a career they are passionate about
rather than forcing them to pick one that they desire for their children. Choices, in terms of
personal relationships, must also always be personal and accepted by all family members
irrespective of the generation. The younger generation could be more accommodating and
respectful when following customs and traditions followed by their parents.

In conclusion, this conflict between the traditional and the modern can easily be resolved if the
opinions are mutually embraced. I reiterate that communication plays a vital role in bridging
the generation gap. If approached with understanding, compassion, love and flexibility, a
balance, even though precarious, may still be created.

Writing Book Page- 251

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 12:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

It is becoming more and more difficult to escape the influence of the media on our
lives. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of living in a media-rich society.

Sample response:

The media is about communication, and I suppose most of us would agree that, as human
beings, we need to communicate. We need to know what is going on in the world generally;
we want to be entertained and to keep in touch with people. Older media, such as
newspapers, radio and TV help us do this, but the newer media, particularly the internet and
mobile phones, go further. We have more choice in terms of what we watch or who we talk to.
The benefits of the media cannot be denied. People have mobile phones which allow them -
just by using one device - to make phone calls, use the internet, listen to music, play games
and watch videos. And it is all immediate, and portable. It makes one feel in control and that is
exactly what has alluded us for a long time. The profound impact of the media in our lives has
made it also possible to advance, not only in terms of infrastructure, but also in terms of
communication and dissemination of information.

On the other hand, there are problems too. People are always texting and emailing each other
and if they don't have their phone or laptop around, they feel cut off. Also, have you seen a
group of teenagers in a cafe where they're not talking to each other, but using their phones?
It's a very common sight these days, which many people feel is worrying, as we seem to
prefer using technology to face-to-face communication.

We are also spoilt for choice - perhaps too much choice. There are so many TV channels, but
so many of the programmes are poor quality. There's also so much advertising all around us,
trying to persuade us to buy things we don't really need. To survive in such a society, you
have to be very aware of the power the media can have over you, your actions and your
opinions, and try not to let it control your life.

To my mind, there's no doubt we live in a media-rich society, and there's nothing we can do
about that. What we can do is use the media responsibly and not let it use us.

Writing Book Page- 252

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 13:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

In some countries young people have little leisure time and are under a lot of pressure
to work hard on their studies.
What do you think are the causes of this? What solutions can you suggest?

Sample response:

Some young people find themselves with very little leisure time. I believe there are two main
causes of this situation- the first is parental pressure and the second is competition for
university places, while there are also some effective solutions.

Every parent wants to see his or her child do well in school and go on to have a successful
career. This means that they exert pressure on their children to spend hours each day
studying at home. Some even arrange extra tuition for their children. In my own country, it is
not uncommon for young people to spend another three hours at small private schools after
their usual day at state school is over. As a consequence, their leisure time is extremely
limited and the pressure on them is considerable. The second cause is related to the higher
education system. Each year, there are many times more applicants to university than there
are university places. The result of this is that only those students with very high grades
manage to obtain a place. This contributes to the pressure on teenagers, since they must
work long hours to have any chance of success.

Regarding the solutions, one solution to the problem is for parents to be made aware of the
effects of the pressure they put on their children. Schools should inform parents that too much
pressure can lead to anxiety, stress and depression. They should be shown ways in which
they can help their children lead more balanced lives, with a reasonable amount of leisure
time. Another effective measure would be for the government to invest in the creation of more
university places. This could be done by expanding existing universities or by building new
ones. This would have the effect of casing competition for places, giving teenagers some of
their precious free time back.

Overall, one can very well deduce that this a growing concern for young people. While there
are the usual causes, there are some meaningful ways to overcome the problems too.

Writing Book Page- 253

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 14:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

As mass communication and transport continue to grow, societies are becoming more
and more alike leading to a phenomenon known as globalisation. Some people fear that
globalisation will inevitably lead to the total loss of cultural identity.
To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement?

Sample response:

Globalisation means that in some ways people around the world are becoming more and
more similar. We often cat the same food, watch the same TV programmes, listen to the same
music and we wear the same clothes. Some of this, in my opinion, at least can be blamed on
the spread of multinational brands available all over the world.

On the surface, it may appear as if the global diversity of cultural identities is being lost. If, the
argument goes, people in Tokyo and London look and dress the same, then that must mean
that cultural differences are disappearing. However, I would argue that this is a very narrow
definition of culture and that, in fact, cultural differences are as present as ever.

Cultural identity is built on far more than just the films we watch or the jeans we wear. The
foundation of cultural identity is shared values. When you look in detail at different cultures,
you realise that the things that are important to one culture can be very different from the
things valued by another culture.

Take my own culture, Greece, as an example and compare it to a very different culture,
Japan. Although I have never visited Japan personally, I believe that it is a culture which
places a lot of value- on hard work and that people often work very long hours. The Greek
people, in contrast, greatly value their leisure time and strive to spend as much time with their
family as they possibly can. Even if we consume the same products, I would argue that there
are still some very deep-rooted differences.

To summarise, I do not accept that the total loss of cultural identity is inevitable, despite the
influence of large companies and their products around the globe.

Writing Book Page- 254

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 15:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Governments and business leaders in all countries are trying to improve levels of
production in the workplace. Some believe the best way to do this is to increase pay.
Others believe that pay is less important than other factors, like the working
environment.
Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The productivity of workers is essential to boosting the competitiveness of companies and

economic growth. But the best way to achieve greater productivity is a question of debate.
There are views relating to pay increases affecting productivity while others think that other
factors are more important in this regard. I believe the latter opinion too, as will be discussed
in following paragraphs.

Many would argue that pay is by far the simplest solution. Financial rewards can be linked to
obtaining performance targets, and such incentives have long been known to make people
work harder. Furthermore, rewarding staff with pay is an effective way of making workers feel
that their efforts are valued, increasing their commitment. Finally, in the modern world, there is
downward pressure on pay due to competition and the availability of cheap labour from other
countries, so workers are likely to respond to financial incentives in this climate.

Yet there are those who believe that pay is not the most effective way to raise production. It
can make people resentful of colleagues and undermine collaboration, and it can also attract
people who are concerned with rewards rather than those who love their job and enjoy
teamwork. It would be better, then, to develop commitment between colleagues by creating
social areas or invest in teambuilding events, for example, or to improve training. This will
increase the exchange of ideas and make workers feel they are free to take risks rather than
simply follow the steps that will lead to reward.

In my view, the arguments against increasing pay seem to show a greater understanding of
both business and personal needs, and I would recommend that employers focus on building
stronger relationships at work. Finally, I believe that a workplace is not only directed by
monetary benefits and to decide on this without considering other factors only limit our vision
of workplace culture and norms.

Writing Book Page- 255

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 16:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
As greater numbers of people move to cities and as cities expand in size, city life loses
its appeal.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

In many parts of the world, people are flooding into cities looking for work and what they think
will be a better life. This influx is not only a recent phenomenon, it has been happening for a
good part of the last few decades. I believe this has added to the complexities of life in the
cities, but life in the city itself has not lost the appeal it had.

People all over the world have started to shift to cities and this has affected life in some
problematic ways. This is especially true in developing countries, and cities like Rio de
Janeiro, Mexico City and Shanghai are expanding all the time. As a result, cities become more
congested and polluted, and various aspects of life are more stressful. Travelling from one
side of the city to the other can take hours and buses, trains and roads are often very
crowded. Accommodation is very expensive and ordinary people have no hope of ever buying
their own house or apartment. There is often a higher level of crime in overcrowded cities and
people feel less safe in the streets. Big cities can lack enough parks or other green open
spaces where people can relax and you also have to put up with air and noise pollution, as
well as dirt and litter making the environment unpleasant to live and work in.

Despite all these drawbacks, I'm not sure that city life has lost its appeal - not for the majority
of people anyway. Most people who move to cities do so due to economic necessity. People
can earn far more in cities than they can working on farms in the country. For these people,
city life is still very appealing. As a matter of fact, for these people, city life is the obvious
choice, not only for their own growth but also for their family’s survival. Also, city life has just
more to offer, compared to life in rural areas. For example, anyone living in any busy part of
the world has a vast range of attractions and entertainment to enjoy such as interesting shops,
museums and other facilities that make life more exciting and stimulating. In many poorer
countries, cities offer people a taste of life they have never experienced. Certain areas only
attract them and the fascination of a better paid job or business initiative, alongside a more
interesting life and attractions only make people more leaning to a life in the cities.

Finally, yes there is an increasing array of disadvantages because of the dramatic shift of
people to the cities, but that simply cannot take away the glitz and pull city lives offer. People
seek benefits not only in terms of opportunities but also extrinsic merits too.

Writing Book Page- 256

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 17:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Increasing numbers of people are starting new careers half way through their working
lives.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of changing careers?

Sample response:

Many people now work until they are 70, meaning that people often have working lives in
excess of 50 years. With such long careers, it is not surprising that many people now
frequently change their career. This essay will discuss the positive and negative
consequences of making such a change.

There are a number of disadvantages to changing your career midway through. Firstly, any
career change often requires retraining, which can be both expensive and time consuming. In
addition to this, people's salary often falls as they have to take an entry-level position,
whereas previously they may have been in a more senior position. Finally, depending on the
stage of the applicant's life, some employers may be averse to hiring an older person in a
lower-level position.

While these are valid concerns, there are also numerous advantages to changing professions.
After a long period of time in one field, people can often become bored and unmotivated. The
job is so familiar that it is no longer challenging or stimulating. By changing career, people's
interest in their work can be raised and they can feel reinvigorated. This new positive feeling
can have a favourable impact on many parts of someone's life. It may also allow people to
move away from a career that they chose whilst young and with very little knowledge of what
they actually wanted to do.

In conclusion, while changing careers can be time consuming and expensive, it can also make
people feel more engaged with their working life. By not feeling depressed or uninterested in
their work, it may also give them a more positive outlook on life in general. It should therefore
be encouraged.

Writing Book Page- 257

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 18:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

In some societies, obesity is regarded as a major problem. Some people believe that
junk food advertising is largely to blame for this problem and should be banned.
However, others feel that junk food advertising does not contribute to the problem of
obesity and should not be banned.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

There is strong evidence to suggest that obesity is a growing problem in many countries of the
world. In fact, it would appear that the problem starts in childhood with many children
becoming fatter because they are eating junk food, in other words diets containing too much
salt, sugar and fat. These eating habits continue into adulthood. It is a very worrying trend
indeed.

Many people, including doctors and teachers believe that junk food advertising should be
banned because they encourage people to eat 'bad' food such as fizzy drinks and chocolate
bars. They think that advertising to children is effective and influences what they choose to
buy and eat. They believe that children should be encouraged to eat healthier foods such as
fruit and vegetables and argue that there should be advertisements for healthier options on TV
and on the internet.

However, other people say that junk food advertising does not contribute to the problem of
obesity. They feel that the problem of obesity is caused in large part by the fact that people
are less physically active now compared with the past. They think that people of all ages live a
more sedentary lifestyle where it is rare for them to walk any distance. Moreover, they also
believe that banning advertising of junk food would simply make such foods more desirable.

In my opinion, the idea of banning the advertising of junk food for children is well-meaning but
it falls short of actually helping children and parents. Educating people young and old about
how to build a balanced diet and enjoy a healthy, active lifestyle is the best way forward.

Writing Book Page- 258

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 19:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

In modern life, there is an increasing range of health risks, from poor air quality to
traffic accidents and fatty foods.
Which risks are the most difficult to protect people against, and what steps can
individuals take to protect themselves?

Sample response:

These days, we are exposed to a growing range of threats to our health. There are also
various reasons behind these dangers, leading to many researches on these topics. This
essay will decide which of these threats is most difficult to protect against and ask what we
can do to protect ourselves from them.

One of the most difficult issues is air pollution. For the many people who live and work by busy
roads, it is almost impossible to shield them from it. This is especially true in poor countries
where traders work informally in the streets, cleaning cars and selling to drivers. Wearing
masks can help reduce these effects, though they can be costly.

Traffic is also increasing the risk to our safety, and cyclists and pedestrians face many
dangers as they attempt to use ever-more congested transport networks. While wearing a
helmet might constitute a fairly simple safety measure, there are limits to how far protective
clothing can actually protect you when faced with the power of a bus or lorry.

High-calorie food is a further modern threat. It is very difficult to change people's eating habits,
and such foods have become a central part of our diets now, affecting young people
especially. In contrast to air pollution, this issue is as big a problem in richer parts of the world.
Individuals can either try to exercise more to combat weight gain or experiment with diets, but
attempts to vary lifestyle are often short-lived.

In conclusion, traffic and diet are the two most intractable problems of our age. The extent to
which individuals can protect themselves from both will largely depend on whether they have
the financial resources and perhaps education to respond to the threats.

Writing Book Page- 259

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 20:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

In many parts of the world girls and boys are educated together in co-educational or
mixed schools. Some people think that girls and boys benefit from being educated
separately in single-sex schools.
To what extent do you agree with this view?

Sample response:

In many countries boys and girls are educated together in mixed schools from primary through
to secondary level. It is no doubt true that educating children in this way reflects the reality of
the world outside the classroom. Co-educational schools give the two sexes the chance to mix
and feel easy in each other's company and that is a good preparation and foundation for
adulthood.

However, many people think that boys and girls can achieve more by being educated
separately. They believe that single-sex schools offer children the opportunity to concentrate
on their school work. They claim that in mixed schools, boys and girls spend too much time
trying to attract each other instead of focusing attention on their subjects. As a result they
have lese opportunity to reach their full academic potential.

However, in my opinion there is just as much distraction in a single-sex school as in a mixed

school. Students in single-sex schools will still wish to impress their peers but in their case it
will be members of the same sex. It could also be argued that the choice of subjects open to
students in a single-sex school may be more traditional, limited and restricted compared to
those offered in a mixed environment. For example, it may be more difficult for boys to choose
subjects such as dance or languages in a single-sex school where pressures against them
from other boys would be stronger.

In conclusion, I believe that co-educational schools provide both girls and boys with equal
opportunities. Both sexes therefore have chances to develop the academic and social skills
they need to live and work alongside each other in adult life.

Writing Book Page- 260

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 21:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Modern media, like documentaries and virtual reality, let us experience other countries
without travelling to them. Long-distance travel has therefore become unnecessary.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?
Sample response:

Technology has helped bring the rest of the world into our living room and continues to do so.
Not only can we watch documentaries and videos about the remotest regions of the world, we
can even gain realistic experiences of other places through virtual reality. But impressive as
these developments are, I believe that there will never be a substitute for real travel for
several simple reasons.
First, travel gives people time to lose themselves in a new environment, perhaps for many
months. This enables them to immerse themselves in another culture and develop language
skills, new ways of thinking and generally have more profound experiences. Occasional
contact with other cultures through media is unlikely to have a long-term effect on our skills or
our thinking.
Secondly, travel is riot simply about the place; it is also a social experience. Whether we travel
in groups or alone, an experience in a foreign country can help us to bond closely with travel
companions or even with members of local populations, perhaps while sampling local food
and drink. Such valuable personal interactions cannot be gained from consumption of digital
entertainment.
Finally, the travel industry supports livelihoods worldwide. Locals gain valuable income from
tourist arrivals, and travel and transport companies clearly depend on our willingness to travel.
Such movement has helped many parts of the world to become integrated with the global
economy and achieve a higher standard of living. Entertainment, by comparison, simply swells
the profits of already-wealthy media companies.
On the other hand, some people may choose to attest to the opposite view simply because of
notion that travelling has become more expensive day by day. Attaining a foreign holiday or
even one in the home country may not be possible for some. Also, even though the visits may
be carefully planned out, the security concerns relating to travels may discourage some from
traveling in the first place. Contrary to this view, I hold the belief that nothing beats the thrill of
an actual experience and that this trumps every single point on the other side.
In conclusion, the idea that technology may replace travel fails to take into account the
wonderful opportunities that travel provides for both personal and economic development. It is
a simple choice, in my opinion and it is driven by the idea of experience over distance viewing.

Writing Book Page- 261

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 22:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people think that the fictional violence portrayed on television is harmless
entertainment. Others disagree and think that it encourages violent behaviour.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

Watching television is a normal part of everyday life for people of all ages. It enables us to
relax and enjoy a variety of programmes in a comfortable and safe environment. It can also be
argued that it brings families and friends together, providing a source of conversation. In my
opinion, these are all good reasons to watch TV.

However, there is no doubt that there is a lot of violence portrayed on TV. Even children's
cartoons such as Tom and Jerry can feature examples of violence. A child can watch Jerry
close the lid of a piano on Tom's hands and see him in pain. However, I think that children can
tell the difference between fantasy and reality. In this case, they know that Tom will recover
quickly because it is not real. Watching such a scene will have no influence at all on a child's
behaviour.

It is understandable that parents worry about the amount of violent scenes that feature in
dramas and films. And there can be no doubt that fights and shooting are often part of an
average evening's entertainment. Many people believe that as a society has become more
violent and that we have become more used to violence. However, parents can exert control
over the amount of exposure their children have to the violent content and so any negative
effects can be reduced.

In conclusion, I think that violence is a reality in our society these days and TV needs to reflect
that reality. As long as people discuss the violence that is portrayed on TV with their children
and keep an open mind about what they are viewing, violent behaviour will not result.

Writing Book Page- 262

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 23:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Concern for the environment is growing rapidly and more and more people are
choosing to be 'eco-tourists' – travelling in responsible, environmentally-friendly ways.
As a result, the eco-tourism industry is expanding.
To what extent do you think this is a positive trend?

Sample response:

Eco-tourism is definitely becoming more popular. More and more people are interested in
travelling in a responsible way in order to help protect both the geographical areas they visit
and at the same time show respect to the local inhabitants who live there. In my opinion,
however, it is debatable whether this can be regarded as a wholly positive development.

Because eco-tourism is so popular, many travel companies claim to be environmentally-

friendly simply to I attract business. For example, some hotels claim to be 'eco-lodges' simply
because they have a good view. However, they may be making no effort to conserve
resources and limit waste. Wildlife safari trips are often described as 'eco-tours' even if they
give nothing back to the local ecology and, instead of contributing to conservation, they may in
fact cause problems to an area's wildlife. For example, some animals and birds may be
disturbed by tourists approaching them too closely. In my opinion, just because a holiday
focuses on nature that doesn't make it eco-tourism.

There are, however, some good examples of eco-tourism. For example, staying in a homestay
instead of a large hotel means that the costs of your accommodation goes straight back into
the community. Most homestay arrangements include meals so this means that local suppliers
will benefit from your stay.

In conclusion, I think that the growth of eco-tourism is a positive trend but we need to make
sure the term is fully understood by the travel companies, the local communities and the
tourists themselves. Eco-tourism should minimise the negative effects of tourism and truly
contribute to conservation efforts. This means co-operating with local people so that they can
manage these natural areas.

Writing Book Page- 263

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 24:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Concern for the environment is growing and more and more people are choosing to
recycle. But some people suggest that recycling is not enough. They believe we need
to consume less.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

More and more of us are recycling. In fact, we can see recycling bins everywhere - on street
corners and outside supermarkets - with different coloured bins for different products from
glass bottles to clothing. We also have constant reminders to separate our newspapers and
tin cans by way of advertisements and leaflets reinforcing the message. But it is debatable
whether the environmental benefits of recycling are really worth the cost.

The cost of recycling all our used goods is increasing. These costs include the cost of
collecting, sorting and reprocessing all the materials. Some people say that these costs are
justified because recycling helps reduce the amount of waste sent to landfill sites where
rubbish is buried forever. However, it is important to remember that many landfill sites have
few negative environmental impacts and there is no practical limit on the amount of waste that
can be stored.

Some people believe we need to focus more on the amount of waste we are producing in the
first place. They think that advertisements promoting recycling should be replaced by those
encouraging us as consumers to buy no more than we need Supermarkets should stop using
promotions that tempt us into buying three cans of soup for the same price as two. They
should also stop giving customers plastic bags free of charge.

In conclusion, think that we should focus much more attention on the amount of waste we are
producing than on the amount of waste we are recycling. The most important thing is for us to
change the way we shop and what we consume in the first place.

Writing Book Page- 264

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 25:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people are concerned that children spend too much time on computers-playing
games, chatting and watching videos. But all this time is actually good preparation for
children, who will have to spend many hours working on computers throughout their
education and their working lives.
To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement?

Sample response:

The world is online. Everyone is using computers for business and pleasure. There is growing
concern about the effects this has on children. They spend many hours on the computer
playing games, chatting and watching videos. Valuable childhood hours are spent sitting
indoors opposite a computer screen instead of playing outdoors and running free.

Many people argue that the time children spend online is actually very good for them. They
say that children have to prepare themselves for their higher education and working lives.
Therefore, the time they spend is actually helping them gain the computer skills they need in
order to become productive adults.

In my opinion, there are advantages and disadvantages to children spending a lot of time
using computers. It is clear that children need computer skills to further their education.
However, there is a difference between time spent playing computer games and chatting and
the time spent working on school projects or doing online research. It is important to recognize
that the online world is huge and offers limitless opportunities that are both useful and harmful.
Parents play a very important role in supervising the online activities of their children. It is their
job to check the sites they are visiting and the games they are playing. It is also their duty to
limit the number of hours that children spend in front of the computer. There are so many
wonderful activities for children that don't involve the computer. Parents have to make sure
that their children have a variety of interests outside the computer world.

In conclusion, it is clear that children today must be computer literate in order to succeed in
life. But we have to remember that children should also experience many other joys of life that
make childhood so special. It's possible to balance this out and make sure that children gain
important computer skills and still enjoy the pleasures of childhood.

Writing Book Page- 265

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 26:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Some people think that recent innovations in technology have made life more
comfortable and helped us to be more efficient by saving us time, while others argue
that technology has made us less efficient.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

Technology has existed as long as mankind has, but the pace of technological innovation has
never been as fast as it is nowadays. New gadgets which promise to make life easier and
more comfortable are launched on a daily basis. We are coaxed into buying electronic devices
by high-tech companies which promise that their technologies can help us become more
efficient.

On the one hand, it is true that technology makes life more comfortable. It is hard to imagine
life without such appliances as the vacuum cleaner or the washing machine. The invention of
the microchip has enabled engineers to shrink electronic devices to the sizes which make
them practical to use. Huge computers which used to take up an entire room in 1950s have
evolved into tiny pocket-size devices which are infinitely more complex than their early
prototypes. Communication technologies such as the Internet enable us to be connected 24
hours a day, seven days a week.

On the other hand, technology is a major cause of stress for those who rely heavily on it. The
more complex technological inventions become, the more prone they are to malfunctioning.
For example, a broken hard drive can cause a disruption to a project or can bring it to a
complete halt for days or even weeks. As technologies become more sophisticated, people
need spend more time learning how to use them. Quite often by the time technology users
have figured out to use an invention, a new technology comes along to replace the old one,
and they cycle begins again.

In conclusion, technological inventions do make life more comfortable. However, I do not

believe they make us more effective or efficient unless we learn how to use them properly,
which is rarely the case.

Writing Book Page- 266

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 27:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

For a long time there has been concern about the quality of the food we eat because of
additives and contaminants. Recently, genetically modified food is becoming more
common and is causing concern.
Is this concern justified or not?

Sample response:

Many people today are concerned about the quality of the food they eat. This concern has led
to an increasing number of organic products appearing on supermarket shelves. Many people
refuse to buy products that contain artificial colourings or preservatives, or foods that come
from genetically modified crops, fearing that these foods are unhealthy and can cause cancer
and other diseases Some advocates of genetically modified (GM) food consider such attitudes
unjustified. I am one of them, and in this essay I will try to justify why I think concerns about
GM foods have little merit.

First of all, GM foods have been around for almost 20 years. Contrary to the claims of those
opposed to GM foods, there have not been any registered cases of such foods causing
cancer or any other diseases. In fact, research into GM foods has been unable to confirm any
harmful effects on human health whatsoever.

Secondly, not everyone can afford organic foods. Climate change and rising fuel costs have
led to global increases in the price of food, and as a result, many poor people are spending
more money on feeding themselves. Many can barely afford to buy food. GM plants are
generally more resistant to droughts, floods and pests, and have higher yields per hectare,
which leads to more affordable prices.

The world population keeps growing and is expected to reach eight billion by 2015. People in
fast-developing countries such as India and China are consuming more energy and food. The
only practical solution to the ever-increasing demand for food is to grow more GM crops.
Unless scientists and governments come up with a better solution, GM foods are here to stay.
To conclude, people are free to eat the food of their choice, be it organic or not. However, I
think that many people overlook the major benefits of GM foods, and instead choose to focus
on the unproven negative effects of such food.

Writing Book Page- 267

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 28:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

Students nowadays can get large quantities of information from mobile phones.
Despite this, many people think that they should not be allowed to use them in the
classroom.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

For young people, mobile phones have become not only the main tool of communication but a
valuable tool for gaining information. It therefore makes absolute sense, at least to me, to
allow this educational tool in the classroom.

Those who disagree would say that the ability of a teacher to control a class will be affected if
students can use their phones. For example, they might check social media pages, chat with
friends and generally disrupt lessons. This is a valid concern, but there are ways that teachers
can get around this problem. Mobile phones could be permitted at certain times of the lesson
and not others, so that when a teacher needs to gain the attention of class members, they are
able to do so. The teacher could also insist that class members use mobile devices in pairs to
reduce the chance that students will check their personal messages.

Besides, there are a whole range of advantages. Use of mobiles is more stimulating than
textbooks or reference materials and will therefore engage students more in lessons.
Admittedly, some modern classrooms will have equipment like tablet PCs and whiteboards,
but students will enjoy using a tool that is familiar to them and which they are able to control
easily. Allowing them to use their own equipment will prepare them better for independent
study too and make them feel that they are in control of their learning.

In conclusion, while every classroom is different and while some groups of students will
behave more responsibly than others, we should nevertheless find ways to permit use of
mobiles in the classroom. It is the responsibility of the teachers to find ways of doing this that
will encourage students to use this tool responsibly.

Writing Book Page- 268

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 29:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people like to spend their leisure time with their colleagues, while others prefer
to keep their private life separate from their work life.
Is it a good thing to spend leisure time with a colleague?

Sample response:
The allure of work relationships transcends the clock for many, prompting the question: is it
beneficial to spend leisure time with colleagues? While some advocate for clear boundaries,
others find joy and connection in shared downtime. Ultimately, the decision hinges on
individual preferences and navigating potential pitfalls.
Proponents of socializing with colleagues highlight the advantages of fostering camaraderie
and teamwork. Shared experiences outside the office build rapport, leading to greater
understanding and empathy. This translates into smoother communication and collaboration
back at work, enhancing both individual and team performance. Additionally, colleagues often
share common interests and hobbies, creating a natural springboard for enjoyable leisure
activities.
However, concerns exist about blurring the lines between professional and personal spheres.
Work-related discussions outside the office can bleed into relaxation time, hindering genuine
detachment and potentially leading to burnout. Furthermore, office dynamics and politics can
create discomfort, especially if colleagues have conflicting personalities or opinions. This can
negatively impact workplace morale and cohesion.
Personally, I believe the answer lies in finding a balance. Engaging in occasional leisure
activities with colleagues fosters connection and enjoyment, provided boundaries are
respected. Prioritizing activities unrelated to work and ensuring the group dynamic feels
inclusive are crucial. Additionally, acknowledging individual differences and opting out of
uncomfortable situations are essential for maintaining a healthy work-life balance.
In conclusion, whether or not to spend leisure time with colleagues is a personal choice. While
the potential benefits of stronger bonds and improved teamwork are enticing, it's crucial to
navigate personal boundaries and office dynamics carefully. Finding a balance that allows for
genuine connection without compromising work-life separation is key to reaping the rewards
of this unique relationship dynamic.

Writing Book Page- 269

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 30:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Fewer and fewer people today write by hand using a pen or pencil.
What are the reasons for this?
Is this a positive or a negative development?

Sample response:

The rhythmic scratch of a pen on paper, once a ubiquitous soundtrack to learning and
communication, is fading in our digital era. Fewer people choose to express themselves
through the tactile dance of pen and ink, opting instead for the efficiency and ease of digital
keyboards. While the reasons for this shift are clear, the consequences, both positive and
negative, necessitate a nuanced discussion.

The most evident factor driving the decline of handwriting is the rise of technology.
Smartphones and laptops offer instant communication, seamless editing, and effortless
duplication, tasks cumbersome with pen and paper. Furthermore, educational systems, once
bastions of penmanship, now prioritize keyboard proficiency, reflecting the demands of the
digital workplace. This shift in emphasis disincentivizes the development and practice of good
handwriting.

The convenience and speed offered by digital tools are undeniable benefits. Students can
capture notes faster, professionals can collaborate across continents with ease, and the world
enjoys instant access to information. However, the decline of handwriting carries hidden costs.
Studies suggest that writing by hand improves cognitive function, memory, and even
creativity. The physical act of forming letters engages neural pathways differently than typing,
potentially leading to deeper understanding and information retention. Moreover, the personal
touch of a handwritten note or letter carries an emotional weight that digital communication
often lacks.

Personally, I believe the decline of handwriting represents a loss, but not a complete tragedy.
Technology offers undeniable advantages, and adapting to the changing world is crucial.
However, I advocate for a balanced approach. Integrating handwriting practice into daily life,
even for simple tasks like journaling or note-taking, can reap cognitive and emotional benefits.
Schools can incorporate dedicated penmanship exercises alongside keyboarding skills.
Ultimately, technology and tradition can coexist, enriching our lives through both digital
efficiency and the enduring power of the written word.

Writing Book Page- 270

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 31:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
These days more people put their personal information, such as names, addresses and
telephone numbers, online for everyday activities such as socializing on social
networks or banking purposes.
Do you think it is a positive or negative development?

Sample response:
The digital age has ushered in an era where personal information, once carefully guarded, is
readily shared online. From social media profiles to online banking details, individuals willingly
expose names, addresses, and phone numbers for everyday activities. While this trend offers
undeniable convenience, it raises concerns about the potential dangers associated with such
digital footprints. In my opinion, the tradeoff between ease and security requires a nuanced
approach, with individual awareness and responsible data management playing crucial roles.

On the one hand, sharing personal information online offers undeniable advantages. Social
media platforms, for example, rely on this data to facilitate communication and connection.
Sharing contact details can strengthen relationships, connect families across borders, and
even provide professional networking opportunities. Additionally, online banking and shopping
platforms streamline processes by pre-filling forms with stored information, saving valuable
time and effort. This convenience factor is particularly appealing in our fast-paced lives.

However, the ease of sharing online comes at a cost. Personal information can be misused or
stolen by malicious actors, leading to identity theft, financial fraud, and even physical harm.
Data breaches and hacking incidents are becoming increasingly common, exposing millions of
individuals' information. Moreover, oversharing personal details can attract unwanted attention
or stalking, particularly for vulnerable groups like children and young adults. The potential for
misuse makes this trend a double-edged sword.

Therefore, striking a balance between convenience and security is critical. Individuals must
practice responsible data management by carefully selecting which information they share
online. Limiting the amount of personal details on public profiles, using strong passwords, and
enabling two-factor authentication are essential steps. Additionally, understanding and utilizing
platform privacy settings empowers individuals to control the accessibility of their data.

In conclusion, sharing personal information online offers undeniable convenience but carries
significant security risks. While complete abstinence might not be practical in today's digital
world, adopting a cautious and responsible approach is essential. By prioritizing individual
awareness, strong data management, and robust regulations, we can navigate this online
landscape with both safety and convenience in mind.

Writing Book Page- 271

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 32:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

In many countries, students leave high school without learning how to manage their
money.

Why does this happen? What could be done to tackle the issue?

Sample response:

In many countries, students graduate from high school armed with academic knowledge but
woefully unprepared to navigate the complex world of personal finance. This lack of "financial
literacy" has far-reaching consequences, impacting individuals' ability to manage debt, save
for the future, and make informed financial decisions. I believe understanding the root causes
and potential solutions to this issue is crucial for empowering young people to make sound
choices and achieve financial stability.

One key reason for this gap is the traditional curriculum's focus on academics over practical
life skills. While subjects like mathematics and science are undeniably important, they often
overshadow essential skills like budgeting, debt management, and understanding financial
products. This emphasis on "hard" skills creates a blind spot when it comes to preparing
students for real-world financial challenges. Furthermore, many educators themselves may
lack sufficient financial literacy training, making it difficult for them to effectively integrate these
topics into their curriculum. Additionally, societal attitudes towards money can play a role, with
open discussions about finances sometimes seen as taboo. This can create a culture of
silence around financial matters, hindering students from seeking guidance and learning
through open communication.

Addressing this issue requires a multi-pronged approach. Integrating financial literacy into the
school curriculum is essential. This could involve dedicated courses, or incorporating financial
concepts into existing subjects like mathematics or social studies. Interactive learning
methods, such as budgeting simulations and guest speakers from financial institutions, can
make these topics more engaging and relevant for students. Beyond the classroom,
empowering families and communities to discuss money openly is crucial. Parents and
guardians can play a vital role by modeling healthy financial habits and involving children in
age-appropriate financial decisions. Community programs and workshops can also provide
valuable resources and support for families.

Finally, in my opinion, financial literacy should be considered a fundamental right, not a

privilege. By equipping students with the knowledge and skills to manage their finances
responsibly, we empower them to make informed choices, build secure futures, and contribute
positively to society.

Writing Book Page- 272

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 33:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
News reports in the media tend to focus more on problems and disasters than on
positive events. This is harmful to individuals and society as a whole.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?
Sample response:
The media landscape often paints a bleak picture of the world, saturating us with news of
conflict, disasters, and societal woes. While such information serves a vital function, the
question arises: does this negativity outweigh the need for positive narratives? This essay
argues that the media's focus on problems, while not entirely harmful, can create a distorted
perception of reality and hinder progress.
Undoubtedly, reporting on negative events serves a crucial purpose. It informs the public
about dangers, encourages action, and fosters empathy. Knowing about natural disasters
allows us to prepare and respond effectively. Exposing injustices can spark social change. In
this sense, negativity can be a catalyst for positive action.
However, excessive negativity can be detrimental. When bombarded with a constant stream
of bad news, individuals can develop feelings of helplessness, anxiety, and even cynicism.
This can lead to disengagement from social issues and a diminished sense of agency.
Furthermore, a focus solely on problems overlooks the positive strides humanity makes.
Scientific breakthroughs, acts of kindness, and community initiatives often go unreported,
creating a skewed perception of the world as inherently negative.
This negativity bias can also hinder progress. By focusing on the challenges, the media may
unintentionally downplay the possibilities for solutions. Without highlighting successful
initiatives and inspiring stories, the public might lack the belief that positive change is possible.
Therefore, it's crucial to strike a balance. The media should continue to report on significant
issues, but not at the expense of positive narratives. Uplifting stories of individuals overcoming
adversity, communities collaborating, and innovative solutions emerging serve as
counterpoints to negativity, offering hope and inspiration.
In my personal opinion, the media needs to be more conscious of its responsibility to present
a balanced view. This doesn't mean ignoring problems, but rather weaving them into a larger
narrative of human resilience, progress, and hope. By doing so, the media can empower
individuals, foster optimism, and become a driving force for positive change, rather than
simply reflecting the darkness.

Writing Book Page- 273

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 34:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Eco-tourism often involves visiting remote and fragile ecosystems, which raises
concerns about the impact on local cultures and indigenous communities.
What problems can this cause? How can these problems be resolved?
Sample response:
Ecotourism, the alluring prospect of responsible travel to pristine environments, often brings
us face-to-face with remote and fragile ecosystems, home to diverse indigenous communities.
While it holds the promise of environmental awareness and economic growth, the influx of
tourists can also pose significant challenges to these communities and their cultures.

One major concern lies in the potential commodification of culture. Indigenous traditions and
rituals, meant for internal cohesion and spiritual connection, can be transformed into mere
spectacles for tourist entertainment, leading to a loss of authenticity and respect. This can
create a sense of performativity, eroding the very essence of the culture. Additionally, the
pressure to cater to tourist preferences might lead to the dilution of traditional practices and
customs, risking cultural homogenization. Furthermore, increased tourism can disrupt
traditional livelihood practices. Reliance on tourism-related jobs can make communities
vulnerable to economic fluctuations, jeopardizing their self-sufficiency. Land use conflicts may
arise as tourism infrastructure expands, displacing communities from their ancestral lands and
affecting traditional resource management practices. This can lead to social unrest and a loss
of cultural identity.

Solutions require a multi-pronged approach. Firstly, community-based tourism models should

be encouraged, where indigenous communities have control over decision-making, ensuring
their voices are heard and their cultural integrity is protected. Secondly, b about the potential
negative impacts. Finally, sustainable practices like responsible waste management and eco-
friendly transportation must be implemented to minimize the environmental footprint.

Personally, I believe ecotourism has the potential to be a powerful force for good. By
prioritizing community involvement, responsible practices, and continuous dialogue, we can
create a model of tourism that benefits both travelers and indigenous communities, ensuring
cultural preservation and environmental sustainability. Only then can we truly say we are
walking the path of responsible exploration.

Writing Book Page- 274

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 35:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people say that too much attention and resources are given to the protection of
wild animals and birds.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:
The call for wildlife conservation has grown louder in recent years, prompting some to argue
that we're dedicating excessive attention and resources to protecting wild animals and birds.
While prioritizing human needs is undoubtedly crucial, I believe a complete dismissal of
wildlife protection ignores its inherent value and potential negative consequences of
neglecting it.
Admittedly, allocating significant resources towards conservation can appear burdensome,
especially when human populations grapple with poverty, healthcare, and education
challenges. However, dismissing the importance of wildlife protection is short-sighted. Firstly,
biodiversity is not just aesthetically pleasing, it's crucial for ecological balance. Each species
plays a role in maintaining healthy ecosystems, from pollinating plants to controlling pest
populations. Ignoring their decline can lead to cascading environmental problems that
ultimately impact human well-being.
Secondly, the economic value of healthy ecosystems cannot be understated. Tourism, eco-
friendly agriculture, and even medical research rely on flourishing wildlife populations. Ignoring
their decline could lead to significant economic losses in the long run.
However, striking a balance between human needs and wildlife protection is essential.
Focusing solely on protecting endangered species in remote areas while neglecting local
communities living alongside them can breed resentment and hinder conservation efforts.
Engaging local communities in conservation projects, ensuring they benefit from protected
areas, and addressing their concerns are crucial for sustainable solutions.
Personally, I believe the current level of attention towards wildlife protection is not necessarily
excessive, but it certainly needs to be optimized. By prioritizing strategic interventions,
promoting sustainable practices, and fostering local participation, we can achieve a balance
where human well-being and wildlife conservation go hand-in-hand. Ultimately, protecting the
natural world is not just about the animals, it's about protecting ourselves and the future
generations who will inherit this planet. Ignoring the intrinsic value and interconnectedness of
all lifeforms comes at a cost that we, as a species, cannot afford to ignore.

Writing Book Page- 275

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 36:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many countries, paying for things using a mobile phone is becoming increasingly
common.
Does this development have more advantages or disadvantages?

Sample response:
In today's rapidly evolving landscape, the humble mobile phone has morphed from a
communication device into an all-encompassing tool, including acting as a digital wallet for
contactless payments. While this trend toward mobile payment convenience offers undeniable
advantages, it also raises concerns that necessitate careful consideration.
Undoubtedly, the primary allure of mobile payments lies in their ease and speed. Gone are the
days of fumbling for loose change or swiping physical cards; a simple tap or scan is all it takes
to complete transactions. This efficiency streamlines everyday purchases, saving valuable
time and reducing checkout queues. Moreover, mobile wallets often offer loyalty programs
and cashback incentives, further enhancing the appeal for budget-conscious consumers.
However, the rise of this technology is not without its drawbacks. Security concerns remain a
significant hurdle. Despite encryption and authentication measures, data breaches and
cyberattacks continue to plague the digital realm, potentially exposing sensitive financial
information. Furthermore, the reliance on mobile technology raises concerns about
accessibility. Individuals without smartphones or reliable internet access risk exclusion from
this increasingly digitized payment system, potentially exacerbating social inequalities.
Personally, I believe the advantages of mobile payments outweigh the disadvantages, but with
caveats. The convenience and efficiency they offer are undeniable, particularly for those who
value speed and ease. However, ensuring robust security measures and promoting digital
literacy are crucial to mitigate risks and prevent exclusion. Striking a balance between
technological advancement and inclusivity will be essential for fostering a truly equitable and
secure mobile payment ecosystem.
Ultimately, the debate surrounding mobile payments reflects the broader challenges of
technological progress. While embracing innovation unlocks exciting possibilities, it is
imperative to acknowledge and address the potential downsides to ensure that everyone
benefits from the evolving landscape. In conclusion, while mobile payments offer significant
advantages, responsible development and inclusive access are key to maximizing their
positive impact on society.

Writing Book Page- 276

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 37:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

With the growing population of cities, more and more people live in homes that have
little or no outdoor areas.

Is this a positive or a negative development?

Sample response:

The unrelenting tide of urbanization is transforming our world, drawing millions towards the
bright lights and opportunities of cities. However, this influx comes with a stark reality: the
dwindling availability of outdoor spaces. While some view this as a necessary sacrifice for
progress, I believe it poses a significant threat to our well-being and societal fabric.

There are significant disadvantages to this development. Firstly, the absence of green spaces,
balconies, or even small yards creates a disconnect from nature, vital for both physical and
mental health. Studies consistently link access to greenery with improved cognitive function,
stress reduction, and increased physical activity. Children deprived of outdoor play spaces
often exhibit attention deficits and behavioral issues. In essence, sacrificing nature for
development can lead to a less healthy and productive population.

Furthermore, the lack of communal outdoor areas hinders social interaction and community
building. Parks, gardens, and public squares serve as vital meeting points, fostering a sense
of belonging and facilitating informal interactions. In their absence, residents become isolated,
leading to social fragmentation and a decline in civic engagement. This can have long-term
consequences for social cohesion and overall well-being.

Proponents of dense urban living often cite economic benefits. Compact cities offer better
infrastructure, accessibility, and resource utilization. They argue that maximizing land use for
housing fosters economic growth and attracts talent. This, in turn, they say fuels innovation
and contributes to a vibrant urban culture. However, personally, I am of the belief that the
problems resulting from this explosion of cities is undeniable and too significant compared to
the benefits on offer.

In conclusion, while dense urban living offers undeniable advantages, the increasing lack of
outdoor spaces presents a significant threat to our physical and social well-being. By
prioritizing green infrastructure and innovative solutions, we can create cities that are not only
economically prosperous but also healthy and socially vibrant. As an advocate for a balanced
approach, I believe we must strive for sustainable solutions that nurture both human and
natural environments, ensuring a future where concrete jungles thrive alongside vibrant green
spaces.

Writing Book Page- 277

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 38:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

The increasing use of social media platforms has made it easier for people to talk about
their frustrations and complaints publicly.

Is this a positive or negative development?

Sample response:

The meteoric rise of social media platforms has undeniably democratized public discourse,
offering a readily accessible soapbox for anyone to air their grievances. While the ability to
voice frustrations publicly holds undeniable potential benefits, the unchecked nature of online
interactions often warps this trend into a negative development.

On the surface, the ease of venting on social media presents a powerful tool for holding
institutions and individuals accountable. Disgruntled customers can share their negative
experiences with a wider audience, potentially prompting businesses to improve their
services. Similarly, citizens can raise concerns about social injustices or government policies,
sparking public discussions and potentially influencing change. This form of public shaming,
albeit sometimes crude, can serve as a catalyst for positive action.

However, the echo chambers fostered by social media algorithms often amplify negativity and
fuel outrage. Frustrations expressed online rarely translate into constructive dialogues, instead
devolving into emotionally charged exchanges and personal attacks. This breeds a culture of
polarization, where opposing viewpoints are vilified rather than understood. Moreover, the lack
of accountability and anonymity emboldens individuals to spew hate speech and
misinformation, further eroding civil discourse and potentially inciting real-world harm.

Furthermore, the constant exposure to negativity can have detrimental effects on mental
health. Individuals are bombarded with a curated selection of grievances, creating a skewed
perception of reality and fostering feelings of helplessness and cynicism. This negativity bias
can contribute to anxiety, depression, and even physical health problems.

Therefore, while the ability to express frustrations publicly can be a valuable tool in individual
cases, the overall impact of such unfiltered expression on social media platforms is largely
negative. It fuels polarization, erodes civil discourse, and contributes to a culture of negativity
that harms both individuals and society as a whole. Instead, we should advocate for
responsible use of social media, promoting empathy, constructive dialogue, and fact-checking
to mitigate the negative aspects of this powerful tool.

Writing Book Page- 278

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 39:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some individuals argue that children should always follow the advice given by their
parents, while others believe that children should make decisions independently.

Discuss both views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The dynamic between parental guidance and a child's independent thinking is a complex one.
While some advocate for unquestioning adherence to parental advice, others emphasize the
importance of fostering individual decision-making. I will explore both viewpoints and propose
an approach that acknowledges the value of both perspectives.

Proponents of strict adherence to parental advice highlight the wealth of experience and
knowledge that parents possess. Having navigated life's complexities, they are believed to
offer valuable insights that can shield children from harm and steer them towards success.
This view finds particular support in contexts where cultural traditions or religious beliefs guide
societal norms. In such scenarios, parental advice can be seen as an embodiment of
established wisdom, ensuring continuity and stability.

However, advocating for absolute obedience overlooks the crucial role of individual
development. Blindly following instructions can stifle critical thinking and autonomy, hindering
the development of independent judgment and decision-making skills. This can lead to a lack
of confidence and an inability to navigate life's challenges independently. Moreover, parents
are not infallible. Biases, outdated information, or personal limitations can lead to flawed
advice. Encouraging children to critically evaluate and question, even respectfully disagreeing
at times, fosters intellectual growth and prepares them to navigate the complexities of the
world.

Finding a balance between these two perspectives is crucial. Parents should strive to be not
only authoritative figures but also trusted mentors. Open communication and active listening
create a space for children to express their thoughts and concerns, leading to informed
decisions. Parents can guide by providing context, sharing their experiences, and offering
different perspectives, while ultimately respecting their children's autonomy in decision-
making. This approach empowers children to learn from their choices, whether successes or
failures, fostering responsibility and resilience.

In conclusion, neither blind obedience nor complete independence serve children best. A
balanced approach that acknowledges the value of parental experience while nurturing
independent thought is essential for fostering responsible, confident individuals equipped to
navigate the world with wisdom and discernment.

Writing Book Page- 279

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 40:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some people say the government should manage people’s health, while others think
that individuals should be in charge of their own health.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The question of who should be responsible for managing individual health sparks heated
debate. Some argue that the government, with its resources and reach, should take the reins,
while others champion individual responsibility and autonomy. Examining both sides reveals a
complex tapestry woven with ethical, economic, and practical threads.

Advocates of government intervention highlight its ability to address systemic issues.

Socioeconomic factors heavily influence health outcomes, with low-income populations often
facing limited access to nutritious food, healthcare services, and preventive measures.
Government programs like subsidized healthcare and public health initiatives can bridge these
gaps, ensuring equitable access to vital resources. Additionally, centralized control enables
efficient disease prevention through mass vaccination campaigns and public awareness
programs, potentially saving countless lives.

However, opponents of government intervention raise concerns about individual liberty and
potential overreach. They argue that individuals have the right to make informed choices
about their health, even if those choices are deemed unhealthy by others. Imposing
restrictions on diet, exercise, or even personal habits like smoking, they argue, infringes on
individual autonomy and undermines personal responsibility. Furthermore, government-run
healthcare systems often face criticisms of inefficiency and resource scarcity, potentially
leading to longer wait times and limited treatment options.

In my opinion, the ideal approach lies in a collaborative effort between individuals and the
government. Individuals should be empowered to make informed decisions about their health,
supported by accessible education and awareness campaigns. This includes promoting
healthy lifestyle choices through public education, incentivizing preventative measures, and
ensuring affordable and quality healthcare services. Simultaneously, the government should
play a crucial role in addressing systemic inequalities, providing safety nets for vulnerable
populations, and supporting research and development for better healthcare solutions.

Ultimately, the responsibility for individual health is shared. While individuals have the right to
make their own choices, the government has an obligation to create an environment that
fosters healthy living and ensures equitable access to healthcare resources. Only through
collaboration can we achieve a society where everyone has the opportunity to thrive.

Writing Book Page- 280

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 41:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
There is a growing emphasis on sustainable living and reducing environmental impacts
in many societies.
What are the challenges of adopting a sustainable lifestyle? What practical actions can
individuals take to contribute to sustainability?
Sample response:
The rising awareness of environmental degradation has spurred a global movement towards
sustainable living. While the aspiration is noble, transitioning to an eco-conscious lifestyle
presents numerous challenges. Individuals often grapple with balancing personal convenience
with responsible consumption, navigating limited information, and confronting the
pervasiveness of unsustainable practices ingrained in society.
One key challenge lies in the inconvenience factor. Sustainable alternatives often require
more effort or planning. Opting for public transport over personal vehicles might involve longer
commutes, and locally sourced groceries might demand more frequent shopping trips. This
can clash with busy schedules and ingrained habits, making the switch difficult. Another
hurdle arises from information overload and greenwashing. Consumers face a barrage of
conflicting claims and labels, making it hard to discern truly sustainable products. The
prevalence of greenwashing, where companies mislead consumers about their environmental
practices, further complicates informed choices. Finally, societal factors can present
significant obstacles. The infrastructure for renewable energy might be lacking, making
reliance on fossil fuels almost inevitable in some regions. Additionally, systemic issues like
planned obsolescence and fast fashion normalize unsustainable consumption patterns,
making it hard for individuals to swim against the tide.
Despite the challenges, it's crucial to remember that every action, however small, can
contribute to a more sustainable future. Individuals can start by reducing their consumption,
opting for reusable items, repairing broken goods, and resisting impulse purchases.
Embracing energy efficiency through simple measures like switching to LED lights and using
public transport can also make a difference. Furthermore, conscious food choices hold
immense power. Supporting local farmers markets, reducing meat consumption, and
minimizing food waste all contribute to a more sustainable food system. Finally, advocacy and
awareness can be powerful tools. Engaging in open discussions, supporting sustainable
businesses, and holding companies accountable for their environmental impact can create
positive change.
Overall, living sustainably is a journey, not a destination. By acknowledging the challenges
and taking practical, informed actions, individuals can contribute to a healthier planet for
generations to come. Remember, even small steps, collectively, can lead to significant strides
towards a sustainable future.

Writing Book Page- 281

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 42:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think that in order to solve environmental problems, fuel prices for cars
and other vehicles must increase.
Do you agree or disagree?
Sample response:
The escalating call for environmental action often leads to proposed solutions that hit close to
home - our wallets. One such suggestion argues for increasing fuel prices for cars and other
vehicles, aiming to curb emissions and drive us towards a greener future. While this approach
possesses potential, I think relying solely on price hikes is ultimately an insufficient and
potentially harmful strategy.
Proponents of higher fuel prices cite their deterrent effect on car usage. By making driving
more expensive, they argue, individuals will opt for more sustainable alternatives like public
transport, cycling, or walking. This reduction in car travel would undeniably translate to lower
emissions, contributing to cleaner air and mitigating climate change. Additionally, increased
fuel costs could generate revenue for governments, which could then be reinvested in
developing cleaner energy infrastructure and public transportation systems.
However, the impact of this solution is likely to be uneven and potentially detrimental to certain
groups. For rural communities and individuals without access to reliable public transport,
inflated fuel prices could become a significant burden. Essential services and goods
transported by vehicles would become more expensive, impacting low-income families
disproportionately. Furthermore, a purely price-based approach ignores the underlying
infrastructure and societal factors that contribute to car dependence. Without readily available
and efficient alternatives, simply making driving more expensive may simply force people to
cut back on essential journeys, hindering economic activity and social mobility.
Instead of solely relying on increased fuel costs, a more effective approach would be a multi-
pronged strategy. Government investment in public transport infrastructure, coupled with
subsidies for electric vehicles and carpooling initiatives, would incentivize cleaner choices
without disproportionately impacting vulnerable groups. Additionally, promoting car-free
zones, encouraging walkable and cyclable cities, and fostering a culture of shared mobility
would address the root causes of car dependence.
In conclusion, while increasing fuel prices might have some merit in reducing emissions, it is
an overly simplistic and potentially harmful solution. A more balanced approach that combines
pricing measures with infrastructure development, social equity considerations, and cultural
shifts holds greater promise for achieving a sustainable transportation system and a healthier
planet.

Writing Book Page- 282

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 43:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many countries, the number of animals and plants is declining.
Why do you think this is happening? How can this issue be solved?
Sample response:
Across the globe, a silent symphony fades away as countless species of plants and animals
dwindle. This alarming decline in biodiversity demands our attention, as it threatens the very
fabric of life on Earth. Understanding the root causes of this crisis is crucial to formulating
effective solutions.
One primary driver of biodiversity loss is habitat destruction. The insatiable human demand for
land, resources, and development leads to deforestation, wetland drainage, and urban sprawl.
These actions fragment ecosystems, depriving species of their homes and vital resources.
Additionally, climate change, fueled by greenhouse gas emissions, disrupts delicate ecological
balances, pushing species beyond their adaptive capacity. Rising temperatures, changing
precipitation patterns, and extreme weather events wreak havoc on ecosystems, leading to
population declines and extinctions. Furthermore, unsustainable practices like intensive
agriculture, overfishing, and the illegal wildlife trade further exacerbate the issue. These
activities exploit natural resources at a rate exceeding their capacity to replenish, leaving
ecosystems depleted and vulnerable. Moreover, the introduction of invasive species disrupts
established food webs and outcompete native species, leading to their decline.
Solving this multifaceted crisis requires a multi-pronged approach. One critical step is habitat
restoration and conservation. This involves protecting existing natural areas, creating corridors
to connect fragmented habitats, and reforesting degraded land. Additionally, promoting
sustainable practices in agriculture, fishing, and resource extraction is essential. This includes
adopting organic farming methods, reducing our reliance on fossil fuels, and implementing
stricter regulations on wildlife trade. Moreover, raising public awareness about the importance
of biodiversity is crucial. Educating individuals about the threats and consequences of species
loss can foster a sense of responsibility and inspire action. Additionally, supporting
conservation efforts through donations, volunteering, and responsible consumer choices can
make a significant difference. Finally, international cooperation is paramount. Global
agreements and frameworks are needed to address climate change and ensure sustainable
development practices across borders. Collaboration between governments, scientists,
NGOs, and local communities can create a united front against biodiversity loss.
The decline of biodiversity is a complex issue with no easy solutions. However, through a
combination of effective conservation strategies, sustainable practices, and public awareness
campaigns, we can begin to turn the tide. By acting together, we can ensure that the
symphony of life continues to resonate for generations to come.

Writing Book Page- 283

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 44:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Plagiarism in school has become a major issue in many countries today.

What are the causes of this problem? What are some possible solutions?

Sample response:

The specter of plagiarism looms large in educational institutions worldwide, eroding academic
integrity and hindering genuine learning. This essay delves into the root causes of this issue
and proposes solutions to cultivate a culture of original thought in schools.

One key driver of plagiarism is the pressure to achieve. Students, burdened by demanding
workloads and competitive environments, may resort to shortcuts like copying content to meet
deadlines or boost grades. This often stems from a lack of effective time management or
inadequate understanding of the subject matter. Furthermore, the abundance of online
resources can be a double-edged sword. While information is readily available, navigating its
credibility and properly integrating it into academic work can be challenging. Students
unfamiliar with citation practices or tempted by the ease of "copy-paste" fall prey to
unintentional or even deliberate plagiarism. Moreover, inadequate understanding of academic
honesty plays a role. If plagiarism isn't explicitly addressed and its consequences clearly
communicated, students may not grasp the gravity of the offense. Inconsistent enforcement of
academic integrity policies can further undermine the seriousness of the issue.

To combat plagiarism, a multi-pronged approach is essential. Firstly, fostering critical thinking

skills through inquiry-based learning equips students to analyze information, evaluate its
relevance, and develop their own voice. Secondly, comprehensive plagiarism instruction
should be embedded in the curriculum, teaching students proper citation methods and the
importance of intellectual integrity. Thirdly, accessible support systems like writing centers and
peer tutoring can guide students in navigating research and crafting original arguments.
Additionally, technology-based plagiarism detection tools can be used ethically to identify
potential issues and prompt students to revise their work. Finally, consistently enforcing
academic integrity policies sends a clear message about the seriousness of plagiarism. This
includes providing students with clear guidelines, offering opportunities for clarification and
revision, and implementing fair and proportionate consequences for infractions.

By addressing the root causes and implementing effective solutions, schools can cultivate a
culture that values originality, critical thinking, and ethical scholarship. This will empower
students to become independent learners and responsible contributors to the knowledge
landscape, ensuring that education truly prepares them for the challenges and opportunities
ahead.

Writing Book Page- 284

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 45:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many countries, students leave high school without learning how to manage their
money.
Why does this happen? What could be done to tackle the issue?
Sample response:
In many countries, students leave high school equipped with academic knowledge, but
woefully unprepared for the financial realities of adulthood. This lack of financial literacy stems
from a combination of factors within the education system and societal norms, leaving
graduates vulnerable to debt, poor decision-making, and economic hardship.
Firstly, traditional education systems often prioritize academic subjects like mathematics,
science, and languages, leaving little room for practical life skills like personal finance.
Budgeting, saving, responsible borrowing, and understanding financial instruments are rarely
addressed, creating a knowledge gap that graduates must bridge themselves. This lack of
formal instruction leaves students reliant on parents or the internet for financial guidance,
which may be inconsistent or inaccurate. Secondly, the sheltered environment of high school
can contribute to this financial ignorance. Many students live with their parents, who manage
household finances, shielding them from the realities of budgeting and earning. This absence
of firsthand experience makes it difficult to grasp the value of money and the consequences of
poor financial choices. Furthermore, societal norms can perpetuate the problem. Parents,
themselves lacking financial literacy, may not prioritize teaching these skills to their children.
The culture of instant gratification and consumerism prevalent in many societies also
encourages impulsive spending, further hindering responsible financial behavior.
Tackling this issue requires a multi-pronged approach. Integrating financial education into the
school curriculum is crucial. Mandatory courses or modules covering budgeting, investing,
debt management, and responsible credit use can equip students with the knowledge they
need to make informed decisions. Additionally, experiential learning, such as mock budgeting
exercises and simulations, can provide practical application and deepen understanding.
Parental involvement is also vital. Open communication about family finances and
encouraging responsible spending habits at home can complement classroom learning.
Programs that involve parents in financial literacy workshops can empower them to guide their
children effectively. Finally, promoting financial literacy through community initiatives and
public campaigns can raise awareness and encourage individual responsibility. Collaborations
between schools, financial institutions, and community organizations can offer workshops,
resources, and mentorship programs to bridge the knowledge gap.
Equipping students with financial literacy is not just about individual success; it's about
building a financially responsible generation. By addressing the systemic and societal factors
that contribute to this gap, we can empower young adults to navigate the financial world with
confidence and build a more secure future for themselves and their communities.

Writing Book Page- 285

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 46:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Mobile phones and the Internet could have many benefits for old people. However, this
age group uses technology the least.
What are the benefits for old people of using mobile phones and the Internet? How can
we encourage them to use this new technology?
Sample response:
While mobile phones and the internet have revolutionized our lives, many older adults remain
on the sidelines of this digital revolution. This is unfortunate, as technology offers a wealth of
benefits for this age group, promoting independence, connection, and well-being. To bridge
this digital divide, we need to understand both the advantages technology offers and the
barriers that prevent its adoption by seniors.
Firstly, mobile phones and the internet can enhance seniors' independence and safety.
Emergency alert buttons on phones provide peace of mind, while GPS navigation apps help
them explore their surroundings confidently. Additionally, online services like grocery delivery
or telemedicine consultations can reduce reliance on others for everyday needs. Secondly,
technology fosters social connection and combats loneliness. Video calls and social media
platforms allow seniors to stay in touch with loved ones, regardless of distance. Online
communities offer opportunities to connect with like-minded individuals, fostering a sense of
belonging and combating social isolation, a common challenge for older adults. Thirdly, the
internet serves as a valuable source of information and learning. Online resources empower
seniors to manage their health, explore hobbies, and learn new skills. Educational apps can
keep their minds active and engaged, contributing to cognitive well-being.
To encourage technology adoption, a multi-pronged approach is needed. Senior-friendly
devices with simplified interfaces and large fonts can address accessibility concerns. Training
programs and workshops can equip seniors with basic digital literacy skills, fostering
confidence and competence. Additionally, intergenerational initiatives where younger family
members or volunteers provide tech support can bridge the gap and create a supportive
learning environment. Finally, combating online scams and misinformation through
educational campaigns and targeted resources can empower seniors to navigate the digital
world safely.
In conclusion, mobile phones and the internet offer a multitude of benefits for older adults,
enhancing their independence, connection, and well-being. By addressing accessibility
concerns, providing training, and fostering a supportive environment, we can empower seniors
to embrace technology and unlock its potential to enrich their lives. This will not only benefit
individuals but also create a more inclusive and digitally connected society for all.

Writing Book Page- 286

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 47:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

In some countries ordinary citizens are allowed to keep a gun in their house. Some
people think this is a good idea, while others disagree.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

Across nations, the debate on civilian gun ownership boils down to a single question: is it
better to be armed or defenseless in your own home? Proponents of gun ownership see it as
a fundamental right and a crucial tool for self-defense. Opponents, however, fear it fuels
violence and endangers communities.

Advocates for gun ownership highlight the importance of personal protection. They argue that
criminals often target unarmed homes, and owning a gun can deter break-ins or empower
individuals to fight back. In areas with limited police presence or slow response times, having
a firearm can be seen as a last resort for safety. Additionally, proponents see gun ownership
as a cultural right, intertwined with values of self-reliance and individual responsibility.

Opponents counter that guns create more problems than they solve. Accidental shootings,
suicides, and domestic violence are all statistically more likely in households with guns. They
argue that the presence of a firearm escalates confrontations, turning potentially non-lethal
situations deadly. Moreover, opponents highlight the devastating effects of mass shootings,
often perpetrated by individuals with legal access to firearms. They advocate for stricter gun
control measures, arguing that public safety outweighs individual rights in this case.

While the concerns of both sides are valid, I believe the risks of civilian gun ownership
outweigh the potential benefits. The readily available data on gun violence is stark: countries
with higher rates of gun ownership experience significantly more firearm-related deaths. While
self-defense cases involving guns do occur, they are statistically rare compared to the broader
societal harm caused by easy access to firearms. Furthermore, the argument of deterring
criminals is flawed. Criminals often target homes specifically because they believe occupants
are unarmed. Additionally, relying on individuals with limited training and potentially high
emotions to handle dangerous situations is inherently risky. The potential for accidental
shootings, misuse, and escalation during confrontations is simply too great.

Instead of individual gun ownership, I believe investing in robust community policing, improved
mental health care systems, and addressing the root causes of crime are far more effective in
promoting safety and security. While the debate on gun ownership is complex and emotionally
charged, prioritizing public safety over individual rights is essential to creating safer and more
peaceful societies.

Writing Book Page- 287

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 48:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Nowadays, more and more people decide to have children later in their life.
What do you think are the reasons for this? Do the advantages of the trend outweigh
the disadvantages?
Sample response:
The societal shift towards later parenthood is undeniable, with growing numbers choosing to
delay childbearing. While concerns surround this trend, the advantages, in my opinion,
outweigh the disadvantages. Let's delve into the reasons behind this delay and explore why it
can be positive.
Firstly, the pursuit of education and career aspirations plays a significant role. Individuals
prioritize acquiring skills and establishing themselves professionally, leading to later marriages
and subsequently, delayed parenthood. This translates into increased financial stability,
allowing for a better environment to raise children. Additionally, personal growth through
experiences and self-discovery deepens, leading to a more mature and fulfilled individual,
ultimately benefiting both parent and child.
Secondly, the shifting social landscape allows for more flexibility. Traditional gender roles are
blurring, with both partners contributing to parenting equally. This enables individuals,
particularly women, to pursue personal goals without societal pressure to prioritize
motherhood at a young age. This empowered approach fosters a sense of balance and
fulfillment, crucial for healthy parenting.
Thirdly, advancements in healthcare have expanded the window for safe childbearing.
Assisted reproductive technologies offer options for those facing biological challenges, and
improved medical care increases the chances of healthy pregnancies later in life. This
empowers individuals to make informed choices about parenthood based on their personal
circumstances, not solely on biological limitations.
Of course, concerns regarding reduced fertility and increased risks associated with older
pregnancies exist. However, advancements in medicine mitigate these concerns to a
significant extent. Moreover, the advantages, such as improved financial stability, emotional
maturity, and a stronger support system, often outweigh the potential risks.
In conclusion, the trend towards later parenthood reflects changing societal priorities and
values. While concerns remain, the advantages in terms of personal growth, financial stability,
and empowered decision-making are undeniable. As long as individuals are informed about
potential risks and make well-considered choices, this trend can be seen as a positive
evolution in the journey of parenthood.

Writing Book Page- 288

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 49:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some people argue that sports are essential for us. Others think of sports as an activity
for leisure time.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The role of sports in our lives sparks debate, with some championing them as essential and
others viewing them as mere leisure pursuits. While both perspectives hold merit, a nuanced
understanding reveals that sports offer a unique blend of physical, mental, and social benefits,
making them a valuable addition to a well-rounded life.

Advocates for sports highlight the undeniable physical advantages. Regular participation
strengthens muscles and bones, improves cardiovascular health, and combats obesity, laying
the foundation for a healthy lifestyle. Beyond the physical, sports are mental sharpeners,
enhancing focus, discipline, and resilience. Overcoming challenges on the field translates to
tackling obstacles in other areas, building grit and fostering a "never give up" attitude.
Teamwork, a cornerstone of many sports, teaches collaboration, leadership, and
communication, fostering empathy and social skills crucial for success in diverse settings.

Opponents, however, argue that sports consume valuable time that could be better spent on
academics, career pursuits, or personal development. They point to the potential for injuries
and the pressure to excel, suggesting that the stress outweighs the benefits. Additionally, they
emphasize the inherent exclusivity of some sports, which might leave individuals on the
sidelines, fostering feelings of inadequacy.

While these concerns are valid, they shouldn't overshadow the inherent value of sports. The
physical and mental benefits translate to improved academic performance and career
potential, creating a virtuous cycle. Moreover, the pressure to excel can be channeled into
self-improvement and goal-setting, valuable skills in any endeavor. Finally, diverse options
exist beyond competitive sports, from individual activities like running to recreational leagues
focused on fun and community building.

In conclusion, while sports might not be "essential" in the strictest sense, they offer a powerful
combination of physical, mental, and social development. By fostering discipline, resilience,
teamwork, and a healthy lifestyle, sports contribute significantly to a well-rounded individual
and a vibrant society. Recognizing both the benefits and potential drawbacks allows us to
maximize the positive impact of sports on our lives, ensuring that the game truly goes beyond
the field.

Writing Book Page- 289

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 50:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think it would be beneficial for school children to study international
news as a school subject, while others argue it would be a waste of time.
Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:
The world is interconnected like never before, and equipping young minds with a global
perspective is crucial. While some may view studying international news in schools as a
frivolous diversion, it holds immense potential in fostering responsible, informed, and engaged
citizens.
Proponents of integrating international news argue it broadens students' perspectives. By
delving into diverse cultures, political systems, and social issues beyond their immediate
surroundings, children develop a deeper understanding of the world's complexities. This
exposure combats ethnocentrism and fosters empathy, encouraging them to see the world
through different lenses and appreciate varying viewpoints.
Furthermore, studying international news hones critical thinking skills. Students learn to
analyze information from various sources, identify biases, and form informed opinions. They
grapple with complex global issues like climate change, pandemics, and economic disparity,
developing skills crucial for navigating an increasingly interconnected world.
Additionally, international news literacy empowers participation in a globalized society.
Understanding current events allows students to engage in meaningful discussions and
contribute to solutions for global challenges. It fosters responsible citizenship and prepares
them to effectively navigate an increasingly interconnected world.
Opponents might argue that time constraints and curriculum pressure make introducing a new
subject impractical. However, integrating international news into existing subjects like history,
geography, and social studies can be a viable solution. Moreover, the potential benefits
outweigh the logistical challenges.
In conclusion, while concerns about time constraints exist, the advantages of studying
international news far outweigh them. By broadening perspectives, honing critical thinking
skills, and fostering responsible citizenship, it equips students with the tools to navigate and
contribute to a complex, interconnected world. In a globalized era, this knowledge is not just
beneficial, it is essential.

Writing Book Page- 290

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 51:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some people say that every human being can create art. Others think only people born
with the ability can create art.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The human spirit yearns for expression. While the debate surrounding who can truly create art
has raged for centuries, I believe the ability to create is not a select gift bestowed upon a few,
but a universal spark within each of us.

Those who champion the "innate talent" argument point to child prodigies and artistic
geniuses. They suggest that artistic prowess is a preordained trait, evident from a young age.
While certain individuals may possess exceptional talent, attributing art solely to innate ability
ignores the vast spectrum of artistic expression. Cooking, gardening, storytelling, even
arranging furniture – all can be infused with creativity, showcasing unique perspectives and
evoking emotions. Limiting art to traditional mediums diminishes the diverse ways people
express themselves.

Furthermore, focusing solely on talent overlooks the power of practice and dedication.
Imagine a world where only those born to run could participate in a marathon. The joy of
pushing boundaries, the satisfaction of improvement, and the discovery of hidden potential –
all these are lost when we limit artistic pursuit to the inherently gifted. Art classes, workshops,
and even online tutorials demonstrate that anyone can learn, refine, and express themselves
creatively.

Of course, not every creation will be a masterpiece. But judging art solely on its technical
perfection ignores its true essence – the act of creation itself. The joy of putting pen to paper,
the thrill of experimentation, and the courage to share one's unique perspective – these are
the true hallmarks of artistic expression. When we encourage everyone to tap into their
creative spark, regardless of skill level, we foster a richer, more vibrant world.

In conclusion, while some may argue that only the inherently gifted can create art, I firmly
believe that the ability to express oneself creatively lies within every human being. From the
child's finger painting to the senior's meticulously crafted quilt, art is a universal language,
waiting to be discovered and spoken by all. Let us celebrate the diversity of artistic expression
and encourage everyone to ignite their own creative spark.

Writing Book Page- 291

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 52:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Nowadays, not enough students choose science subjects at university in many
countries.
Why is this? What effects does this have on society?
Sample response:
While advancements in science and technology continue to shape our world, a worrying trend
has emerged: a decline in the number of students pursuing science subjects at the university
level. This phenomenon, evident in many countries, carries significant implications for both
individual prospects and societal progress. Understanding the reasons behind this shift and its
potential consequences is crucial to reigniting the passion for science and ensuring a future
driven by innovation.
One key factor contributing to this decline is the perceived difficulty of science. Often
portrayed as requiring exceptional intelligence and tireless dedication, science subjects can
intimidate students, leading them towards seemingly "easier" paths. This perception can be
further exacerbated by rigid teaching methods that emphasize rote learning over practical
application and the joy of discovery. As a result, many students lose their natural curiosity,
opting for fields that promise quicker rewards with less perceived effort.
Beyond the perceived difficulty, career concerns also play a significant role. The stereotype of
the underpaid, overworked scientist persists, deterring students drawn to financial security or
immediate gratification. Furthermore, the public image of certain scientific fields might not be
appealing, overshadowed by negative portrayals in media or anxieties surrounding ethical
concerns. This lack of positive role models and clear career pathways discourages students
from seeing themselves as part of a vibrant and impactful scientific community.
The consequences of this decline are far-reaching. A shortage of skilled professionals in
science hinders technological advancements, impacting everything from healthcare and
environmental protection to space exploration. Additionally, a society lacking a strong
scientific foundation becomes vulnerable to misinformation and manipulation, as critical
thinking skills and an understanding of scientific processes diminish. Moreover, the lack of
diversity in science further hinders innovation, as vital perspectives and experiences remain
untapped.
In conclusion, the decline in student interest in science subjects is a complex issue with
significant ramifications. By addressing the perceived difficulty, career concerns, and lack of
engaging educational experiences, we can reignite the passion for science and encourage a
new generation of innovators to shape the future. Only then can we ensure a society that
benefits from the full potential of scientific progress and critical thinking, leading to a brighter
and more sustainable tomorrow.

Writing Book Page- 292

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 53:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Nowadays, many people have cosmetic surgery to enhance their appearance.
Why are they doing this? Is this a positive or a negative development?
Sample response:
The rise of cosmetic surgery, where individuals opt for procedures to alter their physical
appearance for non-medical reasons, presents a complex issue with both potential benefits
and drawbacks. While the reasons behind its growing popularity are multifaceted, the societal
implications of this trend require careful analysis. Ultimately, while cosmetic surgery can
empower some individuals, its potential for fostering unrealistic beauty standards and
commodifying the human body raise concerns that cannot be ignored.
One key driver of cosmetic surgery is the relentless pursuit of an idealized beauty standard
heavily influenced by media and social media. Images of airbrushed perfection bombard
audiences, creating a distorted perception of what constitutes attractiveness. This pressure to
conform can fuel insecurities and a desire to "fix" perceived flaws, leading individuals to seek
surgical solutions. Moreover, the growing accessibility and affordability of procedures further
contribute to their normalization, making them appear less like drastic measures and more like
routine enhancements.
However, proponents of cosmetic surgery argue that it can be a powerful tool for self-
improvement and empowerment. For individuals who have experienced physical trauma or
disfigurement, reconstructive surgeries can offer a sense of normalcy and reclaim lost
confidence. Additionally, for some, cosmetic procedures can address insecurities that
significantly impact their mental well-being and quality of life, potentially leading to improved
self-esteem and social interactions.
However, the potential downsides of cosmetic surgery cannot be overlooked. The pursuit of
an unattainable ideal can create a cycle of dissatisfaction, where one procedure leads to
another in a never-ending quest for perfection. This can have significant psychological and
financial consequences, potentially leading to anxiety, depression, and even addiction to
surgery. Furthermore, the commodification of the body raises ethical concerns, where
individuals are encouraged to view their appearance as a product to be altered and improved
upon. This can exacerbate societal pressures on beauty standards and contribute to body
image issues, particularly among young people.
In conclusion, while cosmetic surgery can be a personal choice with potential benefits for
some individuals, its growing prevalence raises concerns about societal pressures and the
commodification of the human body. It is crucial to foster a culture that celebrates diverse
beauty standards and promotes self-acceptance, while also ensuring responsible practices
and ethical considerations within the cosmetic surgery industry. Only then can we navigate the
complexities of this trend in a way that prioritizes individual well-being and a healthy
relationship with appearance.

Writing Book Page- 293

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 54:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In some parts of the world traditional festivals and celebrations have disappeared or
are disappearing.
Why is this happening? What measures could be taken to ensure they do not
disappear?
Sample response:
In many corners of the globe, vibrant threads of cultural identity woven into traditional festivals
are fading. These celebrations, once integral to communities, face the threat of extinction due
to a complex interplay of factors. Understanding the forces driving this decline and
implementing proactive measures is crucial to safeguard these vital expressions of heritage.

One primary culprit is the juggernaut of globalization. As societies become increasingly

interconnected, homogenization creeps in, diluting the unique character of local traditions.
Exposure to globalized celebrations, often commercially driven, can overshadow the
significance of local customs, leading to a decline in interest and participation. Furthermore,
rapid urbanization and the associated shift towards individualistic lifestyles contribute to the
erosion of traditional festivals. As people move from rural communities to urban centers, the
strong social bonds that underpin these celebrations often weaken. The pace of modern life
can also leave little room for the time-intensive preparations and communal participation that
traditional festivals require. Technology, while potentially aiding in preservation efforts, can
also be a double-edged sword. While social media can connect communities and spread
awareness, it can also contribute to a sense of cultural pastiche, where traditions are stripped
of their context and meaning.

However, all hope is not lost. Several measures can be taken to ensure traditional festivals
remain vibrant expressions of cultural identity. Firstly, fostering a sense of ownership and
pride in these traditions is vital. This can be achieved through educational programs,
community workshops, and involving younger generations in the planning and execution of
festivals. Secondly, promoting the economic viability of these celebrations is crucial. Local
businesses and tourism initiatives can be integrated into festivals, generating income and
incentivizing participation. Additionally, showcasing the cultural richness of these events on
national and international platforms can attract wider interest and support. Finally, embracing
adaptation and innovation is key. While preserving the core essence of traditions,
incorporating modern elements can make them more relevant and engaging to younger
audiences. This could involve incorporating contemporary music, technology, or art forms into
the celebrations.

In conclusion, the disappearance of traditional festivals would represent a significant loss of

cultural richness and community spirit. Recognizing the factors driving this decline and
implementing proactive measures, such as fostering ownership, promoting economic viability,
and embracing innovation, is essential to ensure these vibrant expressions of heritage
continue to illuminate the world stage.

Writing Book Page- 294

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 55:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Nowadays in many countries young people don’t communicate with older people as
much as they used to.

Why is this happening? How could this situation be improved?

Sample response:

In many countries, the vibrant tapestry of intergenerational communication seems to be

fading. Young people, often glued to their digital devices, appear less inclined to engage with
older generations. While this trend holds potential pitfalls, I think understanding its causes and
seeking solutions can rekindle meaningful exchange between the young and the old.

One primary factor contributing to this disconnect is the rapid evolution of technology. Young
people, adept navigators of the digital world, find solace in online communities, while older
generations may struggle to keep pace. This creates a barrier, leaving little common ground
for conversation. Additionally, shifting societal values can widen the gap. Young people,
embracing individual expression and questioning authority, may clash with the more traditional
perspectives of their elders, leading to a reluctance to engage.

To bridge this gap, several solutions can be explored. Firstly, fostering shared experiences
can create natural bridges. Intergenerational volunteering programs, where young and old
work together, can build rapport and understanding. Similarly, technology can be harnessed to
connect. Grandparents and grandchildren can learn digital skills together, bridging the
technological divide and creating shared interests. Secondly, promoting active listening and
open dialogue is crucial. Workshops on effective communication can equip individuals with the
skills to navigate generational differences. Encouraging young people to ask questions and
older generations to listen openly can foster mutual respect and understanding. Finally,
celebrating shared values can remind us of our common humanity. Community events, where
stories and experiences are exchanged, can highlight the interconnectedness of generations.
Recognizing the contributions of both young and old can foster a sense of belonging and
appreciation.

In conclusion, while the decline in communication between generations is concerning, it is not

irreversible. By embracing technology, fostering shared experiences, and promoting open
dialogue, we can bridge the gap and rekindle the richness of intergenerational exchange. As
we strive to create a society where wisdom and youthful energy go hand in hand, the future
holds the promise of a more connected and harmonious world.

Writing Book Page- 295

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 56:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people prefer to spend their lives doing the same things and avoiding change.
Others, however, think that change is always a good thing.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.
Sample response:
The human experience is a tapestry woven with threads of routine and the unexpected,
stability and change. While some seek solace in the familiar, others find their sails unfurled by
the wind of novelty. While both perspectives offer valid arguments, I believe the key lies in
navigating a harmonious balance between embracing change and cherishing the stability that
anchors us.
Those who prioritize stability find comfort in predictable routines and established patterns.
Familiarity breeds a sense of security, allowing them to focus their energy on mastery and
refinement within a chosen field. Think of the artisan honing their craft, the athlete perfecting
their technique, or the parent creating a nurturing environment for their children. Such
constancy fosters a deep understanding and appreciation for the established order. However,
clinging too tightly to stability can risk stagnation. Refusing to adapt in the face of evolving
circumstances can lead to missed opportunities and a world increasingly out of sync with
one's reality.
On the other hand, those who embrace change see it as an opportunity for growth and
personal evolution. They thrive on the thrill of the unknown, the constant influx of new ideas
and experiences. Think of the explorer venturing into uncharted territories, the entrepreneur
building disruptive businesses, or the artist constantly experimenting with new styles. Their
openness allows them to stay relevant, adapt to changing circumstances, and contribute to
the dynamic nature of the world. However, unmitigated change can be disorienting and
emotionally taxing. A constant state of flux can leave one feeling rootless and lacking the
grounding stability that provides a sense of belonging and purpose.
Personally, I believe the ideal lies in embracing a nuanced approach. We should be open to
the transformative power of change, allowing it to challenge our perspectives and propel us
towards growth. Yet, we must also value the stability that provides a foundation, a space
where we can cultivate mastery and nurture meaningful connections. Just as the ocean
thrives on the interplay of tides, our lives flourish with a balanced dance between the familiar
and the unknown. We must learn to ride the waves of change, finding solace in the stability
provided by our inner harbor and venturing out with the courage to explore new horizons.
This balanced approach allows us to reap the benefits of both worlds: the security of stability
and the growth fostered by change. It is this dynamic dance that allows us to navigate the
complexities of life with resilience, purpose, and a sense of adventure.

Writing Book Page- 296

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 57:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Nowadays, people all over the world are spending more and more time apart from their
families.

Why is this happening? How does this affect people and their families?

Sample response:

The modern world pulsates with an undeniable hum of busyness, and its echo resonates
within our families. Today, individuals are increasingly spending less time with their loved
ones, a trend driven by a confluence of factors and leaving its mark on both individuals and
families as a whole.

One primary culprit is the relentless pursuit of career advancement. In an era of globalization
and fierce competition, individuals often feel compelled to work longer hours, travel for
extended periods, or even relocate for better opportunities. This relentless pursuit, while
potentially leading to professional success, can exact a heavy toll on family life.

Furthermore, the allure of individual fulfillment and personal growth also plays a role. The
emphasis on self-discovery and independent exploration can lead individuals to prioritize
hobbies, social circles, and solo adventures over dedicated family time. This pursuit of self,
while enriching in its own right, can create a sense of emotional distance within families if not
balanced with quality time spent together.

The consequences of this growing separation are far-reaching. Individuals may experience
feelings of isolation and loneliness, especially when faced with challenges or milestones that
would normally be shared with loved ones. The weakening of family bonds can also lead to
communication difficulties, misunderstandings, and even resentment. For children, the lack of
consistent parental presence can hinder emotional development and foster feelings of
insecurity.

However, it is important to acknowledge that the picture is not entirely bleak. Technology has
bridged geographical distances, allowing for more frequent communication and connection.
Additionally, the growing awareness of the importance of family life has led to a rise in
movements promoting quality time and shared experiences.

In conclusion, the trend of spending less time with family is a complex issue driven by various
factors. While the consequences can be significant, both for individuals and families, it is
important to remember that opportunities for connection and strengthening bonds still exist. By
striking a balance between personal aspirations and family life, we can navigate the modern
world without sacrificing the essential support and love that families provide.
Writing Book Page- 297
Writing Module Task 2

Topic 58:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some people think it is better to have one single legal system throughout the world.
Others say countries should have their own laws.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The notion of a singular legal system governing the entire globe sparks fervent debate. While
advocates hail its potential for universal fairness and streamlined justice, detractors fear it
would erode cultural identities and impose homogeneity upon diverse societies. While the
ideal of global legal unity holds undeniable allure, I can see that a closer examination reveals
its impracticality and potential pitfalls.

Proponents of a unified system envision a world where justice reigns supreme. They argue
that codifying universal principles into a single, accessible framework would ensure equal
treatment for all, regardless of nationality. This, they claim, would eliminate discriminatory
laws and foster international cooperation in tackling global issues like crime and human rights
violations. The potential for swift justice against transnational criminals also holds
considerable appeal, as borders would no longer offer a haven for wrongdoing.

However, the feasibility of such a system remains a significant hurdle. The world's legal
landscape is a tapestry woven from diverse cultural, religious, and historical threads. Imposing
a single set of laws on this intricate fabric risks unraveling the very foundation of individual
societies. Traditions and values deeply embedded in each nation's identity might be deemed
incompatible or even illegal under a universal system, leading to resentment and resistance.
Furthermore, enforcing such a system would require a supranational authority with immense
power, raising concerns about potential abuse and the erosion of national sovereignty.

Moreover, proponents often overlook the inherent flexibility and adaptability of existing legal
systems. National laws are constantly evolving to address emerging challenges and reflect
their unique socio-cultural contexts. A rigid, one-size-fits-all approach would stifle this
dynamism, potentially hindering progress and failing to address the specific needs of diverse
populations.

In conclusion, I think while the dream of a unified legal system might seem alluring, its
impracticalities and potential for cultural homogenization outweigh its purported benefits.
Instead, we should focus on fostering collaboration and understanding between existing legal
systems, striving for a world where justice transcends borders without erasing the unique
tapestry of human cultures.

Writing Book Page- 298

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 59:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many countries obesity and unhealthy eating habits are increasing.
What are the reasons for this trend? What is the most effective way to prevent it?

Sample response:
The prevalence of obesity and unhealthy eating habits is escalating in many countries, posing
a significant threat to individual and public health. This concerning trend stems from a
complex interplay of factors, including changes in lifestyle, food accessibility, and societal
influences.
One of the major drivers is the shift towards sedentary lifestyles. The convenience of
processed food and screen-based entertainment has led to decreased physical activity,
particularly among younger generations. This lack of movement results in a calorie imbalance,
where consumption exceeds expenditure, paving the way for weight gain. Furthermore, the
widespread availability and aggressive marketing of highly processed, calorie-dense foods
contribute significantly to the problem. These readily available options are often low in
nutritional value and high in unhealthy fats, sugars, and salt, making them irresistible to many
consumers. The food industry's targeted advertising tactics further exacerbate the issue,
particularly when aimed at children, who are more susceptible to persuasive messaging.
Beyond individual choices, societal norms and economic disparities also play a role. In
communities where fast food outlets are readily accessible and healthy options are scarce or
expensive, making healthy choices becomes challenging. Additionally, social pressures and
cultural norms surrounding food can influence eating habits, making it difficult to resist
unhealthy indulgences.
While addressing this complex issue requires a multifaceted approach, prioritizing
preventative measures is crucial. Educating individuals about healthy food choices and the
dangers of obesity, particularly during childhood, is vital. This can be achieved through
comprehensive school programs, public awareness campaigns, and community initiatives that
promote healthy eating habits and physical activity. However, the most effective way to
prevent the rise of obesity and unhealthy eating might lie in addressing systemic factors.
Implementing policies that regulate the marketing of unhealthy foods, particularly to children,
and making healthy options more affordable and accessible are critical steps. Additionally,
encouraging and investing in initiatives that promote physical activity and community
engagement can foster healthier lifestyles for all.
In conclusion, the rising trend of obesity and unhealthy eating habits is a complex issue with
multifaceted causes. While individual choices play a role, addressing the systemic factors that
contribute to this problem, from food accessibility to societal norms, is crucial. Through
education, policy changes, and community-driven initiatives, we can work towards creating a
healthier future for all.

Writing Book Page- 299

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 60:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some people believe that if a child commits a crime, he or she should be punished,
while others think it is the child’s parents who should be punished.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The question of who bears responsibility when a child commits a crime sparks heated debate.
While some advocate for direct punishment of the child, others point the finger at the parents,
arguing their negligence is the root cause. Examining both viewpoints reveals a complex issue
where nuanced understanding is crucial.

Advocates of child punishment argue that holding them accountable fosters a sense of justice
and deters future wrongdoing. They believe that understanding the consequences of actions,
regardless of age, is vital for personal growth. Proponents also highlight that certain crimes,
like violence or serious theft, cannot be solely attributed to parental influence, suggesting the
child's individual choices played a significant role. However, applying this principle to children,
whose brains are still developing and whose understanding of consequences may be limited,
raises ethical concerns.

However, proponents of parental accountability argue that children, particularly younger ones,
lack the full capacity to understand the gravity of their actions. They emphasize the influence
of family environment, citing factors like poverty, neglect, or abuse as contributing to a child's
criminal behavior. They believe punishing parents addresses the root cause, potentially
preventing future offenses. While this approach addresses the root causes, punishing parents
for their children's actions can be seen as unfair, especially in cases where they actively tried
to prevent their child's wrongdoings.

In my opinion, the truth likely lies somewhere in between. While individual accountability for
children, especially older teenagers, is essential, solely blaming them ignores the potential
underlying factors influencing their behavior. Parents play a crucial role in shaping a child's
moral compass, and their actions can have significant consequences. However, attributing full
blame to them disregards the child's agency and ability to make independent choices.

Ultimately, addressing this issue requires recognizing the complex interplay between
individual choices and environmental influences. By holding both children and parents
accountable, but within a framework that fosters understanding and support, we can create a
path towards rehabilitation and prevent future harm.

Writing Book Page- 300

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 61:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many countries, students’ concentration in the classroom has decreased.
What are the reasons for this? What are some possible solutions?

Sample response:
The ability to concentrate in the classroom is fundamental to effective learning. However, in
many countries, educators are observing a decline in students' focus, raising concerns about
their academic performance and long-term success. I understand that several factors
contribute to this trend, demanding creative solutions to reignite the flame of concentration.
One key culprit is the pervasive influence of technology. Smartphones and social media act as
constant sirens, luring students away from the present lesson with a never-ending stream of
notifications and distractions. The rapid-fire nature of these platforms cultivates a shortened
attention span, making it difficult to sustain focus on longer lectures or complex tasks.
Furthermore, traditional teaching methods can sometimes feel rigid and uninspiring, failing to
truly engage students' curiosity. Rote memorization and passive learning often leave students
feeling disengaged, leading to daydreaming and a lack of intrinsic motivation. This is
particularly true in classrooms where student interests and learning styles are not adequately
considered. Beyond these external factors, personal challenges also play a role. Stress,
anxiety, and even undiagnosed learning difficulties can hinder concentration, making it difficult
for students to absorb information and participate actively. Additionally, inadequate sleep and
poor nutrition can significantly impact cognitive function, further exacerbating the issue.
To counter these challenges, a multifaceted approach is needed. Firstly, fostering a
technology-free environment during class time is crucial. This could involve designated phone
zones, apps that block distracting websites, or even incorporating technology responsibly into
lessons for engaging activities. Secondly, making learning active and relevant is key.
Interactive lessons, collaborative activities, and incorporating multimedia elements can spark
curiosity and cater to diverse learning styles. Additionally, encouraging open discussions and
student-led projects can foster a sense of ownership and engagement, leading to better focus.
Furthermore, addressing individual needs is essential. Early identification and support for
students with learning difficulties can make a significant difference. Additionally, promoting
mindfulness practices and stress management techniques can equip students with tools to
manage distractions and improve concentration. Finally, ensuring adequate sleep, healthy
eating habits, and regular physical activity is crucial for overall cognitive function. Schools can
collaborate with families and healthcare professionals to create a supportive environment that
prioritizes student well-being.
In conclusion, declining student concentration in the classroom is a complex issue with
multiple contributing factors. By addressing these challenges through technology-aware
teaching, engaging learning methods, individual support, and promoting healthy habits,
educators can help students reclaim their focus and unlock their full potential.

Writing Book Page- 301

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 62:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Nowadays many people choose to be self-employed, rather than to work for a company
or organistaion.
Why might this be the case? What could be the disadvantages of being self-employed?

Sample response:
The traditional employer-employee dynamic is shifting, with a growing number of individuals
opting for the path of self-employment. I believe that this trend can be attributed to several
factors, offering both potential benefits and inherent challenges.
One primary motivator for self-employment is the desire for autonomy and control. Working
independently allows individuals to choose their projects, set their own hours, and shape their
work style. This flexibility can be particularly appealing to those who value freedom and
creativity, enabling them to pursue their passions and tailor their work to their unique
preferences. Additionally, self-employment often opens doors to greater financial rewards.
With hard work and a successful business model, individuals can potentially earn significantly
more than a traditional salary, especially if they are able to attract a large client base.
However, self-employment is not without its drawbacks. One significant disadvantage is the
lack of job security. Unlike salaried employees, self-employed individuals do not receive a
guaranteed income and are solely responsible for generating their own work. This can lead to
periods of financial instability, particularly during initial business development or economic
downturns. Furthermore, the absence of benefits often associated with traditional employment
can be a major hurdle. Self-employed individuals typically lack health insurance, paid time off,
and other benefits provided by companies, requiring them to source and pay for these
necessities themselves.
Another challenge lies in time management and self-discipline. Self-employment demands a
high level of self-motivation and organization. Without the structure of a traditional workplace,
individuals need to set their own deadlines, manage distractions, and maintain a consistent
work ethic. This can be difficult, especially for those accustomed to external oversight and
guidance.
In conclusion, the rise of self-employment reflects a desire for autonomy, flexibility, and
potentially higher financial rewards. However, it is crucial to acknowledge the inherent
challenges, including financial instability, lack of benefits, and the demanding nature of self-
directed work. Ultimately, the decision to pursue self-employment comes down to an
individual's risk tolerance, ability to manage themselves effectively, and the specific goals they
hope to achieve through this path.

Writing Book Page- 302

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 63:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Full-time university students spend most of their time studying. Some people, however,
claim that students need to be involved in other activities as well.
To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement?
Sample response:
While academic commitment is undoubtedly crucial for full-time university students, solely
focusing on studying paints an incomplete picture of their holistic development. I strongly
agree that supplementing academics with diverse activities enriches the university experience
and fosters well-rounded individuals equipped to thrive in the dynamic world beyond
graduation.
Firstly, engaging in other activities beyond studying broadens students' perspectives and
cultivates valuable transferable skills. Whether it's collaborating in a theatre production,
leading a community service project, or participating in a sports team, these experiences
foster teamwork, communication, and leadership skills. These are not just "soft skills" but
crucial assets for navigating diverse professional and personal situations. Furthermore,
activities like volunteering expose students to social realities outside their academic bubble,
fostering empathy and social responsibility.
Secondly, a balanced approach promotes mental and physical well-being, crucial for optimal
academic performance. The pressure of constant studying can be overwhelming, leading to
stress, burnout, and even anxiety. Engaging in activities students enjoy, whether it's dancing,
playing an instrument, or simply spending time in nature, provides a much-needed escape,
allowing them to recharge and return to their studies with renewed focus and energy.
Additionally, physical activities like sports improve physical health and stamina, contributing to
overall well-being.
However, advocating for a balanced approach doesn't imply neglecting academics. Finding
the right balance is key. Students should prioritize academic commitments, utilizing efficient
study techniques and time management skills. Additionally, choosing activities that
complement their studies can be immensely beneficial. For example, a student studying
journalism could volunteer with a local newspaper, gaining practical experience alongside
theoretical knowledge.
In conclusion, while academic achievement is undeniably important, full-time university
students need to be encouraged to explore beyond textbooks. Engaging in diverse activities
enriches their personal and professional lives, fostering crucial skills, promoting well-being,
and ultimately preparing them to be well-rounded individuals ready to embrace the challenges
and opportunities that lie ahead. Striking a healthy balance is key, ensuring both academic
success and a fulfilling university experience that transcends mere grades.

Writing Book Page- 303

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 64:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
It is impossible to help all people in the world, so governments should focus on people
in their own countries.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?
Sample response:
The statement that governments should prioritize their own citizens due to the impossibility of
helping everyone in the world presents a complex dilemma. While practicality might suggest
inward focus, complete disregard for global issues ignores our interconnected world and the
ethical responsibility to alleviate suffering. Therefore, I disagree with the statement, arguing
that effective government action requires a balanced approach that considers both national
needs and global challenges.
Firstly, the claim that helping everyone is impossible overlooks the power of collective action.
Global initiatives, like the Millennium Development Goals, have demonstrably improved lives
across continents. Pooled resources and expertise can tackle issues like poverty and disease
more effectively than individual efforts. Ignoring the plight of others not only weakens this
collective spirit but also risks fostering an "us vs. them" mentality with detrimental
consequences for international cooperation.
Furthermore, focusing solely on domestic issues ignores the interconnectedness of our world.
Pandemics, climate change, and economic crises transcend borders, impacting all nations.
Failing to address these global challenges leaves every country vulnerable. Investing in
solutions like renewable energy or sustainable development benefits not only the immediate
population but fosters a more stable and prosperous global environment for all.
Moreover, ignoring the suffering of others contradicts the fundamental principles of humanity
and compassion. Turning a blind eye to crises like famine or war creates a moral vacuum,
potentially eroding the very values that underpin a just society. While prioritizing national
needs is understandable, it shouldn't come at the expense of basic human decency and
solidarity.
However, it is crucial to acknowledge resource limitations. Governments must strike a
balance, ensuring their citizens' well-being while contributing to global solutions. This could
involve targeted aid programs, collaborating with international organizations, or promoting
policies that address root causes of global issues.
In conclusion, prioritizing only the needs of one's own citizens is a simplistic and ultimately
detrimental approach. While resource limitations exist, focusing solely on domestic issues
ignores the power of collective action, the interconnectedness of our world, and the
fundamental values of compassion. Effective governance requires a balanced approach,
recognizing the responsibility to address both national challenges and global issues. By
working together, we can create a world where helping all becomes not just possible, but a
reality.

Writing Book Page- 304

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 65:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

These days many people prefer to work longer hours and spend less time at home.

Are there more advantages than disadvantages to this trend?

Sample response:

The ever-growing tendency to prioritize work over personal life, often with individuals opting
for longer hours and less time at home, presents a complex scenario with both positive and
negative implications. While proponents emphasize increased productivity and financial gain,
a closer look reveals to me that the disadvantages, particularly regarding personal well-being
and social cohesion, outweigh the potential benefits.

Undoubtedly, longer work hours can lead to increased productivity. With more time dedicated
to tasks, individuals can potentially achieve greater output, potentially benefitting both
themselves and their employers. This can be particularly relevant in fast-paced industries or
during critical project deadlines. Additionally, the financial gains associated with overtime or
higher salaries for longer hours can be attractive, especially for those with significant financial
needs or aspirations.

However, the drawbacks associated with this trend are far-reaching. The most significant
concern lies in the potential detriment to personal well-being. Extended periods of work can
lead to chronic stress, fatigue, and burnout, impacting physical and mental health. This can
manifest in various ways, from increased risk of heart disease and obesity to anxiety and
depression. Additionally, neglecting personal life can contribute to social isolation, weakening
relationships with family and friends.

Furthermore, the impact on social cohesion cannot be ignored. When individuals prioritize
work over personal time, community engagement and participation in social activities suffer.
This can lead to a decline in social capital, weakening the fabric of communities and
potentially hindering collective problem-solving or community initiatives. Moreover, the
emphasis on extended work hours can create a workaholic culture, pressuring others to
conform, even if it comes at the expense of their well-being.

In conclusion, while I agree that the potential for increased productivity and financial gain
associated with longer work hours might seem appealing, the detrimental effects on individual
well-being, social connections, and community life far outweigh these benefits. Striking a
balance between professional aspirations and personal fulfillment is crucial for a sustainable
and healthy society.

Writing Book Page- 305

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 66:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

In many societies, there is a growing emphasis on sustainable living and reducing

environmental impact.

What are the challenges of adopting a sustainable lifestyle?

Sample response:

While the call for sustainability echoes across societies, the journey towards a truly eco-
friendly lifestyle is fraught with challenges. These hurdles range from affordability and
accessibility to ingrained habits and a lack of infrastructure, making the green path one paved
with thorns.

Firstly, the cost of sustainability can be a significant barrier. Organic produce, reusable
alternatives, and energy-efficient appliances often carry a hefty price tag, putting them beyond
the reach of low-income individuals and families. This creates a cycle of inequality, where
those who can afford to be green benefit the most from its advantages.

Accessibility also plays a crucial role. In many regions, sustainable options are limited,
especially in rural areas. Bulk-buying stores, farmers' markets, and repair shops might be
scarce, forcing individuals to rely on conventional, less eco-friendly choices. Additionally,
information on sustainable practices may not be readily available, making it difficult for people
to make informed decisions.

Furthermore, deeply ingrained habits and cultural norms pose a significant challenge. The
convenience of single-use plastics, the allure of fast fashion, and the ingrained car culture all
contribute to unsustainable lifestyles. Breaking these habits requires a conscious effort and a
willingness to disrupt established routines, something many are hesitant to do.

Finally, the lack of infrastructure can hinder the adoption of sustainable practices. Public
transport networks might be inadequate, recycling facilities may be scarce, and renewable
energy options may not be readily available. This lack of infrastructure makes it difficult for
individuals to make sustainable choices even when they are willing and able.

In conclusion, while the desire for a greener future is strong, the challenges of adopting a
sustainable lifestyle are undeniable. From affordability and accessibility to ingrained habits
and inadequate infrastructure, these hurdles can make the path towards a more sustainable
future seem daunting. However, by addressing these challenges through policy changes,
education initiatives, and community-driven solutions, we can create a world where living
green is not just a privilege, but a possibility for all.

Writing Book Page- 306

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 67:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that professional athletes serve as positive role models for young
people, while others argue that their behaviour both on and off the field can have
negative influences.
Discuss both sides and give your opinion.
Sample response:
While the glitz and glamour of professional sports often mask the grueling dedication and
sacrifice required, athletes can be powerful role models for young people. I want to argue that
despite potential pitfalls, the positive influence of their perseverance, teamwork, and
commitment to excellence outweighs any negative aspects, shaping young minds and
inspiring them to achieve their full potential.
Firstly, athletes embody the spirit of unwavering perseverance. Their journeys are rarely
linear, filled with setbacks, injuries, and moments of doubt. Yet, their dedication to overcoming
these hurdles and pushing through adversity teaches invaluable lessons. Young people
witnessing this resilience are encouraged to never give up on their own dreams,
understanding that success often lies beyond the initial challenges.
Secondly, athletes showcase the power of teamwork. Their victories are rarely individual
triumphs; instead, they stem from the collective effort, communication, and trust built within a
team. This collaborative spirit resonates with young audiences, fostering the importance of
working effectively with others, supporting teammates, and celebrating shared goals. This
translates beautifully into various aspects of life, from academics to community engagement.
Finally, the relentless pursuit of excellence displayed by athletes serves as a powerful
motivator for young people. Their commitment to training, honing their skills, and pushing
boundaries inspires audiences to strive for personal growth and continuous improvement. This
dedication to excellence transcends the athletic field, encouraging young individuals to set
ambitious goals and work tirelessly towards achieving them.
However, it is crucial to acknowledge potential pitfalls. Some athletes, unfortunately, succumb
to the pressures of fame and fortune, engaging in behaviors that contradict positive role model
expectations. Highlighting these instances alongside the positive examples is essential for
fostering critical thinking and responsible role model selection in young people.
In conclusion, despite potential drawbacks, the positive influence of athletes' perseverance,
teamwork, and commitment to excellence outweigh any negative aspects. These qualities
resonate deeply with young audiences, shaping their values, motivating their endeavors, and
ultimately guiding them towards achieving their full potential. By learning from both the
triumphs and pitfalls of athletes, young people can find inspiration and forge their own path to
success.

Writing Book Page- 307

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 68:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Universities should accept equal number of male and female students in every subject.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The proposition of enforcing equal numbers of male and female students in every university
subject sparks fervent debate. While the objective of gender parity in education is laudable, a
blanket policy risks undermining individual merit and potentially hindering progress in certain
fields. Therefore, I disagree with the absolute implementation of this proposal, advocating for
a more nuanced approach that prioritizes both fairness and individual choice.

Firstly, enforcing equal numbers disregards the reality of diverse interests and aptitudes.
Stereotyping individuals based solely on gender can be detrimental. Forcing, for example, a
student with a passion for engineering into a nursing program solely to achieve numerical
parity is not only unfair but also potentially stifles their potential and future contribution to their
chosen field.

Secondly, merit-based admissions play a crucial role in ensuring academic excellence.

Imposing quotas could compromise this principle, potentially favoring less qualified candidates
simply to meet gender targets. This not only jeopardizes the quality of education but also
creates an unfair advantage for those who benefit from such a system.

However, dismissing the issue entirely would be remiss. Gender disparities in certain fields,
often stemming from historical biases and societal expectations, require attention.
Encouraging girls to explore STEM fields through targeted outreach programs and addressing
unconscious biases during admissions can pave the way for a more balanced representation
without resorting to rigid quotas. Moreover, universities can foster diversity by creating
inclusive environments that celebrate individual strengths and perspectives, regardless of
gender. This can be achieved through collaborative learning spaces, mentorship programs,
and workshops that challenge traditional stereotypes.

In conclusion, while achieving gender parity in universities is a worthy goal, enforcing fixed
quotas across all subjects risks overlooking individual merit and stifling academic excellence.
A more nuanced approach that addresses underlying biases, encourages exploration of
diverse fields, and fosters inclusive environments holds greater promise in achieving true
gender equality in higher education.

Writing Book Page- 308

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 69:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think the manufacturers and shopping malls should sell fewer packaged
products while others argue that people have the responsibility to buy products with
less packaging.
Discuss both views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:
The issue of excessive packaging is a complex one, sparking debate over who bears the
greater responsibility for its reduction: manufacturers and shopping malls, or individual
consumers. While advocating for personal responsibility is crucial, I firmly believe that the
onus lies primarily on the shoulders of manufacturers and retailers to drastically reduce
packaged products.
Proponents of individual responsibility argue that consumers have the power to drive change
through their purchasing decisions. By opting for products with minimal packaging or bringing
reusable bags, they can send a clear message to manufacturers. However, this approach
overlooks systemic challenges. Not all products offer low-packaging alternatives, and
convenience often wins over environmental consciousness in fast-paced lives. Additionally,
the sheer volume of products consumed daily makes individual action, while commendable,
insufficient to tackle the problem at its source.
Placing the responsibility on manufacturers and retailers holds greater potential for systemic
change. They possess the resources and expertise to develop innovative packaging solutions,
using biodegradable materials and minimizing unnecessary layers. They can also incentivize
sustainable choices by offering discounts for reusable containers or implementing refill
stations. Moreover, shopping malls can influence product offerings by partnering with brands
committed to minimal packaging.
The argument against this approach often cites potential cost increases for manufacturers and
inconvenience for consumers. However, these concerns are often overstated. Studies have
shown that sustainable packaging solutions can be cost-effective in the long run, and
consumer surveys indicate a growing willingness to pay a premium for environmentally
responsible products. Moreover, the long-term benefits outweigh the initial inconveniences,
mitigating the environmental damage of plastic waste and conserving resources.
In conclusion, while individual responsibility plays a role, the burden of reducing packaged
products primarily rests with manufacturers and retailers. Their ability to implement systemic
changes and influence consumer behavior far exceeds the impact of individual choices. By
prioritizing sustainable packaging solutions and collaborating with consumers, we can move
towards a world with less waste and a healthier planet.

Writing Book Page- 309

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 70:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:

In today’s digital age, anyone with a smartphone can capture and share photographs,
this accessibility to photography diminishes the value of professional photographers.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The democratization of photography, fueled by smartphones, has undoubtedly challenged the

landscape of professional photographers. While the statement holds some merit, it paints an
overly simplistic picture. While accessible technology empowers individuals, it cannot replicate
the depth and value offered by professional photographers.

Smartphone cameras boast impressive capabilities, capturing moments with surprising clarity
and ease. This accessibility fosters a culture of personal expression and storytelling through
images. However, technical prowess alone doesn't create impactful photographs. A good
picture requires an understanding of light, composition, storytelling, and the ability to evoke
emotion – skills honed through years of training and experience. Professionals meticulously
craft their shots, manipulating lighting, experimenting with angles, and patiently waiting for the
decisive moment.

Furthermore, professional photography extends beyond the technical. It caters to specific

needs, from capturing weddings to advertising campaigns. Clients require expertise in
understanding their vision, working within specific constraints, and consistently delivering
high-quality results. This demands not just technical mastery, but also business acumen,
interpersonal skills, and the ability to translate abstract ideas into compelling visuals.

However, the rise of smartphones has created new opportunities for professionals. The
demand for high-quality editing and post-processing has surged, requiring skilled
professionals to refine and elevate amateur captures. Additionally, social media platforms
have created new avenues for showcasing talent, allowing professionals to reach wider
audiences and build their brands.

In conclusion, while smartphones have democratized photography, they haven't rendered

professionals obsolete. Their unique skillsets, experience, and ability to cater to specific needs
remain invaluable. The future lies not in a zero-sum game, but in a collaborative space where
technology empowers individuals and professionals complement each other, enriching the
visual landscape in diverse and meaningful ways.

Writing Book Page- 310

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 71:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
The demand for coaching services has grown significantly in the digital age, with
online coaching platforms becoming prevalent. Some now feel online coaching is a
superior option to in-person coach.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?
Sample response:
The digital age has undeniably spurred the demand for coaching services, with online
platforms exploding in popularity. While some hail them as the superior option, I believe online
coaching, despite its merits, cannot entirely replace the irreplaceable value of in-person
interaction.
Online platforms offer undeniable advantages. Their accessibility transcends geographical
barriers, connecting individuals with diverse coaches worldwide. The flexibility allows for
sessions at convenient times, catering to busy schedules. Moreover, the cost-effectiveness
often attracts budget-conscious individuals seeking professional guidance. Additionally,
technology-integrated tools like video conferencing and data tracking enhance engagement
and personalized feedback.
However, the human element remains crucial for optimal coaching. In-person sessions foster
a deeper connection between coach and client, facilitating trust and emotional support. Non-
verbal cues and immediate feedback on body language and energy are invaluable for
addressing underlying issues. The shared physical space creates a focused environment, free
from digital distractions. This can be particularly beneficial for those struggling with self-
motivation or accountability.
Furthermore, certain coaching areas, like physical training or performance arts, require hands-
on guidance and real-time adjustments, which are best delivered in person. Additionally, for
individuals with specific learning styles or limited technological access, online coaching might
prove ineffective.
Therefore, instead of viewing online and in-person coaching as rivals, we should recognize
them as complementary tools. The ideal approach may involve a hybrid model, leveraging the
flexibility and reach of online platforms while incorporating the irreplaceable human connection
and adaptability of in-person sessions. Ultimately, the choice depends on individual needs and
preferences.
In conclusion, while online coaching offers undeniable advantages, it cannot fully replace the
unique benefits of in-person interaction. A nuanced approach, embracing both modalities,
holds the key to unlocking the full potential of coaching in the digital age.

Writing Book Page- 311

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 72:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In recent years, there has been a rise in the use of performance-enhancing drugs in
sports.
What are the consequences of doping for athletes? What measures should be taken to
combat this issue?

Sample response:
The recent surge in performance-enhancing drug (PED) use in sports casts a long shadow on
athletic integrity and athlete well-being. The consequences for individuals caught doping are
severe, ranging from disqualification and reputational damage to health risks and
psychological distress. To safeguard the spirit of fair play and protect athletes, a multi-pronged
approach is crucial.
Firstly, doping tarnishes careers and legacies. Athletes who test positive face bans, stripped
medals, and public scrutiny, erasing years of dedication. This not only impacts their livelihood
but also shatters their dreams and leaves an indelible stain on their achievements.
Additionally, the pressure to win and the allure of success can lead athletes down dangerous
paths, risking their health with potentially life-threatening side effects from PEDs. Secondly,
the rise of doping erodes the very foundation of sportsmanship. When athletes gain an unfair
advantage through chemical means, the level playing field is distorted, undermining fair
competition and discouraging clean athletes. This betrayal of trust and the erosion of public
faith in the authenticity of sporting triumphs are detrimental to the long-term health of any
sport.
Combating this issue requires a collaborative effort. Stringent testing protocols with effective
detection methods are essential to deter and catch offenders. Additionally, harsher penalties,
including lifetime bans and financial sanctions, can act as strong deterrents. Education
programs for athletes and coaches emphasizing the ethical and health risks of doping are
crucial to shift mentalities and foster a culture of clean competition. Furthermore, promoting
alternative pathways to success, such as improved training methods and nutritional guidance,
can empower athletes to achieve their best without resorting to PEDs. Finally, fostering a
culture of respect for clean competition and celebrating the dedication and hard work of
athletes, regardless of results, can create a positive shift within the sporting community.
In conclusion, the rise of doping in sports is a complex issue with severe consequences for
individuals and the integrity of the games. By implementing stricter testing, harsher penalties,
educational programs, and a culture shift towards clean competition, we can combat this issue
and ensure that athletic achievements are truly a testament to dedication, skill, and the human
spirit.

Writing Book Page- 312

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 73:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

In many societies, there is a growing emphasis on individualism, with people

prioritizing their personal goals and desires over collective interests.

Is this is a positive or negative development?

Sample response:

While the rise of individualism, prioritizing personal goals over collective interests, may seem
liberating, its impact on society is a double-edged sword. While it fosters innovation and self-
actualization, I believe it also risks fracturing communities and eroding social responsibility.

On the positive side, individualism unleashes the power of the individual. Freed from rigid
social expectations, people pursue diverse dreams, fueling innovation and progress. Imagine
Marie Curie, driven by her own curiosity, defying societal norms to unlock revolutionary
scientific discoveries. Similarly, entrepreneurs, unconstrained by traditional hierarchies, can
create groundbreaking businesses. This individualistic spirit breeds creativity and propels
societies forward.

However, the emphasis on "me" can come at a cost. When individual ambition trumps
collective well-being, social cohesion weakens. The fabric of community, woven from shared
values and mutual support, can fray. Imagine a society where everyone prioritizes personal
wealth, neglecting the environment or common infrastructure. Such a society, fractured and
self-absorbed, ultimately harms everyone.

Furthermore, individualism can breed isolation and loneliness. Prioritizing individual desires
can mean neglecting personal connections and social responsibilities. Imagine a society
where families prioritize individual careers over spending time together, or where neighbors
ignore each other's needs. Such atomization can lead to a pervasive sense of isolation,
eroding the very foundations of human connection.

Therefore, while individualism holds immense potential, its excesses can be harmful. The
challenge lies in finding a balance. We must nurture individual dreams while fostering a sense
of shared responsibility and community spirit. Perhaps Marie Curie's story best exemplifies
this balance. Driven by her individual passion, she simultaneously served humanity with her
groundbreaking discoveries. In conclusion, individualism, a powerful force, requires a nuanced
approach. Embracing its positive aspects while mitigating its pitfalls is crucial for building a
society that thrives on both individual dreams and collective well-being.

Writing Book Page- 313

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 74:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Young people are often influenced in their behaviors by others in the same age group.
Some argue that peer pressure is important while others feel it has distinct
disadvantages.

Do the disadvantages of peer pressure outweigh the advantages?

Sample response:

Young people, navigating the turbulent waters of identity and belonging, are profoundly
impacted by their peers. While some argue that peer pressure is a harmful influence, I believe
its role in shaping young lives is multifaceted, presenting both advantages and disadvantages,
with the potential for positive growth outweighing the risks when managed effectively.

Firstly, peer pressure can be a powerful motivator for positive change. Encouragement from
friends to join a sports team, try a new hobby, or volunteer in the community can push young
people outside their comfort zones, fostering personal development and valuable life
experiences. This social influence can be especially crucial for individuals who struggle with
self-confidence or lack initiative, providing the nudge needed to unlock their potential.

Furthermore, peer pressure fosters a sense of belonging and acceptance. It allows young
people to feel part of a group, validated by shared experiences and common interests. This
sense of community can be a powerful buffer against loneliness, alienation, and risky
behaviors often associated with isolation. In a world increasingly focused on individual
achievement, healthy peer pressure can provide the vital social support young people need to
thrive.

However, the influence of peers can also lead down dangerous paths. The desire to fit in can
pressure young people into engaging in risky behaviors, such as substance abuse,
unprotected sex, or cyberbullying. This can have severe consequences for their physical and
mental well-being, highlighting the need for critical thinking skills and the ability to resist
negative pressure.

Ultimately, the impact of peer pressure hinges on the maturity and values of the young person
and the nature of the group dynamics. While the potential for harm exists, the positive aspects
of peer pressure, when harnessed effectively, can be invaluable tools for personal growth,
social integration, and building a strong sense of self. By fostering open communication,
critical thinking skills, and access to positive role models, we can equip young people to
navigate the complexities of peer pressure and emerge stronger, more well-rounded
individuals.

Writing Book Page- 314

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 75:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Virtual reality be used as a tool for therapeutic interventions and mental health
treatments.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:
Virtual reality (VR) stands poised to revolutionize mental health treatment. There are of course
ethical considerations and accessibility concerns, which necessitate a cautious approach,
ensuring responsible integration into existing treatment paradigms. While the technology still
holds nascent potential, I am of the opinion that its immersive capabilities offer a unique tool
for therapeutic interventions, promising significant benefits for individuals and the healthcare
system alike.
On the one hand, VR's immersive nature presents a powerful advantage. Exposure therapy, a
cornerstone for treating anxiety disorders like phobias, can be conducted in safe, controlled
virtual environments, allowing patients to confront their fears gradually without the risks
associated with real-world exposure. This can significantly accelerate progress and decrease
the likelihood of dropouts, a common challenge in traditional therapy. VR can also be used to
create personalized scenarios tailored to individual needs, addressing specific triggers and
anxieties.
Furthermore, VR can provide access to therapeutic experiences that would otherwise be
impractical or impossible. Imagine a soldier suffering from PTSD revisiting the battlefield in a
controlled setting, or a child with autism experiencing social interactions in a virtual
playground. These scenarios, once confined to imagination, can now become tangible tools
for healing and growth.
However, ethical considerations cannot be ignored. The immersive nature of VR raises
concerns about potential emotional overwhelm or dissociation. Additionally, ensuring equitable
access to this technology is crucial, as cost and technical barriers could exacerbate existing
disparities in mental healthcare.
Therefore, while VR holds immense potential as a therapeutic tool, its integration into mental
health treatment must be cautious and deliberate. Robust research and ethical guidelines are
essential to ensure its safe and effective implementation. Only then can VR truly become a
powerful ally in the fight for mental well-being, offering a unique and immersive path to healing
for individuals and communities alike.

Writing Book Page- 315

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 76:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Friendships that take place online are not as meaningful as those where people meet
each other face to face.
To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:
The internet has revolutionized communication and it has also sparked debate about the
depth of online friendships compared to their offline counterparts. I disagree with the
statement that online friendships are inherently less meaningful, believing they offer unique
advantages that can foster strong connections.
Undeniably, online interactions lack the richness of face-to-face encounters. Non-verbal cues,
shared experiences, and the emotional resonance of physical presence are absent in the
digital realm. This can hinder the development of intimacy and trust, making it harder to fully
understand and support each other. Moreover, online friendships can be susceptible to
misinterpretation and manipulation due to the ease of creating curated online personas.
However, dismissing online friendships as shallow underestimates their potential. The internet
allows us to connect with individuals who share niche interests or experiences, transcending
geographical and social barriers. This can foster profound connections based on shared
passions and understanding, fostering a sense of belonging and acceptance that might be
difficult to find offline. Additionally, the asynchronous nature of online communication allows
for deeper reflection and thoughtful responses, potentially leading to more meaningful
conversations.
Furthermore, technology is bridging the gap between online and offline interactions. Video
calls, online games, and virtual reality experiences allow for a more immersive and nuanced
online connection, incorporating elements of shared presence and non-verbal communication.
Importantly, online friendships can often blossom into real-life connections, solidifying the
bond formed online through shared experiences in the physical world.
Therefore, the meaningfulness of friendship transcends the medium through which it is
formed. While online friendships may lack certain aspects of face-to-face interactions, their
unique strengths allow for deep connections and shared understanding. Ultimately, the value
of a friendship lies not in its form, but in the quality of the connection and the mutual support it
offers individuals.

Writing Book Page- 316

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 77:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

In recent years, there has been a significant increase in the number of oil drilling
operations in remote locations around the world. This has brought economic benefits
to some countries, though it has also raised concerns about the environmental impact
of these operations.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The allure of hidden oil reserves in remote corners of the globe has ignited a drilling frenzy,
promising economic prosperity for some while igniting environmental concerns for others.
While the short-term economic benefits are undeniable, I can see that the long-term
environmental costs demand a cautious approach, prioritizing sustainability over fleeting
gains.

The economic argument for remote drilling is compelling. Exploiting untapped oil reserves can
fuel economic growth, create jobs, and generate much-needed revenue for developing
nations. Remote communities, often isolated and resource-scarce, can see a significant influx
of investment, infrastructure development, and improved living standards. Additionally,
diversifying energy sources and reducing dependence on traditional oil-producing regions can
enhance geopolitical stability.

However, the environmental cost cannot be ignored. Drilling disrupts fragile ecosystems,
threatens endangered species, and pollutes pristine landscapes. Accidental spills and leaks
can have devastating consequences, while the release of greenhouse gases during extraction
and transportation contributes to climate change, a threat exceeding national borders. The
long-term consequences for local communities, whose livelihoods often depend on the
delicate balance of the ecosystem, can be catastrophic.

Therefore, while the economic benefits of remote drilling are attractive, they must be weighed
against the potential environmental damage. Sustainable solutions, such as renewable energy
sources and stricter environmental regulations, need to be prioritized. Investing in green
technology can create new jobs and economic opportunities, while protecting the environment
for future generations.

Ultimately, the pursuit of short-term economic gains through remote drilling cannot come at
the expense of long-term environmental sustainability. A balanced approach, prioritizing both
economic development and environmental protection, is crucial to ensure a prosperous and
sustainable future for all.

Writing Book Page- 317

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 78:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Fossil fuels are the main source of energy around the world today. In some countries,
the use of alternative sources of energy is replacing fossil fuels.
Is this a positive or negative development?
Sample response:
Fossil fuels have long dominated the world's energy landscape, their convenient extraction
and high energy density propelling our industrial and social progress. However, their reign is
increasingly challenged by the rise of alternative energy sources like solar, wind, and
geothermal. While transitioning away from fossil fuels presents challenges, I think that it
ultimately represents a positive development for our planet and future generations.
The most compelling argument for this shift lies in the environmental ramifications of fossil fuel
dependence. Their combustion releases greenhouse gases, trapping heat and driving climate
change, with devastating consequences like rising sea levels, extreme weather events, and
biodiversity loss. By shifting to renewable sources, we can significantly reduce these
emissions, mitigating the worst effects of climate change and safeguarding the health of our
planet.
Furthermore, fossil fuels are a finite resource. Their reserves are steadily dwindling, raising
concerns about energy security and potential price volatility in the future. Conversely,
alternative energy sources are virtually limitless. Solar power harnesses the sun's energy, a
constant and inexhaustible resource. Wind energy taps into the Earth's natural atmospheric
movements, while geothermal power leverages the planet's internal heat. Embracing these
abundant and sustainable sources ensures long-term energy security for future generations.
While the transition to renewable energy presents challenges, advancements in technology
and infrastructure are rapidly addressing them. Costs of solar panels and wind turbines have
dropped significantly, making them increasingly cost-competitive with fossil fuels. Additionally,
advancements in battery storage are mitigating the intermittency issues associated with some
renewable sources.
Moreover, the shift towards renewable energy can create significant economic benefits.
Investing in these technologies stimulates innovation, creates green jobs, and fosters new
industries. This transition can revitalize economies and empower communities, particularly in
regions with abundant renewable resources.
In conclusion, while the dependence on fossil fuels has fueled our past, it is time to embrace
the sunlit path forward. The environmental, economic, and long-term security benefits of
transitioning to renewable energy sources outweigh any temporary challenges. By harnessing
the power of nature, we can secure a sustainable future for ourselves and generations to
come, leaving behind a legacy of environmental consciousness and innovation.

Writing Book Page- 318

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 79:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Many believe that the goal of one’s career should be to pursue a passion while others
feel it is merely a way to earn a livelihood.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The age-old question of what defines a fulfilling career resurfaces: should it be a vessel for
burning passion, or a pragmatic means to secure a livelihood? While both perspectives hold
merit, I firmly believe that a career's true goal lies in striking a balance between personal
fulfillment and practical security.

Advocates of the "passion first" approach emphasize the joy and intrinsic motivation derived
from pursuing a calling. They argue that work becomes less like a chore and more like an
expression of oneself, leading to greater satisfaction and productivity. Witness the artist who
thrives in the creative process, the doctor driven to heal, or the teacher who ignites young
minds. However, this path can be fraught with uncertainty and financial instability, especially in
fields with high competition or limited income potential.

The "livelihood first" camp prioritizes stability and security. They believe a career should
provide for one's basic needs and offer opportunities for advancement, regardless of personal
interest. This approach ensures financial independence and peace of mind, allowing
individuals to pursue their passions outside of work. However, it can lead to feelings of
stagnation and disengagement, especially if the work itself is uninspiring or unfulfilling.

The ideal lies in a nuanced approach that acknowledges both aspects. A career should offer a
blend of financial security and personal fulfillment. This could involve finding a role that aligns
with one's skills and interests while offering a stable income. It could also involve pursuing a
passion as a side hustle, gradually transitioning it into a primary career as it gains traction.
Ultimately, the goal should be to create a work-life balance that fosters both personal growth
and financial security.

Finding this balance is not always easy. It requires introspection, exploration, and continuous
adaptation. However, by prioritizing both passion and practical needs, we can navigate the
world of work with greater purpose, satisfaction, and ultimately, achieve a fulfilling career.

Writing Book Page- 319

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 80:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Today, many people do not know their neighbors.

Why is this? What can be done about this?

Sample response:

The comforting image of friendly neighbors, sharing cups of sugar and exchanging gossip
over picket fences, seems increasingly distant in today's world. Many individuals, particularly
in urban areas, find themselves living alongside strangers, unaware of the lives unfolding just
beyond their doorsteps. I believe that this trend, while seemingly innocuous, carries significant
consequences, and requires proactive solutions to bridge the growing chasm between
neighbors.

One key factor contributing to this disconnect is the intensification of our individual lives. Busy
schedules, fueled by demanding careers and digital distractions, leave little room for
spontaneous social interaction. We retreat into our homes, connecting with the world through
screens rather than through face-to-face encounters with those in our immediate
surroundings. This isolation is further amplified by the changing nature of our communities.
Dense apartment complexes and gated communities, while offering security, often lack the
shared spaces and organic interactions that foster neighborly bonds.

Fortunately, efforts can be made to counter this trend and cultivate a sense of community.
Initiating small, informal interactions can spark bigger changes. A simple "hello" in the hallway,
a shared smile over a garden, or offering a helping hand during a minor crisis can be the
seeds of lasting connections. Community-driven initiatives, such as potluck dinners,
neighborhood clean-up days, or shared book clubs, can create opportunities for interaction
and build a sense of belonging. Furthermore, architectural and urban design can play a role.
Shared green spaces, community gardens, and public gathering areas can encourage
impromptu encounters and foster a sense of shared ownership over the physical environment.

In conclusion, the decline of neighborly connections presents a challenge to our sense of

community and well-being. By recognizing the factors contributing to this trend and actively
fostering connections through simple acts and thoughtful initiatives, we can rediscover the
value of knowing the faces and stories behind the doors around us. Ultimately, rebuilding
these connections is not just about reviving a nostalgic image, but about creating a more
supportive, vibrant, and resilient community for all.

Writing Book Page- 320

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 81:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some people feel that cities should allow for spaces for graffiti while others feel it
should be banned.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The debate on graffiti in urban environments rages on, often splitting communities between
those who see it as art and those who view it as vandalism. While the concerns of the latter
are understandable, I believe designated spaces for legal graffiti offer significant benefits,
fostering artistic expression, revitalizing neglected areas, and strengthening community
identity.

Opponents of graffiti often cite property damage and aesthetic concerns. Uncontrolled tagging
can deface public spaces, leading to feelings of disorder and disrespect. Additionally, the
removal of illegal graffiti can be costly and time-consuming. However, legal graffiti spaces
mitigate these concerns by providing designated areas for artists to express themselves freely
without harming private property.

Furthermore, legal graffiti can breathe new life into neglected urban areas. Colorful murals
and artistic interventions can transform drab walls into vibrant landmarks, attracting visitors
and boosting local businesses. Studies have shown that well-designed public art can even
contribute to crime reduction by creating a sense of community ownership and pride.

Perhaps the most compelling argument for legal graffiti spaces lies in its potential to empower
and connect communities. By providing a platform for local artists, these spaces can foster
creative expression and dialogue, particularly among marginalized groups who might not have
access to traditional art forms. Moreover, engaging the community in the creation and
maintenance of these spaces can strengthen social bonds and foster a sense of belonging.

Of course, implementing legal graffiti spaces requires careful planning and management.
Clear guidelines on content and artistic quality are crucial to prevent misuse. Additionally,
community involvement in the design and selection of artists can ensure that the art reflects
the local identity and values.

In conclusion, while the concerns surrounding illegal graffiti are valid, designating spaces for
legal expression offers numerous advantages. From revitalizing urban areas to fostering
artistic expression and community engagement, legal graffiti can be a powerful tool for
positive change in our cities. By embracing its artistic and social potential, we can transform
the walls of our cities into vibrant canvases for creativity and connection.

Writing Book Page- 321

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 82:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Some countries have legal ages at which people can drink. Other countries believe not
have strict laws is a better policy.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The debate regarding legal drinking ages rages on, with proponents advocating for clear
boundaries and opponents championing a less restrictive approach. While both sides raise
valid points, I believe a balanced stance, incorporating elements of both perspectives, holds
the key to responsible alcohol consumption.

Strict legal drinking ages undoubtedly offer tangible benefits. They curb underage drinking,
reducing the risk of alcohol-related accidents, injuries, and health issues. Studies show a
direct correlation between higher MLDA (Minimum Legal Drinking Age) and decreased rates
of alcohol-induced fatalities, especially among young drivers. Additionally, these laws provide
a clear framework for enforcement, aiding authorities in tackling underage drinking and its
associated consequences.

However, strict MLDA can also have unintended drawbacks. It can foster a culture of binge
drinking and risky behavior among those who reach the legal age. The sudden access to
alcohol after years of prohibition can lead to excessive consumption, negating the potential
benefits of delayed exposure. Additionally, strict laws can push underage drinking
underground, making it more dangerous and difficult to monitor.

Instead of a rigid legal framework, perhaps a more flexible approach holds promise. This
could involve increased education and awareness campaigns about responsible drinking,
targeting both young people and adults. Additionally, parental involvement and open
communication within families can play a crucial role in shaping responsible attitudes towards
alcohol. Furthermore, fostering a culture of moderation and responsible consumption through
community-based initiatives can be highly effective.

Ultimately, the key lies in striking a balance between individual freedom and societal
responsibility. While legal drinking ages provide a safety net, they should be complemented by
broader efforts that foster responsible drinking habits from a young age. This comprehensive
approach, encompassing education, awareness, and community involvement, holds the
potential to create a society where individuals can enjoy alcohol responsibly, minimizing its
negative impact on health and safety.

Writing Book Page- 322

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 83:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Doing an enjoyable activity with a child can is better for their overall skills development
and creativity than reading.
To what extent do you agree?
Sample response:
The statement that engaging in enjoyable activities surpasses reading in fostering a child's
overall skills and creativity is a complex one. While I acknowledge the undeniable benefits of
interactive play, I firmly believe that both activities offer unique and complementary
contributions to a child's development, making a balanced approach the true key to success.
On one hand, enjoyable activities provide a fertile ground for diverse skill development.
Building sandcastles cultivates fine motor skills and problem-solving, while playing sports
hones teamwork and strategic thinking. Engaging in music or art encourages self-expression
and imaginative exploration, while collaborative games nurture social skills and
communication. This hands-on, interactive engagement allows children to learn through
experience, solidifying concepts and fostering a deeper understanding than passive reading
alone can offer.
However, dismissing the power of reading would be a mistake. Books offer children a gateway
to worlds beyond their immediate surroundings, sparking curiosity and igniting their
imaginations. Through stories, they encounter diverse characters, cultures, and perspectives,
broadening their understanding of the world and themselves. Reading also exposes them to
rich vocabulary, complex sentence structures, and different writing styles, laying the
foundation for strong language skills and critical thinking. Moreover, the act of reading itself
cultivates focus, attention to detail, and independent learning habits, all crucial for academic
success.
Therefore, the optimal approach lies in striking a balance between the two. Reading sessions
should be engaging and interactive, with discussions, questions, and creative activities that
bridge the gap between the written word and the child's lived experience. Conversely,
enjoyable activities should be enriched with storytelling elements, turning them into learning
opportunities. Imagine describing the physics of a bouncing ball while playing catch, or
narrating a story while building a block tower.
In conclusion, both enjoyable activities and reading offer distinct and valuable contributions to
a child's holistic development. By embracing a balanced approach that seamlessly integrates
both elements, we can nurture a generation of curious, creative, and well-rounded individuals
equipped to face the challenges of the future. Remember, the joy of learning lies in the
exploration of diverse avenues, and a child's development truly flourishes when both play and
stories hold their rightful place.

Writing Book Page- 323

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 84:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Ambition is a positive quality for people to have in society today.
How important is it for people who want to succeed in life? Is it a positive or negative
characteristic?

Sample response:
In today's rapidly evolving society, ambition often takes center stage. It's lauded as a driving
force for personal success, but is it truly a positive quality for individuals and society as a
whole? While ambition undoubtedly fuels progress and innovation, its untempered pursuit can
lead to detrimental consequences.
On the positive side, ambition acts as a potent motivator. It propels individuals towards goals,
pushing them to learn, grow, and contribute meaningfully. Imagine a doctor fueled by the
ambition to eradicate a disease, or an engineer driven by the desire to create sustainable
energy solutions. Their ambition translates into tangible benefits for society, pushing
boundaries and creating a better future. Furthermore, ambition fosters resilience. When faced
with obstacles, an ambitious individual is more likely to persevere, overcome challenges, and
learn from setbacks. This tenacity is crucial for navigating the complexities of life and
achieving goals.
However, ambition can become a double-edged sword. Unchecked ambition can morph into
self-interest and a relentless pursuit of personal gain, regardless of the consequences. This
can manifest in unethical practices, exploitation of others, and disregard for the environment.
Consider the ruthless corporate leader who prioritizes profits over employee welfare or the
politician driven by power who manipulates public opinion. Their ambition, while propelling
them to personal success, comes at the cost of societal harm.
Therefore, it's crucial to recognize that ambition is not inherently positive or negative. Its
impact depends on how it's channeled and directed. A society thrives when individual
ambition is tempered by ethical considerations and a sense of collective responsibility.
Fostering an environment that encourages responsible ambition, where individual goals align
with the betterment of society, is key. Educational systems can instill values of empathy and
social responsibility alongside ambition. Additionally, promoting ethical leadership and
celebrating individuals who use their ambition for positive change can serve as guiding lights.
In conclusion, ambition is a powerful force that can shape both individual lives and societal
progress. While its potential for good is undeniable, its potential for harm cannot be ignored.
By nurturing responsible ambition, a society can harness its positive energy to achieve
collective advancement and a more just world.

Writing Book Page- 324

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 85:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
A portion of the human population believes that criminal behaviour has its roots in
genes. Others think that circumstances lead people to commit crimes.
Discuss both views and put forward your opinions.

Sample response:
The age-old question of what drives individuals to commit crimes continues to spark heated
debate. While some firmly believe that criminal behaviour is etched in our genes, others argue
that it's a product of the harsh realities of our environment. This essay will delve into both
perspectives, exploring the complex interplay between nature and nurture in shaping criminal
tendencies.
Advocates of the genetic link point to studies showing higher rates of criminality among
individuals with family members convicted of similar offences. They argue that specific genes,
like those associated with impulsivity or aggression, can predispose individuals towards
transgressions. Additionally, they highlight the role of neurotransmitters like serotonin, which
influence mood regulation and impulse control. In their view, these biological factors create an
inherent susceptibility to criminal behaviour.
However, dismissing environmental influences paints an incomplete picture. Opponents of the
genetic argument cite the abundance of individuals who rise above their genetic
predispositions and lead law-abiding lives. They emphasize the powerful impact of upbringing,
poverty, and exposure to violence on shaping a person's moral compass. For them, factors
like neglectful families, gang affiliation, and limited access to opportunities create a breeding
ground for criminal activity.
The truth, however, lies in the intricate dance between genes and circumstances. While genes
may lay the groundwork, it's the environment that orchestrates the final act. A person with a
genetic predisposition towards impulsivity might be less likely to succumb to its influence if
raised in a supportive family with clear boundaries. Conversely, even individuals with no
genetic vulnerabilities might be pushed towards crime by extreme poverty or exposure to
violence.
Therefore, attributing criminal behaviour solely to genes or circumstances is not only reductive
but also potentially dangerous. The focus should shift towards understanding how these
factors interact, creating a personalized approach to rehabilitation and prevention. Early
intervention, access to education and support systems, and addressing social inequalities can
mitigate the impact of both genetic predispositions and harmful environments.
In conclusion, the roots of crime are rarely singular. Recognizing the complex interplay
between genes and circumstances is crucial for crafting effective solutions. Only by
understanding the individual's unique story – their genetic makeup intertwined with their lived
experiences – can we truly address the root causes of criminal behaviour and build a safer
future for all.

Writing Book Page- 325

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 86:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

Nowadays there are instances of violence involving crazy football fans all over the
world.

What are the main reasons behind this violence and what measures can be taken to
reduce this problem?

Sample Answer:

Over the last couple of centuries football has transpired as the one true global sport that all
nations love and participate in. It is a game of skills, strength, spirit and exuberance. But sadly
the rush of the game often oozes malice among the avid spectators who become violent. Still
football is not to be blamed, because hooliganism is rooted not in the game but various social
reasons beyond it.

Games and sports have always been a part of human history. People, from ancient times,
have shed blood and sweat on the turf and used their wit and spite against each other for the
pleasure of wining. Only, with time, the blood and spite has lessened. Now violence resides
around the arena rather than in it. But, of course, the belligerence in and around the stadium
is not an anomaly and is only consistent with the rest of the locale. As it is universally
recognized, a mob, of football fans or others, is a disaster waiting to happen. Given the
popularity of football, it attracts an enormous number of people with opposing views and,
football crazy or not, such untamed gatherings often end in tragedy.

Also, hooligans could be taken as the sole responsibility of football only if they were otherwise
civilized, law abidingly living peaceful and serene lives. But that is not the case. Take Carlton
Leach, the infamous London hooligan from the 1980s, for example. As a young football fan he
was abusive to the opponents, making the team sport look guilty of inspiring antagonism. But
graduating into professional crime later in his life, he has proven that it was not football that
occasionally irked his civility, rather he was always a violent criminal who rampaged
everything he touched.

So to conclude that football causes violence is only ignorance. Human history proves that
violence is an unfortunate congenital defect of our species. Therefore, we must stop
stigmatizing football or any other game for our embedded cruelty and start curing ourselves
from it.

Writing Book Page- 326

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 87:

Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the

following topic:

More and more people today expect to get what they want instantly (goods, services,
news), without having to wait.

Why is this? Do you think these expectations to get things instantly is a positive or
negative development?

Sample Answer:

The modern world pulsates with an insatiable thirst for immediacy. From same-day deliveries
to real-time news updates, the expectation of instant gratification permeates every aspect of
our lives. While some may bemoan this as a harbinger of impatience and a decline in delayed
satisfaction, I firmly believe this shift towards instantaneous fulfillment is a positive
development.

Firstly, it empowers individuals with unprecedented control and convenience. Gone are the
days of waiting weeks for a package to arrive; online shopping platforms offer instant access
to a vast array of goods, delivered to our doorsteps within hours. Information, once locked
away in libraries or newspapers, is now readily available at our fingertips, empowering
individuals to make informed decisions in real-time. This newfound control fosters a sense of
agency and independence, allowing us to shape our experiences without unnecessary delays.

Furthermore, the demand for instant gratification fuels innovation and efficiency. Businesses
are constantly striving to outdo each other by offering faster services, quicker solutions, and
more streamlined processes. This competition breeds innovation, leading to the development
of new technologies and methodologies that benefit everyone. For instance, the pressure for
faster delivery times has led to advancements in logistics and transportation, ultimately
improving the efficiency of the entire supply chain.

However, it is crucial to acknowledge the potential pitfalls of instant gratification. The constant
barrage of stimuli and immediate access to everything can lead to information overload and a
decline in attention spans. Additionally, the pressure for instant results can discourage
patience and perseverance, crucial qualities for personal growth and long-term success.

In conclusion, while the prevalence of instant gratification may have its drawbacks, it
ultimately serves as a catalyst for positive change. It empowers individuals, fosters innovation,
and enhances efficiency. By harnessing its potential while acknowledging its limitations, we
can navigate this era of immediacy and reap its many benefits.

Writing Book Page- 327

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 88:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Extreme sports such as skydiving and rock climbing are very dangerous and should be
banned.
To what extent do you agree or disagree with this view?

Sample response:
The allure of the dangerous, the thrill of pushing boundaries, often fuels the flames of extreme
sports like skydiving and rock climbing. To label them as solely ‘dangerous’ and advocate for
a ban ignores the profound benefits they offer individuals and the wider society. While
acknowledging inherent risks, I firmly disagree with the proposition of banning these activities.
Firstly, banning extreme sports infringes upon individual freedom and autonomy. Choosing to
participate in these activities, after understanding and accepting the risks, is a fundamental
right. Individuals should be empowered to make informed decisions about their own bodies
and experiences, especially when rigorous safety protocols are in place. Imposing a ban
undermines this agency and reduces individuals to mere subjects dictated by fear.
Secondly, the supposed dangers often mask significant physical and mental health benefits.
Extreme sports require immense physical fitness, pushing participants to their limits and
nurturing resilience. They demand mental focus and discipline, fostering quick decision-
making and problem-solving skills. The sense of accomplishment after overcoming a
challenging climb or freefalling through the air is unparalleled, boosting confidence and self-
esteem. These benefits spill over into other aspects of life, contributing to a healthier and
more fulfilling existence.
Furthermore, the argument for a ban often overlooks the extensive safety measures and
regulations that govern extreme sports. Participants undergo rigorous training, wear
specialized equipment, and adhere to strict safety protocols. Many accidents occur due to
negligence or disregard for safety, not inherent flaws in the activity itself. Focusing on
enforcing safety regulations and promoting responsible participation is a more effective
approach than a blanket ban.
Finally, extreme sports contribute significantly to societal growth. They push the boundaries of
human capability, inspiring innovation in equipment and safety technology. They foster a
sense of adventure and exploration, reminding us of the vast potential within ourselves and
the natural world. Moreover, they create vibrant communities of passionate individuals,
fostering camaraderie, teamwork, and mutual support. Banning them would stifle these
positive contributions and diminish the richness of human experience.
In conclusion, while acknowledging the inherent risks of extreme sports, I believe banning
them is a detrimental overreaction. The individual freedom, physical and mental health
benefits, stringent safety measures, and societal contributions outweigh the dangers. Instead
of imposing limitations, let us focus on promoting responsible participation and celebrating the
thrill of pushing our boundaries, both individually and collectively.

Writing Book Page- 328

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 89:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think that when recruiting, companies should aim to take on people who
are innovative and able to work independently, while others consider they should
recruit people who are able to work in a team and follow instructions.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:
In the realm of corporate recruitment, there is an ongoing debate regarding the ideal attributes
of prospective employees. One school of thought posits that companies should prioritize
candidates who demonstrate innovation and the capacity for independent work, while another
advocates for individuals who excel at teamwork and readily follow instructions. I will examine
both viewpoints before asserting that, for most modern organizations, a blend of these
qualities is crucial, though the ability to collaborate effectively remains paramount.

Those who champion innovation and independence argue that these traits are vital for
organizational growth and competitiveness. Independent thinkers often bring fresh
perspectives, challenge the status quo, and can solve complex problems without constant
supervision. Their ability to innovate drives product development, process improvement, and
strategic shifts, particularly in dynamic industries. Companies seeking to disrupt markets or
lead in their fields often look for self-starters who can spearhead new initiatives and navigate
ambiguity autonomously.

Conversely, proponents of recruiting team players and instruction-followers emphasize the

importance of cohesion, efficiency, and adherence to established protocols. In many
organizational structures, tasks are interdependent, requiring seamless collaboration and
consistent execution. Employees who can work effectively within a team ensure projects are
completed cooperatively, communication flows smoothly, and collective goals are met.
Furthermore, the ability to follow instructions is critical for maintaining quality standards,
ensuring safety, and complying with regulations, especially in large-scale or process-driven
operations.

Ultimately, while innovation and independence are highly valuable for driving progress, I
believe that the ability to work collaboratively and follow instructions forms the foundational
bedrock of most successful enterprises. A company can have brilliant innovators, but without
a cooperative spirit and adherence to shared objectives, chaos can ensue. Therefore, while
fostering innovation, companies should prioritize candidates who can integrate into a team
structure and contribute harmoniously to collective endeavors.

Writing Book Page- 329

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 90:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many countries, the cost of using public transport is rising rapidly.

What are the causes of this problem? What solutions can be implemented to address
it?

Sample response:

The increasing cost of public transport has become a significant concern in numerous
countries, directly impacting the daily lives of commuters and affecting urban mobility. This
problem stems from a combination of economic pressures and policy shortcomings.
Understanding these underlying causes, I believe, is crucial for devising effective solutions.

One primary cause of rising public transport fares is inflation, which affects nearly all sectors,
including the operational expenses of transportation systems. This includes the escalating
costs of fuel, vehicle maintenance, infrastructure upgrades, and staff wages. For instance,
global fluctuations in oil prices directly translate into higher running costs for buses and trains.
Furthermore, in many regions, public transport infrastructure is aging and requires substantial
investment for modernization and expansion, and these costs are often passed on to
consumers. Another contributing factor can be insufficient government subsidies. When public
transport networks are not adequately funded by the state, operators are compelled to
increase ticket prices to cover their overheads and remain financially viable.

To address this issue, several solutions can be implemented. Firstly, governments could
significantly increase their investment and subsidies for public transport. This would alleviate
the pressure on operators to raise fares, making services more affordable for the general
public. Secondly, promoting the adoption of more cost-effective and environmentally friendly
alternatives, such as electric or solar-powered vehicles, can reduce long-term operational
costs. These sustainable options not only lower fuel expenses but also contribute to a greener
urban environment. Additionally, implementing smart ticketing systems and demand-
responsive transport can optimize routes and schedules, leading to greater efficiency and
potentially lower costs per passenger.

In conclusion, the rapid rise in public transport costs is primarily driven by inflation and
inadequate government funding. By increasing subsidies and investing in sustainable, efficient
technologies, governments can ensure public transport remains an accessible and affordable
option for all citizens.

Writing Book Page- 330

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 91:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Long distance flights pollute the air and consume the amount of fuel that a car uses for
many years. Some people think that we should discourage non-essential flights, such
as tourist travel, rather than limit the use of cars.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The environmental impact of transportation is a pressing global concern, with particular

attention often drawn to the significant carbon footprint of long-distance aviation. While it is
true that air travel, especially non-essential tourist flights, contributes substantially to
atmospheric pollution and fuel consumption, some argue that these should be discouraged
more than individual car usage. I largely agree with this perspective, given the scale and often
discretionary nature of air travel's environmental toll, although both sectors require continued
efforts towards sustainability.

Long-haul flights are undeniably high emitters of greenhouse gases. A single intercontinental
flight can consume fuel equivalent to what a car uses over several years, releasing pollutants
directly into the upper atmosphere where their impact can be magnified. Non-essential travel,
such as leisure tourism, often involves numerous return flights, collectively generating
immense emissions without serving a vital societal function. Implementing measures like
higher taxes on flight tickets, promoting staycations, or investing in virtual alternatives for
business meetings could significantly reduce this impact, encouraging more sustainable
choices.

However, it is also crucial to acknowledge the pervasive environmental burden of cars. Billions
of vehicles globally operate daily, contributing to urban smog, noise pollution, and substantial
carbon emissions. For many, car use is not a luxury but a necessity for commuting to work,
accessing services, or transporting goods in areas with inadequate public transport. While
advancements in electric vehicles and public transit infrastructure are mitigating this, the sheer
volume of daily car journeys means their cumulative environmental impact remains colossal.

In conclusion, while both long-distance flights and cars contribute to environmental

degradation, the discretionary nature and disproportionate emissions of non-essential flights
make them a more suitable target for immediate discouragement.

Writing Book Page- 331

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 92:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
The best way to protect the environment is to use local resources, such as food or
building materials, rather than transporting resources from other countries.

To what extent do you agree or disagree

Sample response:

While sourcing local resources like food and building materials is often touted as the most
effective environmental protection strategy, the issue is multifaceted. I will explore both the
benefits of localization and the complexities involved, ultimately arguing that a purely local
approach isn't always the optimal solution.

Undeniably, prioritizing local resources significantly reduces carbon emissions associated with
long-distance transportation. Food travels fewer miles from farm to plate, decreasing the
carbon footprint of agriculture. Similarly, using locally sourced building materials like timber or
stone minimizes the energy expended on shipping heavy goods across continents. This
approach also supports local economies, fosters community resilience, and can lead to a
deeper understanding and appreciation of regional ecosystems. Furthermore, it lessens
reliance on global supply chains, which can be vulnerable to disruptions and geopolitical
instability.

However, a blanket policy of exclusive local resource utilization overlooks crucial realities.
Some regions lack specific resources, making importation a necessity for economic
development and quality of life. For instance, countries without indigenous timber might need
to import wood. Moreover, the environmental impact of local production can sometimes
exceed that of importing. Highly efficient, large-scale production facilities in one country might
have a lower overall environmental footprint than numerous smaller, less efficient local
operations. Diverse climates and soil types mean that certain crops are best grown in specific
regions globally, and forcing local cultivation might lead to increased water usage or reliance
on artificial environments. Therefore, a balanced approach considering global efficiencies and
local needs is paramount.

In conclusion, while local resource utilization offers considerable environmental advantages, it

is not a universally superior solution. A holistic approach that weighs the benefits of reduced
transportation against the efficiencies of global production and the realities of resource
distribution is essential for effective environmental protection.

Writing Book Page- 332

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 93:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think that modern communication technology is having a negative effect
on social relationships.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Modern communication technology's influence on social relationships is a contentious issue.

While some argue for its benefits, I largely concur that its effects are predominantly
detrimental, leading to a decline in genuine human connection.

Admittedly, communication technologies offer undeniable advantages. They enable

individuals to stay connected with friends and family across geographical barriers,
strengthening long-distance relationships and providing support networks. For instance, video
calls allow regular, intimate interactions that were previously impossible, fostering a sense of
closeness despite physical separation. Social media platforms also facilitate the reunion of old
acquaintances and the formation of new communities based on shared interests, expanding
one's social circle.

However, the pervasive nature of these technologies often leads to superficiality. The constant
availability of online interaction can diminish the value of face-to-face encounters. People
might prefer texting or scrolling through feeds rather than engaging in deep conversations,
leading to a loss of nuanced communication cues like body language and tone. This can result
in less meaningful bonds, as relationships become curated digital representations rather than
authentic, lived experiences.

Furthermore, an over-reliance on digital communication fosters a sense of isolation despite

being constantly "connected." Individuals may find themselves absorbed in virtual worlds,
neglecting real-world relationships and activities. This can manifest as social anxiety, where
face-to-face interactions become uncomfortable or difficult. The pressure to maintain an online
persona can also lead to comparison and self-esteem issues, further eroding genuine social
confidence and hindering the development of strong, empathetic connections.

In conclusion, despite some conveniences, modern communication largely harms social

relationships. It fosters superficiality and isolation, making it crucial to prioritize genuine, real-
world interactions over digital ones.

Writing Book Page- 333

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 94:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that an efficient public transport system is the most important
factor in the development of a modern city. Others argue that other services should
take priority.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

In the ongoing discourse regarding urban development, a key debate centers on identifying
the most crucial factor for a modern city's growth. Some argue that a highly efficient public
transport system is paramount, while others contend that different services warrant greater
priority. I will, in this essay, try to examine both perspectives before asserting that, while public
transport is vital, a multifaceted approach encompassing various essential services is more
conducive to sustainable urban development.

Proponents of prioritizing public transport emphasize its foundational role in a city's economic
and social fabric. An efficient network of buses, trains, and trams significantly reduces traffic
congestion and pollution, enhancing overall liveability. It ensures accessibility for all residents,
connecting people to jobs, education, and healthcare, thereby fostering social equity.
Furthermore, robust public transport can stimulate economic activity by facilitating movement
of labor and goods, making a city more attractive for businesses and investment. Without
effective mobility, a city's growth can be severely hampered.

Conversely, many argue that other urban services are equally, if not more, critical. A city
cannot truly flourish without high-quality education systems, which equip its workforce with
necessary skills, or without accessible and advanced healthcare facilities that ensure public
well-being. Affordable housing, reliable utilities like water and electricity, and well-maintained
public spaces are also fundamental to attracting and retaining residents and businesses.
These services collectively create a desirable living environment, fostering community stability
and cultural vibrancy, which are arguably as important as efficient commuting.

In my opinion, while an efficient public transport system is undeniably a cornerstone of urban

functionality, it cannot be singularly deemed the most important factor. True modern city
development demands a holistic strategy. A city thrives when its transport infrastructure
seamlessly integrates with strong educational institutions, comprehensive healthcare services,
adequate housing, and vibrant cultural amenities. Neglecting any of these areas would
undermine the benefits of even the most advanced transit system. In conclusion, while public
transport is crucial for connectivity and economic flow, a city's success ultimately hinges on
the concurrent development and provision of a wide array of high-quality services.
Writing Book Page- 334
 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 95:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Many people believe that safe investments are better for their long-term future while
others feel there is more value in risky investments.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

In the dominion of personal finance, a significant debate revolves around the optimal
investment strategy for long-term financial security. While some individuals firmly advocate for
safe, low-risk options, others contend that greater value lies in embracing more volatile, high-
risk investments. This essay will explore the merits of both approaches before asserting that,
for the average investor, a balanced strategy incorporating primarily safe options is generally
more prudent.

Proponents of safe investments, such as government bonds, savings accounts, or blue-chip

stocks, emphasize capital preservation and predictable returns. Their primary goal is to
protect their principal from significant loss, ensuring a steady, albeit modest, growth over time.
For those nearing retirement or with immediate financial obligations, the stability offered by
these investments is paramount. The peace of mind that comes from knowing one's savings
are secure and will not drastically depreciate overnight is a compelling factor, particularly in
uncertain economic climates. This approach prioritizes avoiding financial shocks over
maximizing potential gains.

Conversely, advocates for risky investments, including emerging market stocks,

cryptocurrencies, or speculative ventures, highlight the potential for substantial returns. They
argue that while these assets carry a higher risk of loss, they also offer unparalleled
opportunities for wealth accumulation. For younger investors with a longer time horizon, the
ability to absorb potential short-term losses in pursuit of significant long-term growth can be
attractive. They believe that inflation erodes the value of safe investments, making calculated
risks necessary to genuinely grow one's purchasing power over decades.

In my opinion, while the allure of high returns from risky investments is undeniable, prioritizing
safe investments, perhaps with a small, diversified allocation to higher-risk assets, is the more
advisable path for most individuals seeking long-term financial stability. The potential for
catastrophic loss with purely risky ventures can derail an entire financial future, whereas the
steady, compounding growth of safe investments provides a reliable foundation. Overall, while
both investment philosophies have their merits, a conservative approach focused on capital
preservation and consistent returns typically offers a more secure and predictable route to
achieving long-term financial goals.
Writing Book Page- 335
Writing Module Task 2

Topic 96:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people argue that parents should have a strong influence on their children’s
choice of friends and life partners. Others believe that young people should make these
decisions independently.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The extent to which parents should influence their children's choices regarding friends and life
partners is a perennially debated topic. While some advocate for strong parental guidance,
others argue for complete autonomy for young individuals in these crucial personal matters. I
will explore both perspectives before offering a conclusive opinion.

Proponents of parental influence often highlight the wisdom and experience that older
generations possess. Parents, having navigated life's complexities, can offer valuable insights
into character assessment, identifying potentially negative influences in friendships, or
discerning compatibility in a romantic partner. Their involvement, it is argued, stems from a
deep desire to protect their children from heartache, financial instability, or poor decisions that
could have long-term repercussions. Furthermore, in many cultures, family harmony and
societal reputation are intrinsically linked to the choices of partners, making parental
involvement a cultural imperative rather than just a personal preference.

Conversely, those who champion independent decision-making emphasize the importance of

autonomy and personal growth. Young people need the freedom to choose their own
companions and partners to develop self-reliance, learn from their own experiences (both
positive and negative), and cultivate genuine relationships based on mutual understanding
rather than external approval. Imposed choices, particularly in matters of the heart, can lead to
resentment, unhappiness, and a lack of authentic connection, potentially damaging the
parent-child relationship in the long run. True happiness in such personal bonds often arises
from shared values and individual chemistry, which cannot be dictated by others.

In my view, a balanced approach is most beneficial. While parents should certainly offer
advice, share their perspectives, and voice concerns, their role should be one of guidance and
support rather than dictation. Ultimately, the decisions regarding friends and life partners must
rest with the individual. This allows young people to learn responsibility, develop their own
judgment, and build relationships that genuinely contribute to their well-being and happiness,
while still benefiting from the invaluable wisdom of their elders.

Writing Book Page- 336

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 97:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people argue that schools should prioritise life skills such as working in teams
and solving problems instead of traditional academic subjects.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

In the ongoing debate about educational priorities, some advocate for a greater focus on life
skills over conventional academic subjects. While traditional learning undeniably holds value, I
largely agree that schools should increasingly emphasize practical competencies like
teamwork and problem-solving.

Life skills such as collaboration, communication, and critical thinking are indispensable for
navigating personal and professional challenges. Working in teams teaches negotiation,
compromise, and the ability to leverage diverse perspectives, all crucial for success in modern
workplaces. Problem-solving skills, encompassing analysis, creativity, and decision-making,
empower individuals to overcome obstacles effectively, whether in daily life or complex
professional environments.

Moreover, these skills foster adaptability, resilience, and independent learning – qualities vital
in a rapidly evolving global landscape. Integrating these competencies through project-based
learning, group assignments, and real-world simulations can make education more engaging
and relevant.

Conversely, traditional academic subjects, such as mathematics, science, and history, provide
foundational knowledge essential for critical thinking and understanding the world. They lay
the groundwork for higher education and specialized careers. However, a purely academic
curriculum often falls short in preparing students for the complexities of real-world scenarios.

While a balanced approach is ideal, the evolving demands of the 21st century strongly
suggest prioritizing life skills. They equip students not just with knowledge, but with the
practical abilities to thrive, innovate, and contribute meaningfully to society.

Writing Book Page- 337

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 98:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
An increasing number of people are changing careers during their working life.

What do you think are the reasons for this? Do you think this is a positive or negative
development for society?

Sample response:
In recent decades, a noticeable trend has emerged: a growing number of individuals are
opting for career changes at various points in their professional lives. This phenomenon is
driven by a confluence of factors, and its implications for society are multifaceted, presenting
both advantages and disadvantages.

One primary reason for this shift is the evolving nature of the job market itself. Rapid
technological advancements have led to the obsolescence of certain skills and the creation of
entirely new industries, compelling workers to reskill or pivot to remain relevant. Furthermore,
increased automation and artificial intelligence are transforming traditional roles, necessitating
adaptability. Beyond economic pressures, personal fulfillment plays a significant role. Many
individuals are no longer content with merely a stable job; they seek work that aligns with their
passions, values, and offers a sense of purpose. Dissatisfaction with workplace culture, lack
of growth opportunities, or burnout can also be strong motivators for seeking a fresh start. The
ease of access to information and online learning platforms has also empowered people to
acquire new skills and explore different career paths more readily than in the past.

From a societal perspective, this trend presents both positive and negative aspects. On the
positive side, a dynamic workforce that embraces change can foster innovation and economic
growth. Individuals bringing diverse experiences from different fields can lead to novel
solutions and perspectives. It also promotes lifelong learning and adaptability, crucial qualities
in a rapidly changing world. Moreover, individuals who are more satisfied with their careers
are likely to be more productive and contribute more meaningfully to society. However, there
are potential drawbacks. Frequent career changes can lead to a lack of deep expertise in
specific fields, and the constant retraining required can be a strain on individuals and
educational systems. It might also create instability in certain industries if there's a high
turnover rate. Furthermore, the emotional and financial stress associated with career
transitions can be significant for individuals, impacting their well-being.

In conclusion, the increasing prevalence of career changes is a complex phenomenon rooted

in technological shifts, evolving job markets, and a heightened desire for personal fulfillment.
While it fosters innovation and adaptability, it also presents challenges related to skill
development and potential instability. Society must navigate these changes by supporting
lifelong learning and providing resources to facilitate smooth transitions for its workforce.

Writing Book Page- 338

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 99:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
The international community must take immediate action to ensure all countries reduce
their usage of fossil fuels.

To what extent do you agree or disagree with this statement?

Sample response:

The escalating climate crisis necessitates urgent global action to curb fossil fuel consumption.
I strongly agree that the international community must intervene immediately to ensure all
nations contribute to this vital reduction for the sake of our planet's future.

The environmental imperative to reduce fossil fuel use is undeniable. Continued reliance on
coal, oil, and gas directly contributes to greenhouse gas emissions, accelerating global
warming and leading to severe consequences such as rising sea levels, extreme weather
events, and biodiversity loss. Delaying action will only exacerbate these problems, potentially
leading to irreversible ecological damage and significant humanitarian crises worldwide.
Immediate, coordinated efforts are essential to mitigate these catastrophic impacts.

Furthermore, a rapid transition away from fossil fuels offers numerous co-benefits beyond
climate stabilization. Investing in renewable energy sources like solar, wind, and hydro power
creates new economic opportunities, fosters innovation, and enhances energy security by
reducing dependency on volatile international markets. Moreover, decreasing fossil fuel
combustion significantly improves air quality, leading to better public health outcomes and
reducing healthcare burdens, particularly in urban areas.

However, a counter-argument exists that immediate and drastic cuts might disproportionately
affect developing nations heavily reliant on fossil fuel industries for their economic stability and
energy needs. These countries often lack the infrastructure and financial resources to rapidly
transition to renewables without external support. Therefore, any global mandate must be
accompanied by substantial technological transfer and financial aid to ensure a just and
equitable transition.

In conclusion, while challenges persist, I can say that the overwhelming evidence of climate
change demands immediate, concerted international action to reduce fossil fuel usage across
all countries. Collaborative efforts are paramount to secure a sustainable and habitable future.

Writing Book Page- 339

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 100:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some believe that the government should support artists like musicians, painters, and
poets, while others argue that this is a misuse of funds.
Discuss both views and give your own opinion.
Sample response:

The question of whether governments should financially support artists, including musicians,
painters, and poets, is a contentious one. While some contend that public funds are best
allocated to more tangible services, others argue that artistic endeavors are vital for societal
well-being and deserve state patronage. I will consider both perspectives before offering my
personal viewpoint.
Proponents of government funding for the arts assert that culture is an indispensable
component of a thriving society. Art, in its various forms, enriches lives, fosters creativity, and
often serves as a powerful medium for expressing national identity and heritage. Public
support can enable artists to pursue their craft without solely relying on commercial viability,
leading to diverse and groundbreaking works that might otherwise never see the light of day.
Furthermore, a vibrant arts sector can boost tourism, stimulate local economies, and even
contribute to educational development by inspiring future generations. Without some level of
governmental backing, many artistic forms, particularly those with less immediate commercial
appeal, might struggle to survive, resulting in a less culturally rich society.
Conversely, critics argue that state funding for artists constitutes a misuse of taxpayer money.
They often highlight that governments have primary responsibilities towards essential services
such as healthcare, education, infrastructure, and public safety. From this viewpoint, allocating
funds to the arts, which some perceive as a luxury or a subjective interest, diverts resources
from more pressing societal needs. Moreover, some believe that art should thrive or fail in a
free market, driven by public demand and private patronage, rather than relying on subsidies.
There is also the challenge of deciding which art forms or artists deserve funding, potentially
leading to accusations of bias or inefficiency.
In my opinion, while the arguments against direct government funding hold some weight, I
believe that a measured level of state support for the arts is beneficial and indeed necessary.
Art is not merely entertainment; it is a reflection of human experience, a catalyst for social
commentary, and a preserver of cultural memory. Governments have a role in nurturing the
cultural landscape, much like they support scientific research or historical preservation.
However, such support should be transparent, merit-based, and complement private
initiatives, ensuring that a rich and diverse artistic environment can flourish for the benefit of
all citizens.

Writing Book Page- 340

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 101:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In recent years, there has been a rise in the use of performance-enhancing drugs in
sports.
What are the consequences of using such drugs for athletes? What measures should
be taken to combat this issue?
Sample response:

The landscape of modern sports has been increasingly marred by the pervasive issue of
performance-enhancing drugs (PEDs). While the pursuit of excellence and breaking
boundaries is inherent in athletic competition, the illicit use of these substances undermines
the very spirit of fair play and poses significant threats to the integrity of sport. I will try to
discuss the severe consequences faced by athletes who resort to doping and propose
effective measures to combat this growing problem.
The repercussions for athletes caught using PEDs are multifaceted and devastating. Primarily,
their physical health is often jeopardized. Many illicit substances carry severe side effects,
ranging from cardiovascular problems and liver damage to hormonal imbalances and
psychological issues, which can have long-term, irreversible impacts on an athlete's well-
being. Beyond physical harm, the use of PEDs tarnishes an athlete's reputation and career. A
positive test results in disqualification, bans, and the stripping of medals, leading to public
shame and the loss of endorsements and sponsorships. The psychological toll of living with
deceit, the pressure to maintain enhanced performance, and the eventual exposure can also
lead to mental health struggles, including depression and anxiety.
To effectively combat the pervasive issue of doping, a multi-pronged approach is essential.
Firstly, anti-doping agencies must implement more sophisticated and frequent testing
methods. This includes intelligence-led testing, where athletes are tested based on suspicious
patterns or information, and the use of biological passports, which track an athlete's biological
markers over time to detect anomalies. Secondly, stringent penalties must be consistently
applied. Lifetime bans for repeat offenders and lengthy suspensions for first-time offenders
would serve as powerful deterrents. Furthermore, extensive education programs are crucial,
particularly for young athletes, to highlight the health risks and ethical implications of doping,
fostering a culture of clean sport from an early age. Finally, investing in scientific research to
develop more accurate detection methods and alternative, legal ways to enhance
performance, such as advanced training techniques and nutrition, can reduce the temptation
to resort to illegal substances.
In conclusion, the use of performance-enhancing drugs not only endangers the health and
careers of individual athletes but also erodes public trust in sports. By strengthening testing
protocols, enforcing stricter penalties, prioritizing athlete education, and investing in scientific
advancements, the sporting world can strive towards reclaiming its integrity and ensuring a
level playing field for all competitors.

Writing Book Page- 341

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 102:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people say the fashion industry is bad for the environment, as it encourages
consumers to buy new clothes all the time.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The assertion that the fashion industry negatively impacts the environment by promoting
constant new purchases is largely accurate. While fashion serves cultural and personal
expression, I believe its current model undeniably contributes significantly to ecological
challenges.

Firstly, the pervasive "fast fashion" trend encourages consumers to frequently update their
wardrobes with inexpensive, trendy items. This rapid consumption cycle leads to an alarming
amount of textile waste, often ending up in landfills. Many synthetic fabrics, prevalent in
affordable clothing, are not biodegradable and can release microplastics into waterways,
further exacerbating environmental degradation.

Moreover, the production processes themselves are highly resource-intensive and polluting.
Growing conventional cotton requires vast quantities of water and pesticides, while synthetic
materials like polyester are derived from fossil fuels. Dyeing processes release toxic
chemicals into rivers, particularly in developing countries. The global supply chains, involving
manufacturing, shipping, and retail, also contribute substantially to carbon emissions.

However, it is important to acknowledge that some companies are making efforts towards
sustainability, offering ethically produced garments or promoting recycling initiatives.
Additionally, consumer awareness is growing, with a segment choosing second-hand clothing
or investing in durable, timeless pieces, thereby reducing demand for new production.

Despite these positive shifts, the fashion industry's dominant model undeniably exerts a
substantial negative impact on the environment due to its inherent encouragement of
excessive consumption and resource-intensive production. Fundamental changes are needed
for a truly sustainable future.

Writing Book Page- 342

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 103:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Eco-tourism often involves visiting remote and fragile ecosystems, which raises
concerns about the impact on local cultures and indigenous communities.

What problems can this cause? How can these problems be resolved?

Sample response:

Eco-tourism, while promoted as a sustainable alternative to mass tourism, often involves

venturing into pristine and remote ecosystems, home to indigenous communities and fragile
cultures. This practice, despite its benevolent intentions, poses significant challenges
concerning its impact on these unique societies.

One primary problem is the potential for cultural erosion and commodification. When
indigenous traditions, ceremonies, or daily lives become attractions, there is a risk of them
being diluted or performed purely for tourist consumption, losing their authentic meaning.
Economically, a sudden influx of tourism can create dependency, shifting local livelihoods
away from traditional, sustainable practices like farming or fishing towards unpredictable
tourism-related income, making communities vulnerable to market fluctuations. This can also
lead to social stratification, as tourism benefits may not be equitably distributed, causing
internal tensions. Furthermore, despite its "eco" prefix, increased human presence inevitably
brings waste generation, resource strain, and the potential for disrupting delicate ecosystems
through infrastructure development, impacting traditional land use and environmental balance.

Resolving these issues requires a multi-faceted approach centered on community

empowerment. Firstly, indigenous communities must have significant control and ownership
over eco-tourism initiatives, participating in decision-making, planning, and management. This
ensures that tourism aligns with their cultural values and developmental aspirations. Secondly,
robust education programs for tourists are essential, emphasizing cultural respect, ethical
behavior, and environmental sensitivity. Economically, fair trade principles should be applied,
ensuring a substantial portion of revenue directly benefits the local population through fair
wages, support for local enterprises, and community development funds. Finally, strict
governmental regulations on visitor numbers, designated travel routes, and sustainable
infrastructure development are crucial to mitigate environmental damage and preserve the
integrity of both the ecosystem and the local culture.

In conclusion, while eco-tourism holds promise, its success hinges on prioritizing the well-
being of local cultures and ecosystems through genuine community involvement, responsible
tourism practices, and stringent regulation.

Writing Book Page- 343

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 104:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In some countries, bicycles are increasingly replacing cars, while in others, people
prefer driving over cycling.
What are the reasons behind this trend? Do you think this is a positive or negative
development?
Sample response:

In many parts of the world, a notable divergence in transportation preferences is emerging,

with some nations witnessing a surge in bicycle usage as a primary mode of transport, while
others maintain a strong reliance on automobiles. I will delve into the underlying reasons for
these contrasting trends and present an opinion on whether this development is beneficial or
detrimental.
The increasing embrace of cycling in certain countries is often a result of deliberate policy and
cultural shifts. Governments in places like the Netherlands and Denmark have invested
heavily in dedicated cycling lanes, secure parking facilities, and traffic calming measures,
making cycling a safer and more convenient option. Furthermore, a growing awareness of
environmental issues, coupled with the desire for personal health and fitness, encourages
citizens to opt for bicycles. Urban planning that prioritises pedestrian and cycling networks
over car-centric layouts also plays a significant role in fostering a bike-friendly culture.
Conversely, in many other regions, cars remain the preferred mode of transport due to several
factors. The perception of convenience, especially for longer commutes or carrying multiple
passengers and luggage, heavily influences this choice. In some societies, car ownership is
also viewed as a symbol of status and economic prosperity. Moreover, inadequate or unsafe
cycling infrastructure, combined with urban sprawl that necessitates longer travel distances,
makes cycling impractical or even dangerous for many individuals, compelling them to use
private vehicles.
From my perspective, the trend of bicycles increasingly replacing cars is overwhelmingly
positive. This shift contributes significantly to reducing carbon emissions and air pollution,
fostering cleaner and healthier urban environments. It also encourages a more active lifestyle,
leading to improved public health and reduced healthcare burdens. While cars offer
undeniable convenience for specific scenarios, a balanced approach that promotes cycling for
shorter distances can alleviate traffic congestion and improve the overall quality of urban life.
In conclusion, the preference for cycling or driving is shaped by a complex interplay of
infrastructure, policy, cultural values, and personal circumstances. Despite the varied reasons
for these trends, I believe that the move towards greater bicycle adoption is a highly positive
development, offering substantial benefits for both individuals and the planet.

Writing Book Page- 344

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 105:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Today many teenagers rely greatly on technology when learning.

Is this a positive or negative development?

Sample response:

It is increasingly common for modern teenagers to heavily utilize technology as a primary

learning tool. This essay will argue that this development is overwhelmingly positive due to the
enhanced accessibility and diverse learning methods it offers, while also acknowledging
potential drawbacks.

One significant advantage of technology in education is the unparalleled access to information

it provides. Students can instantly research topics, access online libraries, and explore a vast
array of educational resources beyond the confines of traditional textbooks. This democratizes
knowledge, allowing for deeper investigation and a more comprehensive understanding of
subjects, irrespective of geographical location or school resources.

Furthermore, technology facilitates diverse and interactive learning experiences. Educational

apps, simulations, and virtual reality tools can transform abstract concepts into engaging and
memorable lessons. This caters to different learning styles, particularly visual and kinesthetic
learners, making education more personalized and effective than conventional classroom
methods alone. The ability to collaborate on projects online and receive immediate feedback
also fosters a more dynamic and responsive learning environment.

However, it is important to acknowledge the counter-argument that over-reliance on

technology can lead to distractions and a decrease in critical thinking skills. The constant
availability of information might discourage deeper analytical thought, as students may be less
inclined to engage in problem-solving independently when answers are readily available.
Despite these valid concerns, the benefits of technological integration in learning far outweigh
the drawbacks. The critical thinking skills can be cultivated through guided use of technology,
and distractions can be mitigated with proper pedagogical approaches.

In conclusion, the widespread reliance of teenagers on technology for learning represents a

largely positive evolution, empowering students with unprecedented access to information and
fostering dynamic, personalized educational experiences.

Writing Book Page- 345

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 106:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Many people believe that reducing the income gap between the rich and the poor can
lead to a happier society.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Many contend that a narrower income disparity between the wealthy and the impoverished
fosters greater societal happiness. I largely agree with this perspective, as profound economic
divides can generate significant social and individual challenges, diminishing overall well-
being.

Firstly, a substantial income gap often breeds social unrest and reduces cohesion. When a
small segment of the population holds disproportionate wealth while many struggle, feelings of
injustice, envy, and resentment can escalate. This can lead to increased crime rates, social
fragmentation, and a breakdown of trust within communities. Conversely, a more equitable
distribution of wealth tends to create a stronger sense of shared destiny and collective
welfare, promoting cooperation and reducing societal tensions, thereby contributing to a more
peaceful and contented populace.

Secondly, diminished income inequality can vastly improve access to fundamental resources
and opportunities for a larger portion of the population. In societies with extreme wealth
concentration, quality education, healthcare, and housing often remain out of reach for the
poor, severely limiting their potential and causing chronic stress. Bridging this gap means
more individuals can afford necessities, pursue education, and maintain good health, directly
enhancing their quality of life and general happiness. This widespread improvement in living
standards is a direct contributor to a happier collective.

However, some argue that a certain level of income disparity is essential for economic
incentives and innovation. They believe that the promise of greater wealth motivates
individuals to work harder, take risks, and contribute to economic growth. While a complete
lack of differentiation might stifle ambition, excessive inequality can lead to social stagnation
and economic instability, as purchasing power becomes concentrated in fewer hands, limiting
overall demand and opportunity. The key lies in finding a balance where incentives exist
without creating debilitating social costs.

In conclusion, I firmly believe that reducing the income gap between the rich and the poor
significantly contributes to a happier society by fostering greater social harmony and
expanding access to vital resources for all.

Writing Book Page- 346

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 107:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some believe that watching the news on TV and reading newspapers is a waste of time
because the news has no relevance to people’s lives.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Some argue that engaging with news media is futile as it lacks personal impact. I strongly
disagree with this assertion, believing that news consumption is fundamentally important for
individuals and society.

Firstly, news provides crucial updates on local and global affairs, covering political
developments, economic shifts, and social trends. This awareness allows individuals to
comprehend the world around them, understanding the forces that shape their communities
and nations. For instance, reports on new government policies or international conflicts
directly impact daily lives, from taxation to job markets.

Secondly, staying informed through news empowers people to make well-considered

decisions. Whether it's choosing a political candidate, understanding market fluctuations
before making financial investments, or being aware of health advisories, reliable information
is key. Without such knowledge, individuals risk being ill-prepared for challenges or missing
opportunities that could significantly affect their personal circumstances.

Furthermore, news cultivates critical thinking skills by exposing individuals to diverse

perspectives and analyses. It encourages deeper engagement with complex issues rather
than passive acceptance. Beyond personal benefit, a well-informed populace is vital for a
functioning democracy, fostering civic participation and a collective sense of responsibility
towards societal well-being. While some contend that news can be overwhelming,
sensationalist, or irrelevant to one's immediate sphere, and that excessive consumption might
lead to anxiety, this overlooks its broader utility. The potential for bias or trivial content does
not negate the core value of being informed about significant events that eventually cascade
into personal realities. Responsible news consumption, even amidst imperfections, remains
essential.

In conclusion, the belief that news is irrelevant is misguided. Its pivotal role in keeping
individuals informed, enabling prudent choices, and fostering active citizenship far outweighs
any perceived drawbacks.

Writing Book Page- 347

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 108:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think that the main benefit of international cooperation is in the protection
of the environment, while others believe that businesses mainly benefit.
Discuss both these views and give your own opinion.
Sample response:

International collaboration is increasingly vital in today's interconnected world, with its primary
advantages often debated. While some contend that its most significant contribution lies in
safeguarding the global environment, others argue that it predominantly serves the interests of
businesses. This essay will explore both viewpoints before offering a concluding perspective.
Proponents of environmental protection as the chief beneficiary of international cooperation
highlight the transboundary nature of ecological challenges. Issues such as climate change,
ocean pollution, and biodiversity loss cannot be effectively addressed by individual nations
acting in isolation. Collaborative efforts, epitomized by agreements like the Paris Climate
Accord, enable the pooling of resources, sharing of scientific data, and implementation of
unified strategies to mitigate global warming or protect endangered species. Such cooperation
is crucial for setting universal standards for emissions, managing shared natural resources
like rivers or oceans, and preventing environmental degradation that affects all humanity.
Without concerted international action, the planet's delicate ecosystems would face
irreversible damage.
Conversely, many believe that the economic sector reaps the greatest rewards from
international cooperation. Reduced trade barriers, harmonized regulations, and the
establishment of global supply chains are direct outcomes of such collaboration, significantly
boosting international commerce. For instance, trade agreements facilitate easier market
access for multinational corporations, leading to increased profits and economic growth.
Furthermore, cross-border partnerships enable businesses to share technological
advancements, invest in developing markets, and access diverse labor pools, fostering
innovation and efficiency on a grand scale. From a business perspective, international
cooperation creates a more stable and predictable global economic landscape, essential for
long-term investment and expansion.
In conclusion, both environmental preservation and business development undeniably gain
from international cooperation. However, I believe that the protection of the environment
stands as the more critical and overarching benefit. While economic advantages are
significant, the very foundation upon which businesses operate- a stable and healthy planet- is
contingent upon successful environmental cooperation. Addressing shared ecological crises
ensures the sustainability of resources and environments for future generations, ultimately
providing a viable context for all human endeavors, including economic prosperity.

Writing Book Page- 348

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 109:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Nowadays, many people in cities live in large apartment blocks.

Does this kind of accommodation have more advantages or disadvantages?

Sample response:

In contemporary urban landscapes, the trend of residing in extensive apartment complexes

has become increasingly prevalent. While this housing model offers a range of conveniences,
it also presents several challenges. In this essay, I will examine both the benefits and
drawbacks of living in such accommodation before concluding with a personal viewpoint.

One of the primary advantages of large apartment blocks is their affordability and strategic
location. In densely populated cities, apartments often provide a more economical housing
solution compared to detached houses, making homeownership accessible to a wider
demographic. Furthermore, these blocks are frequently situated in central areas, close to
workplaces, educational institutions, and public transport networks, thereby reducing
commuting times and costs. The security aspect is another significant benefit, as many
complexes offer round-the-clock surveillance and controlled access, providing residents with a
greater sense of safety. Additionally, modern apartment buildings often boast amenities such
as gyms, swimming pools, and communal spaces, enhancing the quality of life for their
occupants.

However, living in high-rise apartments also comes with notable disadvantages. A major
concern is the limited living space, which can feel restrictive, especially for families with
children or individuals who value spaciousness. The close proximity to neighbours often leads
to issues such as noise pollution, which can negatively impact privacy and peace of mind.
Moreover, the inherent design of large blocks can sometimes foster a diminished sense of
community, as residents may interact less frequently than in traditional neighbourhood
settings. The lack of private outdoor space, such as gardens, is another drawback for those
who enjoy gardening or outdoor activities.

In conclusion, while large apartment blocks offer undeniable advantages in terms of

affordability, location, and security in urban environments, they concurrently pose challenges
related to space, noise, and community integration. Personally, I believe the disadvantages
often outweigh the benefits, particularly for families. The longing for more private space and a
stronger sense of neighbourhood connection remains a significant factor for many, despite the
urban conveniences.

Writing Book Page- 349

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 110:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Too much emphasis is given for the education of students. More government money
should be spent on free time activities for young people.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The debate regarding government expenditure on student education versus recreational

activities for youth is significant. While some argue that excessive emphasis is placed on
formal schooling, advocating for more funding towards leisure, I believe that both areas are
vital for comprehensive development and should receive adequate support.

Investing in free time activities for young people brings numerous advantages beyond
academic learning. These activities, such as sports clubs, arts programs, and youth centers,
are crucial for fostering essential life skills. They promote physical health, cultivate teamwork
and social interaction, and provide an outlet for stress, contributing significantly to mental well-
being and reducing the prevalence of issues like obesity and anxiety among adolescents.

Furthermore, organized recreational programs can deter young individuals from engaging in
detrimental behaviours. By offering constructive ways to spend their free time, these initiatives
provide safe environments and mentorship, potentially reducing rates of juvenile delinquency.
They also help in discovering and nurturing hidden talents, allowing young people to explore
passions outside the classroom, which can lead to future career paths or simply enrich their
lives.

However, it is undeniable that education forms the bedrock of a successful society and
individual future. Robust educational systems equip students with critical thinking, literacy, and
vocational skills necessary for employment, economic growth, and informed citizenship.
Prioritizing education ensures a skilled workforce and national competitiveness, directly
impacting the long-term prosperity and innovation of a country.

In conclusion, while formal education remains paramount, allocating government funds to free
time activities for young people is equally indispensable. A balanced approach ensures both
academic excellence and holistic development.

Writing Book Page- 350

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 111:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that housing is a basic human right for all individuals.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Some argue that housing is a fundamental human right. I strongly agree with this perspective,
believing that access to safe and adequate shelter is non-negotiable for human dignity and
societal well-being.

Primarily, housing provides essential shelter, safety, and privacy, which are foundational for
human dignity and physical and mental health. Without a stable home, individuals are
perpetually exposed to harsh environmental conditions, vulnerable to crime, and denied the
personal space necessary for emotional and psychological comfort. This instability can lead to
chronic health issues, increased stress, and a constant struggle for survival, making it
incredibly difficult for people to thrive or even maintain basic health.

Furthermore, secure housing is crucial for enabling individuals to participate fully in economic
and social life. A stable home environment supports children's education by providing a
conducive place for study and rest, and it allows adults to maintain employment by ensuring
proper rest and security. It prevents the vicious cycle of homelessness, which exacerbates
poverty and marginalization, ultimately hindering a nation's overall development and social
cohesion.

While some contend that housing should be viewed purely as an economic commodity, with
individuals solely responsible for acquiring it, this perspective overlooks the ethical obligations
of a compassionate society. Providing universal access, even through affordable options and
social welfare programs, is a significant financial and logistical challenge for governments.
However, ignoring the housing needs of vulnerable populations can lead to widespread social
problems, increased healthcare costs, and a decline in public safety. Therefore, governments
hold a moral duty to implement policies that ensure housing affordability and provide safety
nets, rather than leaving the most vulnerable without shelter.

In conclusion, despite the practical complexities, housing undeniably stands as a fundamental

human right, essential for individual well-being and societal stability.

Writing Book Page- 351

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 112:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Health services are a basic necessity. However, private companies have made them
quite costly for ordinary individuals.

Do the advantages of private health care outweigh its disadvantages?

Sample response:

Access to health services is a fundamental human right, yet their privatization has rendered
them increasingly unaffordable for many. While private healthcare offers some benefits, I
contend that its drawbacks, particularly regarding equity and accessibility, are far more
significant.

The most prominent disadvantage of private healthcare systems is the exorbitant cost, which
directly impacts ordinary individuals. When health services are profit-driven, they become
commodities rather than entitlements. This creates a two-tiered system where quality medical
care is primarily accessible to the wealthy, leaving those with limited financial means
vulnerable to inadequate treatment, delayed diagnoses, or overwhelming medical debt. This
inherent inequality undermines the principle that health should not be dictated by one's
socioeconomic status.

Furthermore, the profit motive in private healthcare can compromise patient well-being. There
is a potential for unnecessary procedures or overtreatment, as providers might prioritize
financial gain over genuine medical necessity. Such systems also tend to focus on lucrative
individual treatments rather than investing in public health initiatives, preventative care, or
addressing widespread health issues that might not generate significant revenue. This
ultimately leads to a less healthy overall population.

Conversely, proponents argue that private healthcare offers several advantages. It can lead to
reduced waiting times for appointments and procedures, as well as greater patient choice
regarding specialists and facilities. Often, private institutions can invest in more advanced
technology and offer a higher degree of personalized care, appealing to those who can afford
the premium services. These benefits, though significant for individuals, do not address the
systemic issues of access.

In conclusion, despite private healthcare's efficiencies and choice, its profit-driven nature
creates severe inequities. Prohibitive costs disproportionately affect ordinary individuals,
hindering universal access. Therefore, its disadvantages clearly outweigh any benefits.

Writing Book Page- 352

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 113:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some countries have an ever-increasing proportion of the population who are aged 15
or younger.
Why this could be the case? What do you think are the current and future effects of this
trend for those countries?
Sample response:
A noticeable demographic shift in several nations involves an escalating proportion of their
populace being aged fifteen or younger. This trend presents both significant challenges and
potential opportunities, largely stemming from a combination of socio-economic and public
health factors.
The primary reason for a consistently high proportion of young people in a country is often
attributed to elevated birth rates, particularly prevalent in many developing economies.
Cultural norms, which traditionally favour larger families, coupled with limited access to or
awareness of family planning methods, contribute significantly to this phenomenon.
Additionally, advancements in healthcare and sanitation have dramatically reduced infant and
child mortality rates. More children now survive their early years and reach adolescence,
thereby swelling the ranks of the younger demographic within the overall population. This
improved child survival, rather than a lack of decline in adult mortality, is a key driver.
The current and future effects of this trend are multifaceted. Presently, countries with a
burgeoning youth population often face immense pressure on their public services.
Educational systems require substantial investment in new schools, qualified teachers, and
resources, while healthcare facilities must expand to cater to increased pediatric needs.
Economically, a high dependency ratio can emerge, where a relatively smaller working-age
population supports a large, non-productive youth group, potentially hindering economic
growth. In my opinion, while these immediate strains are considerable, the future effects hold
a dual nature. If these young people are adequately educated, healthy, and provided with
sufficient opportunities for employment, this demographic bulge can transform into a powerful
"demographic dividend," fueling innovation, consumption, and economic expansion.
Conversely, if governments fail to invest adequately in human capital and job creation, this
trend could lead to widespread youth unemployment, social unrest, and a long-term
impediment to national development.
In conclusion, the rising proportion of young individuals in certain countries is predominantly
driven by high birth rates and improved child survival. While this demographic structure
imposes immediate burdens on resources, the long-term impact, in my view, hinges critically
on strategic investment in education and employment to harness the immense potential of this
youthful segment.

Writing Book Page- 353

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 114:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some feel that individuals today spend too much time following political news while
others feel politics deserves greater attention.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

The extent to which individuals should engage with political news is a contentious issue, with
divergent views on whether current consumption levels are excessive or insufficient. While
some argue that an overemphasis on politics can lead to negative consequences, others
maintain that greater attention to political affairs is crucial for a functioning society.

Proponents of the view that people spend too much time on political news often highlight its
detrimental effects on mental well-being. The constant barrage of often negative or polarizing
information can induce stress, anxiety, and a sense of helplessness. Furthermore, excessive
focus on politics might divert individuals from personal growth, family time, or community
engagement, leading to a neglect of immediate responsibilities or recreational pursuits. There
is also the risk of information overload and the spread of misinformation, which can create
echo chambers and exacerbate societal divisions rather than fostering genuine
understanding.

Conversely, many contend that politics warrants increased public attention. They argue that
an informed citizenry is fundamental to a robust democracy, enabling individuals to make
educated decisions during elections and hold their representatives accountable. Political
decisions profoundly impact every aspect of daily life, from economic policies and healthcare
to education and environmental regulations. Therefore, understanding political developments
allows individuals to better navigate their lives and advocate for their interests and values.
Active engagement ensures that governance remains responsive to the public's needs and
prevents apathy from allowing undesirable outcomes.

In my opinion, while the potential for mental fatigue and distraction exists, the importance of
an engaged populace in a self-governing society far outweighs these concerns. A well-
informed public is the bedrock of progress and accountability. However, this engagement
should be discerning, focusing on critical analysis rather than passive consumption, and
encouraging active participation in civic life beyond merely following headlines.

In conclusion, both arguments regarding political news consumption hold validity. While
caution against excessive or unproductive engagement is warranted, the fundamental
necessity of an attentive and informed citizenry for effective governance and societal well-
being dictates that politics deserves significant and thoughtful attention.
Writing Book Page- 354
 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 115:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think that employers should not care about the way their employees
dress, because what matters is the quality of their work.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Some argue that an employee's attire is irrelevant compared to their work quality. While I
largely agree with this sentiment, acknowledging that productivity and skill are paramount,
there are certain contexts where appearance plays a role.

Primarily, an employee's value to a company is fundamentally tied to their output, problem-

solving abilities, and contribution to business objectives. Imposing strict dress codes often
distracts from these core metrics, potentially fostering an environment where superficial
compliance is valued over genuine competence. Many roles, particularly in tech or creative
industries, thrive on comfort and individuality, which can be inhibited by rigid sartorial rules. A
programmer’s ability to write efficient code or a designer’s capacity for innovative ideas
remains unchanged by their choice of clothing, as long as it is clean and appropriate for the
general workplace environment.

Furthermore, an overly stringent focus on dress can inadvertently stifle individuality and
comfort, which are crucial for employee morale and productivity. When individuals are
comfortable in what they wear, they can concentrate better on their tasks. Modern workplaces
are increasingly recognizing the importance of employee well-being, and allowing a degree of
personal expression through clothing can contribute to a more relaxed and positive
atmosphere, ultimately enhancing job satisfaction and performance. It suggests trust in
employees to exercise good judgment.

However, it is also important to consider the counter-argument that appearance can matter in
specific scenarios. In client-facing roles, for example, a certain level of professional dress can
be essential for conveying credibility, establishing trust, and upholding a company's brand
image. Industries such as law, finance, or high-end sales often require formal attire to meet
client expectations and maintain a perception of seriousness and reliability. A polished
appearance can create a strong first impression, which, while not directly related to skill, can
facilitate business interactions.

In conclusion, while the quality of work should undoubtedly be the primary focus for
employers, a degree of professional presentation can be pertinent in roles involving significant
external interaction.

Writing Book Page- 355

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 116:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that young people should choose the jobs that they want, but
other people think they should be more realistic and think more about their future.

Discuss both views and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

In discussions surrounding career paths for young people, a notable divide exists. Some
advocate for following personal passions, while others urge a more pragmatic approach,
emphasizing future prospects. This essay will explore both perspectives before concluding
that a balanced view, leaning towards realistic long-term planning, is ultimately more
beneficial.

Advocates for pursuing one's desired job argue that passion is the key to true fulfillment and
professional success. When individuals genuinely enjoy their work, they are more likely to be
motivated, productive, and resilient in the face of challenges. This intrinsic drive can lead to
innovation, personal growth, and a high level of job satisfaction, which some believe
outweighs purely financial considerations. For creative fields or entrepreneurial ventures, an
unwavering passion can be the very foundation of achievement.

Conversely, those who promote a realistic outlook contend that young people must prioritize
stability, financial security, and future viability. They argue that selecting a career solely based
on desire, without considering market demand, earning potential, or long-term career
progression, can lead to unemployment, financial hardship, or disillusionment. A practical
choice, perhaps in growing sectors like technology or healthcare, ensures a more secure
future, allowing individuals to build a stable life and potentially pursue hobbies or interests in
their leisure time.

While passion is undoubtedly a powerful motivator, I believe that young people should
primarily adopt a realistic perspective when choosing a career. While an ideal scenario
involves aligning passion with practicality, economic realities often necessitate strategic
choices. A foundational career offering stability provides the necessary platform from which
one can then explore or even transition towards passions, rather than risking an uncertain
future by ignoring market demands. A pragmatic start ultimately offers greater freedom and
security in the long run.

Writing Book Page- 356

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 117:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many different countries, shops and products are the same. Some people think it is a
positive development, while others believe it is a negative development.

Discuss both the views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

In an increasingly globalized world, a noticeable phenomenon is the striking similarity of shops

and products found across diverse countries. This development elicits varied responses, with
some viewing it as a beneficial progression and others as a detrimental trend. This essay will
explore both viewpoints before asserting that, despite certain advantages, this
homogenization of retail ultimately represents a negative shift.

Proponents of this uniformity often highlight the convenience and accessibility it offers. For
international travelers, encountering familiar brands and products provides a sense of comfort
and predictability, making shopping experiences easier and more reliable. Furthermore, this
globalization allows consumers in different regions access to a wider array of high-quality
goods and services that might not otherwise be available locally. Economies of scale enjoyed
by global corporations can also sometimes translate into more competitive pricing for
consumers worldwide.

Conversely, critics argue that this widespread standardization leads to a significant loss of
cultural uniqueness and local identity. High streets and shopping malls begin to look
indistinguishable, diminishing the distinct character of individual cities and towns. This trend
often comes at the expense of small, independent businesses and local artisans who struggle
to compete with multinational giants, leading to a decline in unique, locally-produced goods.
The erosion of distinct local retail experiences ultimately impoverishes cultural diversity and
can foster a sense of blandness in urban environments.

In my opinion, while there are undeniable conveniences, the uniformity of shops and products
is predominantly a negative development. It contributes to the erosion of local traditions and
economic diversity. The unique charm and character that local businesses and products bring
to a community are invaluable, fostering a richer cultural tapestry that is steadily undermined
by the dominance of global brands.

Writing Book Page- 357

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 118:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
While educating young people is essential, some believe that governments should
invest more in educating disadvantaged adults.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

While educating young people is undeniably crucial for a nation's future, I strongly agree that
governments should significantly increase investment in educating disadvantaged adults. This
approach offers profound societal and economic benefits, addressing deeply rooted
inequalities.

Investing in adult education directly tackles unemployment and poverty. Equipping

disadvantaged adults with new skills, vocational training, or literacy programs enables them to
secure better jobs, increase their earning potential, and reduce reliance on state welfare. This
not only improves individual livelihoods but also boosts the overall economy through higher
productivity and increased tax contributions, fostering a more self-sufficient populace.

Furthermore, empowering adults through education creates a positive ripple effect across
generations. Literate and skilled parents are better positioned to support their children's
learning, creating a more stable home environment conducive to academic success. This
intergenerational upliftment helps break cycles of poverty and disadvantage, leading to
greater social mobility and a more equitable society where opportunities are more widely
accessible.

However, a counter-argument posits that primary investment must remain with youth
education, as it lays the fundamental groundwork for future learning and societal integration.
Neglecting early education could perpetuate the very cycles of disadvantage that adult
programs aim to mitigate, creating new generations requiring remedial support. A robust
foundational education system is essential to prevent future instances of adult disadvantage.

In conclusion, while youth education is paramount, prioritizing investment in disadvantaged

adults yields substantial returns by fostering economic independence, enhancing social
equity, and indirectly benefiting younger generations. This dual approach is vital for
comprehensive societal development.

Writing Book Page- 358

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 119:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that it is important to introduce tax education in secondary
school. Other people think that it is a waste of valuable school time.

Discuss both views and give your opinion.

Sample response:

The question of whether tax education should be a mandatory component of secondary

school curricula is a contentious one, with valid arguments presented by both proponents and
opponents. While some advocate for its inclusion as a crucial life skill, others argue it
represents an inefficient use of limited school time.

Those who support integrating tax education into secondary schools often highlight its
practical benefits. They contend that understanding taxation is fundamental to financial
literacy and responsible citizenship. As students transition into adulthood, they will inevitably
encounter income tax, sales tax, and other forms of levies. Basic knowledge of how taxes are
calculated, where they go, and their role in funding public services can empower young
people to manage their finances effectively and understand their civic duties. Furthermore,
early exposure might demystify the tax system, reducing anxiety and promoting compliance in
the future. It could also equip individuals to make informed decisions about their earnings and
expenditures, fostering greater economic awareness.

In contrast, opponents argue that the secondary school curriculum is already overloaded,
making it difficult to accommodate new subjects without sacrificing existing core academic
areas. They suggest that the complexities of tax laws, which often vary by region and undergo
frequent changes, make it challenging to teach effectively to adolescents. Critics believe that
valuable school time should primarily be dedicated to foundational subjects like mathematics,
science, and languages, which provide a broader educational base. They also argue that tax
education might be better handled by parents, through specialized workshops, or later in
vocational training, rather than being squeezed into an already packed timetable.

In my opinion, while the curriculum is undoubtedly dense, the practical importance of tax
education outweighs the arguments against its inclusion. A simplified, foundational
understanding of taxation could be integrated into existing subjects like mathematics or
economics, rather than creating an entirely new course. This approach would ensure students
gain vital knowledge about their future financial responsibilities without significantly burdening
the timetable. Ultimately, preparing young people for the realities of adult life, including
financial obligations, is a critical function of education.

Writing Book Page- 359

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 120:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people choose to have their first child at an older age.

What are the reasons? What are the advantages and disadvantages?

Sample response:

In many societies today, there is a noticeable trend towards individuals choosing to have their
first child at an older age. This shift is driven by a confluence of social, economic, and
personal factors. While this decision offers several compelling benefits, it also presents certain
challenges for parents and families.

One primary reason for delaying parenthood is the increasing emphasis on career
development and financial stability. Many individuals prioritize establishing themselves
professionally, often pursuing higher education and accumulating savings before feeling
prepared to take on the responsibilities of raising a child. Furthermore, societal changes,
including evolving gender roles and a greater acceptance of non-traditional family structures,
mean there is less pressure to marry and start a family at a young age. Personal readiness,
maturity, and the desire to enjoy a period of independence are also significant motivations.

The advantages of becoming a parent later in life are substantial. Older parents often possess
greater financial security, allowing them to provide more comfortably for their children's needs,
including education and extracurricular activities. They tend to be more emotionally mature
and patient, having gained valuable life experiences that contribute to a stable and nurturing
home environment. With established careers, they may also have more flexibility in their work
arrangements, enabling them to dedicate more quality time to their families.

However, the decision to delay childbirth is not without its drawbacks. Biologically, fertility
declines with age for both men and women, leading to potential difficulties in conception and a
higher risk of pregnancy complications and genetic conditions. Older parents may also find
themselves with less physical energy to keep up with the demands of young children, such as
disrupted sleep patterns and constant play. Additionally, there can be a greater generation
gap between older parents and their children, potentially impacting shared interests and
understanding as the children grow.

In conclusion, the trend of having children later in life is influenced by professional aspirations
and personal growth. While it brings benefits like financial security and emotional maturity, it
also introduces biological and energy-related challenges.

Writing Book Page- 360

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 121:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
More and more people are becoming seriously overweight. Some people think a
solution can be to increase the price of fattening foods.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The global rise in obesity presents a significant public health challenge. Some propose
increasing the cost of high-fat, sugary foods as a deterrent. While seemingly straightforward, I
largely disagree that this measure alone offers a comprehensive solution to this complex
issue.

Firstly, implementing higher taxes on unhealthy foods could disproportionately impact low-
income households. For many, these cheaper, calorie-dense options are staples due to their
affordability and accessibility. Increasing their price without providing affordable healthy
alternatives would merely exacerbate financial strain for vulnerable families, potentially
leading to further dietary imbalances or a shift to other inexpensive, equally unhealthy
products, rather than genuinely healthier choices.

Moreover, this approach fails to address the underlying causes of obesity. Lifestyle factors
such as sedentary habits, lack of nutritional education, and aggressive marketing of unhealthy
products are profound contributors. Simply raising prices on certain foods does not educate
individuals on healthy eating habits, encourage physical activity, or improve access to fresh,
affordable produce in food deserts. A comprehensive solution requires fostering awareness
and promoting healthier lifestyles through education and better infrastructure.

However, it is undeniable that increasing the cost of unhealthy items could provide some
benefits. A higher price might slightly deter impulsive purchases of junk food, particularly for
those with more disposable income. Furthermore, revenue generated from such taxes could
theoretically be reinvested into public health initiatives, subsidizing healthy food, or funding
educational campaigns on nutrition. This acknowledges a potential, albeit limited, positive
impact.

In conclusion, while increasing the price of fattening foods might offer minor benefits, it is an
insufficient and potentially regressive strategy. Addressing obesity demands a holistic
approach encompassing education, access to healthy options, and promoting active lifestyles.

Writing Book Page- 361

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 122:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many cities, planners tend to arrange shops, schools, offices and homes in specific
areas and separate them from each other.

Do you think the advantages of this policy outweigh the disadvantages?

Sample response:

Urban planners often segment cities into distinct zones for commercial, educational, and
residential purposes. While this policy presents some drawbacks, I believe its advantages
significantly outweigh the disadvantages, primarily regarding efficiency and specialized
development.

One primary advantage of this zoning policy is the enhanced safety and reduced
environmental impact on residential areas. By situating heavy industries and bustling
commercial hubs away from homes, planners can mitigate noise pollution, traffic congestion,
and the risks associated with industrial operations. This separation creates quieter, safer living
environments, especially beneficial for families and the elderly, ensuring that daily life is less
disturbed by the demands of business and industry.

Furthermore, segregated planning facilitates more efficient infrastructure development and the
provision of specialized services. Dedicated commercial zones can be equipped with robust
road networks, ample parking, and necessary utilities to support large-scale businesses and
high volumes of traffic. Similarly, educational districts can be designed with extensive green
spaces and fewer distractions, fostering a conducive learning environment. This specialization
allows for optimal resource allocation and tailored urban development.

However, critics argue that such segregation leads to increased commuting times and a
diminished sense of community. Residents often have to travel significant distances between
their homes, workplaces, and schools, leading to reliance on private vehicles or public
transport. This can result in prolonged journeys, higher transportation costs, and a less
integrated urban fabric where spontaneous social interactions are reduced.

In summary, despite the challenges posed by increased travel, the systematic segregation of
urban functions generally leads to more efficient, safer, and better-resourced city
environments, benefiting residents and businesses alike.

Writing Book Page- 362

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 123:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Nowadays, the quality of life in large cities is decreasing.

Why is this happening? What can be done to solve this problem?

Sample response:

The perception that the quality of life in large cities is diminishing is a growing concern
globally. While urban centres have long been magnets for opportunity and innovation, various
interconnected factors are now contributing to a decline in their liveability. I will explore the
primary reasons behind this trend and propose potential solutions to mitigate the problem.

One significant cause is rapid urbanization, leading to overpopulation and immense strain on
existing infrastructure. Densely packed cities often struggle with inadequate housing, resulting
in unaffordable living costs and the proliferation of informal settlements. Furthermore, the
sheer volume of people and vehicles contributes to severe environmental issues such as air
and noise pollution, which negatively impact public health. Traffic congestion becomes a daily
reality, increasing commute times and stress levels. The erosion of green spaces due to
rampant construction also deprives residents of vital areas for recreation and mental well-
being. Social issues like increased crime rates and a weakened sense of community can also
emerge in overcrowded environments.

Addressing these challenges requires a multi-faceted approach. Firstly, sustainable urban

planning is crucial, focusing on efficient public transportation networks and the creation of
more green spaces to improve environmental quality and resident well-being. Implementing
policies for affordable housing and urban regeneration can help alleviate housing shortages
and reduce inequality. Moreover, stringent regulations on industrial emissions and vehicle
pollution are essential to improve air quality. Investment in public services, including
healthcare and education, and community-led development initiatives can enhance social
cohesion and access to vital resources.

In conclusion, the decreasing quality of life in large cities stems primarily from unchecked
population growth, infrastructure deficits, and environmental degradation. However, through
strategic urban planning, investment in public services, and a commitment to sustainability,
cities can be transformed into healthier, more equitable, and liveable environments for all
residents.

Writing Book Page- 363

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 124:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
The world has many towns and cities constructed in previous centuries that were more
suitable and livable for people in those times than they are now.

What problems does this cause? What can be done to solve these problems?

Sample response:

Many towns and cities globally, designed and built centuries ago, served the needs of their
populations effectively in their respective eras. However, these historical urban landscapes
now pose significant challenges in terms of suitability and livability for contemporary residents,
whose lifestyles and demands have evolved dramatically.

One primary problem arising from these outdated designs is severe traffic congestion and
inadequate infrastructure. Narrow, winding streets, originally intended for foot traffic or horse-
drawn carriages, are ill-equipped to handle the volume and size of modern vehicles, leading to
gridlock, pollution, and extended commute times. Parking becomes a constant struggle,
further exacerbating the issue. Furthermore, older buildings often lack modern amenities,
accessibility features, and energy efficiency, making them less comfortable, more expensive
to maintain, and unsuitable for contemporary housing or commercial needs. Public spaces, if
they exist, may be insufficient or poorly integrated for modern recreational use.

To mitigate these problems, a multifaceted approach is required. Firstly, extensive investment

in public transport networks is crucial, alongside the strategic pedestrianisation of historic
cores to reduce vehicular traffic. Smart urban planning can involve creating designated
parking outside the most sensitive areas, complemented by shuttle services. Secondly,
adaptive reuse and sensitive renovation of existing buildings can transform them into energy-
efficient, accessible, and desirable spaces while preserving their architectural heritage.
Integrating green spaces and improving pedestrian and cycling paths can enhance livability.
Lastly, encouraging decentralized development and satellite towns can alleviate pressure on
historic centres, allowing them to be cherished for their cultural value rather than overwhelmed
by modern demands.

In conclusion, while historic urban centres are invaluable cultural assets, their antiquated
designs present significant challenges for modern living. Addressing these requires a blend of
infrastructure upgrades, sensitive architectural interventions, and forward-thinking urban
planning to ensure they remain vibrant and functional for future generations.

Writing Book Page- 364

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 125:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Innovation is often driven by the pursuit of profit and economic growth. However, some
argue that innovation should be targeted towards addressing social and environmental
issues.

Discuss both sides and give your own opinion.

Sample response:

In the contemporary world, the impetus behind innovation is a subject of considerable debate.
While some contend that the primary driver for technological and scientific advancement is the
quest for profit and economic expansion, others argue that innovation should fundamentally
be directed towards resolving pressing social and environmental problems. I will examine both
viewpoints before asserting that innovation’s ultimate purpose should be geared towards
addressing global challenges.

It is undeniable that the pursuit of financial gain and market dominance has historically fueled
much innovation. The promise of new revenue streams and competitive advantages motivates
businesses and entrepreneurs to invest heavily in research and development. This profit-
driven model has yielded countless products and services that have enhanced daily life,
created jobs, and spurred overall economic growth. From revolutionary smart devices to
efficient manufacturing processes, many advancements that improve living standards are
direct outcomes of commercial ambition.

However, a compelling argument exists that innovation’s focus should transcend mere
profitability and instead tackle critical social and environmental predicaments. Issues such as
climate change, resource depletion, global health crises, and poverty demand urgent and
creative solutions. Innovations in renewable energy, sustainable agriculture, affordable
healthcare, or waste management offer the potential for widespread benefits that extend
beyond economic metrics, contributing to a more equitable and habitable planet for future
generations. Prioritizing these areas aligns innovation with a sense of collective responsibility
and long-term societal well-being.

In my view, while commercial incentives can undoubtedly facilitate innovation, the overarching
goal should be to leverage human ingenuity for the greater good. The scale of the social and
environmental challenges we face necessitates a shift in focus, where scientific and
technological breakthroughs are primarily aimed at sustainability and human welfare, rather
than solely profit. Ultimately, innovation must evolve beyond purely commercial imperatives to
become a powerful tool for global betterment, addressing the fundamental needs and
existential threats facing humanity.
Writing Book Page- 365
Writing Module Task 2

Topic 126:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people believe that the typical teaching situation of a teacher and students in the
class will not exist by the year 2050.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The notion that conventional classroom teaching, with a teacher guiding students, will be
obsolete by 2050 is a compelling thought. While technological advancements will undoubtedly
transform education, I largely disagree that this fundamental structure will disappear entirely.

Firstly, the traditional classroom environment is indispensable for fostering crucial social and
collaborative skills. Learning extends beyond academic content; it involves developing
empathy, engaging in debates, and understanding diverse perspectives through direct peer
interaction. Teachers are instrumental in orchestrating these dynamic exchanges, mediating
discussions, and encouraging teamwork, which virtual platforms, despite their sophistication,
struggle to replicate authentically. The nuances of non-verbal communication and
spontaneous group dynamics are best cultivated in a physical setting.

Secondly, the irreplaceable human element of a teacher provides personalized guidance and
emotional support. A skilled educator can identify a student's struggles beyond what
algorithms can detect, offering tailored explanations, motivation, and immediate feedback that
adapts to individual learning styles. This emotional connection and mentorship are vital for
student well-being and academic confidence, particularly for younger learners or those facing
challenges. While AI tutors can deliver content, they cannot fully replicate the empathetic
understanding and holistic development offered by a human teacher.

Admittedly, the landscape of education will be significantly shaped by technology. Online

learning platforms, AI-powered adaptive curricula, and virtual reality experiences will
undoubtedly augment traditional methods, potentially allowing for more flexible access to
information and individualized pacing. These innovations might reduce the time spent on rote
instruction in physical classrooms. However, rather than replacing teachers, these tools are
more likely to integrate into a blended learning model, enhancing the teacher's capacity to
facilitate deeper learning and critical thinking.

In conclusion, while technology will profoundly evolve educational delivery, the core role of a
human teacher in a physical classroom, facilitating social development and providing tailored
guidance, will remain indispensable beyond 2050.

Writing Book Page- 366

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 127:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
When asked to choose between a life without work and working most of the time, most
people would choose not to work.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Many assert that given the choice, most individuals would opt for a life devoid of work rather
than dedicating the majority of their time to it. While the allure of perpetual leisure is
undeniable, I largely disagree with this perspective. A complete absence of work would
ultimately lead to a lack of purpose and overall dissatisfaction for the majority.

Work provides individuals with a fundamental sense of purpose and accomplishment.

Engaging in meaningful tasks, overcoming challenges, and seeing the tangible results of
one's efforts contribute significantly to self-worth and identity. Without the structure and goals
that work offers, many people would find their days lacking direction, potentially leading to
boredom, apathy, and even mental health issues. The satisfaction derived from personal and
professional growth often outweighs the immediate appeal of inactivity.

Furthermore, the workplace serves as a crucial hub for social interaction and community
building. Collaborating with colleagues, sharing ideas, and contributing to a collective goal
fosters a sense of belonging and camaraderie. Beyond personal fulfillment, work also allows
individuals to contribute to society, whether through innovation, service, or artistic expression.
This contribution, in itself, is a deeply gratifying aspect that a life without employment could
never replicate.

While it is true that the initial thought of unlimited free time is highly appealing, promising
freedom from stress and ample opportunity for hobbies, this desire is often based on the
notion of escapism rather than true contentment. Extended periods of idleness, devoid of
productive engagement or responsibility, often lead to feelings of emptiness and ennui.
Human beings are inherently driven to create, learn, and interact, needs that a life without
work would fail to address adequately.

In conclusion, despite the superficial attraction of a work-free existence, the intrinsic human
need for purpose, achievement, social connection, and contribution ensures that most people
would ultimately choose a life that includes meaningful work.

Writing Book Page- 367

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 128:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In today’s digital age, anyone with a smartphone can capture and share photographs.
This accessibility to photography diminishes the value of professional photographers.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

In the contemporary era, the widespread availability of smartphones has democratized

photography, enabling virtually anyone to capture images instantly. Some argue this
accessibility devalues professional photographers. However, I strongly disagree, believing
their expertise remains indispensable.

Professional photographers possess a depth of technical knowledge far beyond mere point-
and-shoot capabilities. They master intricate aspects such as lighting, composition, aperture,
shutter speed, and depth of field, which are critical for producing high-quality, impactful
images. Furthermore, their investment in specialized equipment, including high-end cameras,
diverse lenses, and advanced editing software, allows them to achieve results that a
smartphone simply cannot replicate, particularly in challenging environments like low light or
fast-paced events. This technical mastery ensures superior clarity, detail, and artistic control.

Beyond technical prowess, professional photographers offer a unique artistic vision and the
ability to tell a compelling story through their work. They understand how to evoke emotions,
capture fleeting moments, and create a narrative sequence that transforms simple pictures
into meaningful art. This involves an intuitive understanding of human connection, cultural
context, and aesthetic principles, which is cultivated over years of practice and experience.
Consequently, they provide a distinct creative perspective that goes far beyond casual
snapshots.

Admittedly, the proliferation of smartphone cameras has increased the volume of everyday
photography and has made basic image capture accessible to all. This might lead some to
believe that professional services are less necessary. However, while smartphones are
convenient for personal use, they largely serve as tools for documentation rather than for
creating high-calibre, print-ready, or commercial-grade photographs that require precision and
artistic finesse.

In conclusion, despite the ubiquity of smartphone photography, the profound value of

professional photographers, rooted in their technical skill and artistic discernment, remains
undiminished. Their specialized craft continues to be invaluable.

Writing Book Page- 368

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 129:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In the future it may be necessary for us to live on other planets. For this reason, some
people believe that we should spend money now to research other planets, such as
Mars.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

The notion that humanity might one day need to colonize other planets due to Earth's growing
challenges is gaining traction. Therefore, some advocate for current financial investment in
researching celestial bodies like Mars. I strongly agree that such expenditure is vital for our
species' long-term survival and advancement.

Primarily, investing in extraterrestrial research is a prudent contingency plan for humanity's

future. Our planet faces numerous existential threats, including climate change, resource
depletion, and the potential for catastrophic asteroid impacts or pandemics. A multi-planetary
existence would provide a crucial ‘backup’ for our civilization, ensuring the continuation of
human life even if Earth becomes uninhabitable. Early research helps identify suitable planets,
understand their environments, and develop the necessary technologies for future
colonization, such as life support systems and terraforming techniques.

Furthermore, the pursuit of space exploration inherently drives remarkable technological

innovation. The challenges of sending missions to Mars and beyond necessitate
breakthroughs in fields like propulsion, robotics, artificial intelligence, and materials science.
These advancements often have significant spillover benefits for life on Earth, leading to new
industries, medical innovations, and improved everyday technologies. Thus, funding space
research is not merely about escaping Earth but about propelling human ingenuity forward,
yielding tangible benefits here and now.

Conversely, some argue that diverting substantial funds towards space research is
irresponsible when pressing issues like poverty, hunger, and disease persist on Earth. They
contend that these immediate humanitarian crises should take precedence, as they affect
billions of people directly. While this perspective holds considerable moral weight, it overlooks
the long-term, potentially species-saving implications of space readiness.

In conclusion, despite the critical issues facing our world today, prioritizing investment in the
research of other planets like Mars is a forward-thinking and ultimately necessary endeavor. It
ensures the enduring legacy of humanity and fosters scientific and technological progress that
benefits all.

Writing Book Page- 369

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 130:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Some people think that shops should not be allowed to sell food or drinks that are
scientifically proven to be bad for people’s health.

Do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Some argue that retailers should be prohibited from selling food and beverages scientifically
proven to harm health. While this notion appears beneficial for public welfare, I largely
disagree with such a restrictive approach.

Primarily, banning these items infringes upon individual autonomy and personal choice. Adults
should have the freedom to decide what they consume, provided they are fully informed about
the potential risks. Instead of outright prohibitions, the focus should be on comprehensive
public health education campaigns, empowering individuals to make healthier decisions
independently. This fosters a sense of personal responsibility rather than relying on
governmental control.

Furthermore, implementing such bans could lead to significant economic repercussions. Many
businesses, from small convenience stores to large supermarkets, rely on the sale of these
products for a substantial portion of their revenue. A ban could result in job losses, reduced
tax income, and potentially the emergence of unregulated black markets for popular, albeit
unhealthy, items. This unintended consequence could paradoxically worsen public health
oversight.

However, proponents of bans argue that governments have a moral obligation to protect
public health and alleviate the strain on healthcare systems caused by diet-related illnesses.
They contend that the long-term societal benefits of reduced obesity and chronic diseases
outweigh individual freedoms. While this concern is valid, less draconian measures like
taxation on unhealthy items, clearer nutritional labelling, and promoting healthy alternatives
are often more effective and less disruptive.

In conclusion, while the intention behind banning unhealthy food sales is commendable, it
overly restricts personal liberty and could have adverse economic effects. Educating the
public and implementing supportive policies are preferable to blanket prohibitions.

Writing Book Page- 370

 Writing Module Task 2

Topic 131:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
In many workplaces, creativity and imagination are becoming more valued than
technical expertise.

Why is this the case? Is this a positive or negative development?

Sample response:

In today's rapidly evolving job market, a noticeable shift is occurring where qualities such as
creativity and imagination are increasingly gaining precedence over traditional technical
expertise. This essay will explore the underlying reasons for this phenomenon and then
evaluate whether this development represents a positive or negative trend.

The primary reason for this changing dynamic lies in the pervasive impact of automation and
artificial intelligence. Routine, repetitive, and even complex technical tasks can now be
efficiently handled by machines, rendering purely technical skills less unique and valuable.
Consequently, employers are seeking human attributes that machines cannot replicate: the
ability to think outside the box, generate novel ideas, and solve problems that lack clear
precedents. Furthermore, the globalized economy and intense market competition demand
continuous innovation. Companies must differentiate themselves through new products,
services, and strategies, which inherently rely on imaginative and creative thinking rather than
simply executing established procedures.

From my perspective, this development is largely a positive one. While technical expertise
remains crucial, the emphasis on creativity encourages a more dynamic and adaptable
workforce. It fosters environments where employees are empowered to contribute original
solutions, leading to breakthroughs and sustained growth. This focus on ingenuity also
promotes critical thinking and problem-solving skills, which are transferable across various
industries and future challenges. Moreover, jobs that allow for creative expression tend to be
more engaging and fulfilling, potentially leading to higher job satisfaction and lower turnover
rates. Although there is a risk that foundational technical skills might be undervalued, a
balanced approach where creativity enhances, rather than replaces, expertise is the ideal
outcome.

In conclusion, the rising importance of creativity and imagination in the workplace is primarily
driven by technological advancements and the need for innovation in competitive markets. I
believe this trend is overwhelmingly positive, as it promotes human ingenuity, adaptability, and
job enrichment, thereby preparing the workforce for the complexities of the future.

Writing Book Page- 371

Writing Module Task 2

Topic 132:
Present a written argument to an educated reader with no specialist knowledge of the
following topic:
Interviews form the basic selecting criteria for most large companies. However, some
people think that the interview is not a reliable method of choosing whom to employ.

To what extent do you agree or disagree?

Sample response:

Interviews are a cornerstone of the hiring process for many large corporations. However, a
growing sentiment suggests that this traditional method lacks the necessary reliability for
effective candidate selection. I largely agree with the view that interviews, while seemingly
indispensable, often fall short as a dependable gauge of an applicant's true capabilities and
suitability.

One primary concern is the inherent subjectivity involved. Interviewers, despite training, can
be swayed by unconscious biases, personal chemistry, or even a candidate's appearance,
rather than a dispassionate assessment of skills. Furthermore, the high-pressure environment
of an interview can significantly impede a candidate's performance. Many highly capable
individuals struggle with anxiety, leading them to underperform or fail to articulate their
strengths effectively, which does not reflect their actual competence in a less stressful work
setting.

Another critical limitation stems from the artificial nature of the interview scenario. It is a
simulated environment that rarely mirrors the daily demands or collaborative aspects of the
actual job. Candidates might give rehearsed answers, or present a polished persona that
doesn't accurately represent their work ethic or problem-solving approach. The lack of
standardization across interviews, even within the same company, can also lead to
inconsistent evaluation, making direct comparisons between candidates challenging and
potentially unfair.

However, it is important to acknowledge the merits of interviews. They offer a unique

opportunity to assess crucial soft skills like communication, interpersonal abilities, and cultural
fit – aspects that are difficult to ascertain solely from a resume or written tests. Interviews also
allow employers to clarify discrepancies, probe deeper into experiences, and gauge a
candidate's motivation and enthusiasm for the role.

In conclusion, while interviews provide valuable insights into a candidate's personality and
communication, their susceptibility to bias and the pressure they exert on applicants limit their
reliability. Therefore, they should be complemented by more objective assessment tools.

Writing Book Page- 372